LED TV

user manual

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
Model _____________ Serial No. _____________
 Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance.
Product design and specifications may be changed without notice.

Important Warranty Information Regarding Television Format Viewing

✎ See the warranty card for more information on warranty terms.

Wide screen format LED Displays (16:9, the aspect ratio of the screen width to height) are primarily designed to view wide screen format full-motion video.
The images displayed on them should primarily be in the wide screen 16:9 ratio format, or expanded to fill the screen if your model offers this feature and
the images are constantly moving. Displaying stationary graphics and images on screen, such as the dark sidebars on no expanded standard format
television video and programming, should be limited to no more than 5% of the total television viewing per week.
Additionally, viewing other stationary images and text such as stock market reports, video game displays, station logos, web sites or computer graphics
and patterns, should be limited as described above for all televisions. Displaying stationary images that exceed the above guidelines can cause uneven
aging of LED Displays that leave subtle, but permanent burned-in ghost images in the LED picture. To avoid this, vary the programming and images, and
primarily display full screen moving images, not stationary patterns or dark bars. On LED models that offer picture sizing features, use these controls to
view different formats as a full screen picture.
Be careful in the selection and duration of television formats used for viewing. Uneven LED aging as a result of format selection and use, as well as burned
in images, are not covered by your Samsung limited warranty.
• SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICAN LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Subject to the requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations of the original Limited Warranty supplied with Samsung Electronics (SAMSUNG)
products, and the requirements, conditions, exclusions and limitations contained herein, SAMSUNG will additionally provide Warranty Repair Service
in the United States on SAMSUNG products purchased in Canada, and in Canada on SAMSUNG products purchased in the United States, for the
warranty period originally specified, and to the Original Purchaser only.
The above described warranty repairs must be performed by a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center. Along with this Statement, the Original Limited
Warranty Statement and a dated Bill of Sale as Proof of Purchase must be presented to the Service Center. Transportation to and from the Service
Center is the responsibility of the purchaser. Conditions covered are limited only to manufacturing defects in material or workmanship, and only those
encountered in normal use of the product.
Excluded, but not limited to, are any originally specified provisions for, in-home or on-site services, minimum or maximum repair times, exchanges or
replacements, accessories, options, upgrades, or consumables.
For the location of a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center, please call toll-free:
– In the United States : 1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864)
– In Canada : 1-800-SAMSUNG

Still image warning

Avoid displaying still images (such as jpeg picture files) or still image elements (such as TV channel logos, panorama or 4:3 image format, stock or news
bars at screen bottom etc.) on the screen. Constant displaying of a still picture can cause ghosting of the LED screen, which will affect image quality. To
reduce risk of this effect, please follow the recommendations below:
• Avoid displaying the same TV channel for long periods.
• Always try to display a full screen image.
• Reducing brightness and contrast will help to avoid the appearance of after-images.
• Use all TV features designed to reduce image retention and screen burn, refer to proper user manual section for details.

Securing the Installation Space

Keep the required distances between the product and other objects (e.g. walls) to ensure proper ventilation.
Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product.
✎ When using a stand or wall-mount, use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only.
x If you use parts provided by another manufacturer, it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling.
✎ The appearance may differ depending on the product.

Installation with a stand. Installation with a wall-mount.

4 inches 4 inches

4 inches 4 inches 4 inches 4 inches

4 inches

 English
Contents
Getting Started Advanced Features
y List of Features ......................................................... 4 y Network Connection ............................................... 32
y Accessories .............................................................. 4 Connecting to a Wired Network 32
y Viewing the Control Panel ......................................... 5 Connecting to a Wireless Network 34
y Mini Remote Control ................................................. 6 y Media Play .............................................................. 39
y Viewing the Touch Control ........................................ 7 Connecting a USB Device 39
y Connecting to an Antenna ...................................... 10 Connecting to your PC through a network 39
y Plug & Play (Initial Setup) ......................................... 10 Screen Display 41
Playing Multiple Files 44
Media Play - Additional Functions 44
Connections
y Anynet+ .................................................................. 46
y Connecting to an AV Device.................................... 11 Setting Up Anynet+ 47
y Connecting to an Audio Device ............................... 13 Switching between Anynet+ Devices 47
y Connecting to a PC ................................................ 14 Recording 48
y Changing the Input Source ..................................... 15 Listening through a Receiver 48
Troubleshooting for Anynet+ 49
Basic Features y Internet@TV ............................................................ 50
Getting Started with Internet@TV 50
y How to Navigate Menus.......................................... 15 Setting up Internet@TV 51
y Channel Menu ........................................................ 16 Using the Internet@TV service 53
Seeing Channels 16 PROFILE Widget 55
Using Favorite Channels 16 Widget Gallery 55
Memorizing Channels 16 Troubleshooting for Internet@TV 56
Editing Channels 17 Help Website 56
Other Features 17 y AllShare .................................................................. 57
y Picture Menu .......................................................... 18 About AllShare 57
Changing the Preset Picture Mode 18 Setting Up AllShare 57

ENGLISH
Adjusting Picture Settings 18
Economical Solutions 18
Other Information
Changing the Picture Options 19
Viewing TV using the 3D function 21 y Assembling the Cables ........................................... 59
Setting up the TV with Your PC 24 y Securing the TV to the Wall ..................................... 60
y Sound Menu ........................................................... 24 y Troubleshooting ...................................................... 61
Changing the Preset Sound Mode 24 y Enclosed Wireless LAN Adapter.............................. 64
Adjusting Sound Settings 24 y License ................................................................... 65
Sound Settings 25 y Specifications ......................................................... 65
y Setup Menu ............................................................ 26 y Dimensions ............................................................. 66
Setting the Time 26 y Index ...................................................................... 67
Using the Sleep Timer 26 y Regulatory Compliance Information......................... 68
Setting the On / Off Timer 26
Locking Programs 27
Other Features 28
y Support Menu......................................................... 30

Check the Symbol!

TOOLS
8
Note Step by Step Guide
This function can be used by pressing the Indicates additional information. Check here for instructions on how to open
TOOLS button on the remote control. the relevant submenu within the OSD (on
screen display).

English 
Getting Started
List of Features
y Excellent Digital Interface & Networking: With a built-in HD digital tuner, nonsubscription HD broadcasts can be viewed
without a cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver.
y Media Play: Allows you to play music files, pictures, and movies saved on a USB device (p. 39).
y Internet@TV: You can use various internet services and view useful information and entertaining content (p. 50).
y AllShare: AllShare connects your TV and compatible Samsung mobile phones/devices through a network (p. 57).
y Self Diagnosis: You can check whether picture or sound operate normally (p. 30).
y 3D: This exciting new feature enables you to view 3D content.

Accessories

✎ Please make sure the following items are included with your LED TV. If any items are missing, contact your dealer.
✎ The items' colors and shapes may vary depending on the models.
y Owner’s Instructions y Warranty Card / Safety Guide / Quick Setup Guide
y Cleaning Cloth (BN63-01798B)

(M4XL12)
AV Adapter Component Adapter TV-Holder & Screw (1EA) Holder-Wire (4EA)
(BN39-01154H) (BN39-01154C) (BN96-10788D) (BN61-05373A)

Mini Remote Control & Samsung Wireless Lan USB adapter

Lithium battery Adapter For stand type For wall mount type
(BN59-00788A) (WIS09ABGN2)

Touch Control

y Owner’s Instructions y Warranty Card / Quick Setup Guide

L
VO

Touch Control Cable Power Adapter Touch Control Battery

Wall Mount Box (Assembly to Wall)

✎ Three of each type of screw are supplied. Only two are required for assembly. The other is a spare.
A B

(3EA) (3EA) (2EA)

(3EA) (3EA)
M5X65mm-Wood M5X60mm-Machine

 English
✎ For best cable connection to this product, be sure to use cables with a maximum thickness as below:

01 Getting Started
y Maximum thickness - 0.55 inches (14mm)

Input Cables (Sold Separately)

HDMI HDMI-DVI Component Composite (AV) Coaxial (RF) VGA

Viewing the Control Panel

✎ The product color and shape may vary depending on the model.

Power Indicator
3D Emitter Remote control sensor

Woofer

Speakers Speakers
SOURCE MENU
VOL CH

✎ To control the TV using the LED touch pad, tap the LED touch pad centered underneath the stand. The touch pad will
slide out by itself. The LED touch pad will slide back in if unused for a specified period of time.

3D Emitter The LED on the 3D emitter blinks only when sending a 3D signal.
Power Indicator Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in standby mode.
Remote control sensor Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV.
SOURCE Toggles between all the available input sources. In the on-screen menu, use this
button as you would use the ENTER button on the remote control.
MENU3 Displays an on-screen menu, the OSD (on screen display) of your TV’s features.
: Adjusts the volume. In the OSD, use the : buttons as you would use the
 and  buttons on the remote control.
; Changes the channels. In the OSD, use the ; buttons as you would use the
 and  buttons on the remote control.
# (Power) Turns the TV on or off.

Standby mode
Do not leave your TV in standby mode for long periods of time (when you are away on a holiday, for example). A small amount
of electric power is still consumed even when the power button is turned off. It is best to unplug the power cord.

English 
Getting Started
Mini Remote Control
The Mini Remote Control is a simplified remote control that consists of the power, channel and volume buttons only.

F Description

IrDA transmitter
Power On/Off button
✎ Point the IrDA transmitter at the TV
to use the mini remote.
Next channel
Volume decrease Volume increase
Previous channel

✎ This is a special remote control for the visually impaired and has Braille points on the Channel and Volume buttons.
CALIFORNIA USA ONLY
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold
or distributed ONLY in California USA ‘Perchloate Material - special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardouswaste/perchlorate:’

F Inserting the battery

1. Turn the battery cover counterclockwise to unlock it and then
separate the battery cover.
OPEN

2. Insert a 3V Lithium battery with the + side facing down into the
battery cover. CLOSE

3. Place the battery cover into the remote control aligning it with the
grooves and then turn the battery cover clockwise to lock the
cover.
✎ If the remote control doesn’t work, check the following:
x Is the TV power on?
x Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed?
x Are the batteries drained?
x Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged?
x Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby?

 English
 01 Getting Started
Viewing the Touch Control

F Description

Front View Rear View

TV Power button
Battery cover
TE
MU
CH
Touch screen CE
UR
SO
L
VO Charge Port
E
MUT
CH
CE
SO
L
VO

Speaker Earphone jack

Power Turn the TV on and off.

MUTE Mute or unmute the sound.
SOURCE Display the source list (TV, PC, etc.) on the screen.

Volume Press to control the volume.

Channel Press to change channels.

F Inserting the battery

1. Slide and open the battery cover 2. Insert the battery with the 3. Slide and close the battery
in the direction of the arrow. Samsung logo facing up. cover in the direction of the
arrow.

English 
Getting Started
F Remote Control Screen Display

1 Initial Screen

.H\ERDUG

79&RQWURO 6HUYLFHV

Press to directly access channels.

Returns to the previous channel.

1DYLJDWLRQ
Press to select additional channels (digital) being broadcasted by the same station. For example, to
select channel “54-3”, press “54”, then press “–” and “3”.

2 Drag to the Left direction

.H\ERDUG CONTENT: Displays the Content View, which includes Channel List, Internet@TV, Media Play,
79&RQWURO 6HUYLFHV
AllShare and 3D.
MENU: Brings up the OSD.
&217(17 0(18 ,17(51(7 INTERNET@TV: Link to various internet services (p. 50).
#79

RETURN$: Returns to the previous menu.

TOOLS%: Quickly select frequently used functions.
INFO : Displays information on the TV screen.
EXIT/: Exits the menu.
Use these buttons in Media Play and Anynet+ modes (p. 39, 46).
(Q: Controls recording for Samsung recorders that have the Anynet+ feature)

Buttons used in the Channel List, Internet@TV, Media Play menu, etc.
1DYLJDWLRQ

3 Tap the Navigation or Menu button.

4 Tap Services.

.H\ERDUG
INTERNET@TV: Link to various internet
79&RQWURO 6HUYLFHV 79&RQWURO 6HUYLFHV services (p. 50).
MEDIA.P: Displays Media Play (p. 39).
3D: Sets the 3D mode. (p. 22).
YAHOO!: Runs the Yahoo widget. (p. 54).
CHLIST: Displays channel lists on the screen
(p. 16).
FAV.CH: Displays Favorite Channel Lists on the
screen (p. 16).
P.SIZE: Selects the picture size (p. 20).
CC: Controls the caption decoder (p.
28).
MTS: Press to choose stereo, mono or
Separate Audio Program (SAP broadcast)
(p. 25).
Selects the on-screen menu
items and changes the values
seen on the menu.

 English
F Setting Up Your Remote

01 Getting Started
You can set up your Touch Control to control your TV in three ways:

As a standard, IR (Infra Red) remote

As an IR remote, your LCD Touch Control works the same way as a standard push button remote, except you touch icons and
symbols on the LCD screen to control your TV instead of pushing buttons. Using your Touch Control as an IR remote requires
no more set up than a standard remote and gives you access to most of the remote’s functions and features.

As an extended distance, Wi-Fi remote

As an extended distance, Wi-Fi remote, your Touch Control offers all the functions and features of the IR mode and, because
it uses Wi-Fi radio waves instead of infra red waves to control your TV, it lets you control your TV from a much greater distance
and even from around corners. It also gives you access to the Twin Display function which lets you watch the program or
content that is on your TV screen on the LCD screen of the Touch Control. The long distance, Wi-Fi mode requires a few
additional setup steps; possibly including re-initialization. It also requires you to attach Samsung’s Wireless LAN Adapter
(WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, or WIS10ABGN) to one of your TV’s USB ports.

As a networked, Wi-Fi remote

As a networked, Wi-Fi remote, your Touch Control gives you all the functions and features of the IR and the extended distance
modes and also gives you access to the Multimedia function which lets you listen to or view music, movie, and picture files
from your PC on your TV screen. You can also download upgrades to your Touch Control’s software directly from the Internet.
The networked, Wi-Fi mode requires the largest number of setup steps. In addition, to use the networked, Wi-Fi mode,
you need a working local area network and a wireless router. You also need to attach Samsung’s Wireless LAN Adapter
(WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, or WIS10ABGN) to one of your TV’s USB ports. To use the Multimedia function, you need to
install Samsung’s PC Share Manager on your PC. You can download PC Share Manager from http://www.samsung.com.

F Setting up the Network

You can set up a wireless network for the Touch Control.

How to connect using PBC (WPS)

If your router has a PBC (WPS) button, follow these steps: 

  
1. Connect your TV to your LAN. 

 



2. On the Services screen, touch Settings  Remote Settings.
  ! "
3. Touch Network.
#
4. Touch the PBC(WPS).
5. If the Press PBC button on the access point within 120 seconds. message appears,
press the PBC button on the device to connect.
✎ For more information, refer to the wireless network setup manual of the device to be connected.
6. If the device is connected properly to the TV after starting count on message box then message box will be disappeared
automatically.
✎ If the connection fails, please retry after 2 minutes.

Connecting to network
To setup the wireless connection automatically, follow these steps:
1HWZRUN
1. Follow Steps 1 through 3 in the “How to connect using PBC (WPS)” procedure.
✎ If the intended network cannot be found in the list, select to open the list of
6HOHFWDQHWZRUN

networks again. $XWR&RQ¿JXUDWLRQ

2. Select a network and connect to the network using the encryption method (PIN, security 8QVHFXUHG
key, ad-hoc, etc.) set for the network.
6HFXUHG
3. When the network connection is complete, select Test to perform a network test.
✎ For the automatic IP, the AP will automatically define the IP Address, Subnet Mask, 8QVHFXUHG

Gateway and DNS server. 6HFXUHG

✎ For the manual IP, you can select Edit and directly enter the IP Address, Subnet 3%&:36
Mask, Gateway and DNS server.
✎ For Full Touch Control instructions, please read the Touch Control's user manual.
English 
Getting Started
Connecting to an Antenna
When the TV is initially powered on, basic settings proceed automatically.
✎ Connecting the power cord and antenna.
VHF/UHF Antenna

Cable
ANT OUT
or

$ % &'#% (

Plug & Play (Initial Setup)

When the TV is initially powered on, a sequence of on-screen prompts will assist in configuring basic settings. Press the
POWER# button. Plug & Play is available only when the Input source is set to TV.
✎ To return to the previous step, press the Red button.
y Turn on the Touch Control and then tap OK on
1 Turn on the TV and
Touch Control. your remote.
✎ It may take about one minute to establish a
wireless connection between the TV and Touch
Control using the Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter.

y Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the TV. You can connect the Samsung
2 Connect the Samsung
Wireless LAN Adapter Wireless LAN Adapter using the method shown on page 35.
y If the connection fails, reconnect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter and then try
again.

3 Selecting a language Press the  or  button, then press the ENTER button.
Select the desired OSD (On Screen Display) language.

4 Selecting Store Demo

or Home Use
Press the  or  button, then press the ENTER button.
y Select the Home Use mode. Store Demo Mode is for retail environments.
y To return the unit’s settings from Store Demo to Home Use (standard): Press the
volume button on the TV. When you see the volume OSD, press and hold MENU for 5
sec.

5 Selecting an antenna Press the  or  button, then press the ENTER button. Select Air, Cable or Auto.

6 Selecting a channel
Press the  or  button, then press the ENTER button. Select the channel source
to memorize. When setting the antenna source to Cable, a step appears allowing you to
assign numerical values (channel frequencies) to the channels. For more information, refer to
Channel  Auto Program (p. 16).
✎ Press the ENTER button at any time to interrupt the memorization process.

7 Setting the Clock

Mode
Set the Clock Mode automatically or manually.
y Auto: Allows you to select DST (Daylight Saving Time) mode and time zone.
y Manual: Allows you to manually set the current date and time (p. 26).

8 View the HD
Connection Guide
The connection method for the best HD screen quality is displayed.

9 Enjoy your TV. Press the ENTER button.

If You Want to Reset This Feature...

" MENU  Setup  Plug & Play  ENTER

 English
Connections

02 Connections
Connecting to an AV Device

Using an HDMI or HDMI/DVI Cable: HD connection (up to 1080p)

We recommend using the HDMI connection for the best quality HD picture.
Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, HD cable box, HD STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver

$% 
&'#% ( *+,-+.-% &'#% ( *+,-% 
&'#% (

Device Device

AUDIO OUT DVI OUT R W HDMI OUT

R AUD O L
  ) 

✎ HDMI IN 1(DVI), 2(ARC), 3, 4, PC/DVI AUDIO IN

x For better picture and audio quality, connect to a digital device using an HDMI cable.
x An HDMI cable supports digital video and audio signals, and does not require an audio cable.
– To connect the TV to a digital device that does not support HDMI output, use an HDMI/DVI and audio cables.
x The picture may not display normally (if at all) or the audio may not work if an external device that uses an older
version of HDMI mode is connected to the TV. If such a problem occurs, ask the manufacturer of the external
device about the HDMI version and, if out of date, request an upgrade.
x Be sure to use an HDMI cable with a thickness of 14 mm or less.
x Be sure to purchase a certified HDMI cable. Otherwise, the picture may not display or a connection error may
occur.
x A basic high-speed HDMI cable or one with ethernet is recommended. This product does not support the
ethernet function via HDMI.
x This product supports the 3D and ARC (Audio Return Channel) functions via an HDMI cable. Note that the
ARC function is supported by the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port only.
– If 3D Auto View is set to On, some functions such as Internet@TV may be disabled. In this case, set
3D Auto View or 3D Mode to Off.
x The ARC function allows digital audio to output via the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port. It can be enabled only when the
TV is connected with an audio receiver that supports the ARC function.

English 
Connections
Using a Component (up to 1080p) or Audio/Video (480i only) Cable
Available devices: DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box, STB satellite receiver, VCR

Device

COMPONENT OUT AUDIO OUT

PR PB Y R AUD O L

R B G R W

 $ 
&#  (

R
B
R B G R W

. % 

G
&'#% (
  % /    ) 

R
W
$% 
$.$ &#  ( &'#% (

Device

AUDIO OUT VIDEO OUT

R AUD O L

R W Y

$% 
&'#% (

R W Y
W

$.$ &#  (
Y

  )  0 %% . % &'#% (

✎ For better picture quality, the Component connection is recommended over the A/V connection.

Using an EX-Link Cable Connection

Available Devices: External devices that support EX-Link.

EX-LINK: Connector for service only.

 English
 02 Connections
Connecting to an Audio Device

Using an Optical (Digital) or Audio (Analog) Cable Connection

Available devices: Digital Audio System, Amplifier, DVD home theater

Digital Audio System

OPTICAL

1%% &'#% (

R W
$% &'#% ( Amplifier /
  ) 
AUDIO N DVD home theater
R AUDIO L

✎ DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL)

x When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack, decrease the volume
of both the TV and the system.
x 5.1 CH (channel) audio is available when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5.1 CH.
x When the receiver (home theater) is set to on, you can hear sound output from the TV’s optical jack. When the
TV is receiving a DTV signal, the TV will send 5.1 CH sound to the home theater receiver. When the source is
a digital component such as a DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB (Set-Top-Box) satellite receiver and is
connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 CH audio will be heard from the home theater receiver. If you want to
hear 5.1 CH audio, connect the digital audio out jack from your DVD / Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite
receiver directly to an amplifier or home theater.
✎ AUDIO OUT: Connects to the audio input jacks on your amplifier/DVD home theater.
x When connecting, use the appropriate connector.
x When an audio amplifier is connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks: Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the
volume level with the amplifier’s volume control.

English 
Connections
Connecting to a PC

Using an HDMI/DVI cable or a D-sub cable

$% &'#% (

AUDIO OUT

DVI OUT

*+,-+.-% &'#% (

+2#% &'#% (

PC OUT

$% &'#% ( AUDIO OUT

Display Modes (D-Sub and HDMI/DVI Input)

Optimal resolution is 1920 X 1080 @ 60 Hz.
Horizontal Frequency Vertical Frequency Pixel Clock Frequency Sync Polarity
Mode Resolution
(KHz) (Hz) (MHz) (H / V)
640 x 350 31.469 70.086 25.175 +/-
IBM
720 x 400 31.469 70.087 28.322 -/+
640 x 480 35.000 66.667 30.240 -/-
MAC 832 x 624 49.726 74.551 57.284 -/-
1152 x 870 68.681 75.062 100.000 -/-
720 x 576 35.910 59.950 32.750 -/+
1152 x 864 53.783 59.959 81.750 -/+
VESA CVT
1280 x 720 56.456 74.777 95.750 -/+
1280 x 960 75.231 74.857 130.000 -/+
640 x 480 31.469 59.940 25.175 -/-
640 x 480 37.861 72.809 31.500 -/-
640 x 480 37.500 75.000 31.500 -/-
800 x 600 37.879 60.317 40.000 +/+
800 x 600 48.077 72.188 50.000 +/+
800 x 600 46.875 75.000 49.500 +/+
1024 x 768 48.363 60.004 65.000 -/-
1024 x 768 56.476 70.069 75.000 -/-
1024 x 768 60.023 75.029 78.750 +/+
1152 x 864 67.500 75.000 108.000 +/+
VESA DMT
1280 x 1024 63.981 60.020 108.000 +/+
1280 x 1024 79.976 75.025 135.000 +/+
1280 x 720 45.000 60.000 74.250 +/+
1280 x 800 49.702 59.810 83.500 -/+
1280 x 800 62.795 74.934 106.500 -/+
1280 x 960 60.000 60.000 108.000 +/+
1360 x 768 47.712 60.015 85.500 +/+
1440 x 900 55.935 59.887 106.500 -/+
1440 x 900 70.635 74.984 136.750 -/+
1680 x 1050 65.290 59.954 146.250 -/+
1280 x 720 52.500 70.000 89.040 -/+
VESA GTF
1280 x 1024 74.620 70.000 128.943 -/-
VESA DMT / DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67.500 60.000 148.500 +/+

✎ NOTE
x For HDMI/DVI cable connection, you must use the HDMI IN 1(DVI) jack.
x The interlace mode is not supported.
x The set may operate abnormally if a non-standard video format is selected.
x Separate and Composite modes are supported. SOG(Sync On Green) is not supported.

 English
 02 Connections
Changing the Input Source Edit Name
" MENU  Input  Edit Name  ENTER
Source List
■ VCR / DVD / Cable STB / Satellite STB / PVR STB /
Use to select TV or an external input sources such as a DVD AV Receiver / Game / Camcorder / PC / DVI PC / DVI
/ Blu-ray player / cable box / STB satellite receiver. Devices / TV / IPTV / Blu-ray / HD DVD / DMA: Name
the device connected to the input jacks to make your
" MENU  Input  Source List  ENTER input source selection easier.

■ TV / PC / AV / Component / HDMI1/DVI / HDMI2 /

✎ When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 @ 60Hz is
connected to the HDMI IN 1(DVI) port, you should set
HDMI3 / HDMI4 / USB
the TV to DVI PC mode under Edit Name.
✎ You can only choose external devices that
✎ When connecting an HDMI/DVI cable to the HDMI IN
are connected to the TV. In the Source List,
connected inputs will be highlighted. 1(DVI) port, you should set the TV to DVI PC or DVI
Devices mode under Edit Name.
✎ In the Source List, PC is always activated.

Basic Features
How to Navigate Menus How to Operate the OSD (On Screen Display)

Before using the TV, follow the steps below to learn how to The access step may differ depending on the selected menu.
navigate the menu and select and adjust different functions.
.H\ERDUG .H\ERDUG
1 MENU The main menu options appear on
the screen:
79&RQWURO 6HUYLFHV 79&RQWURO 6HUYLFHV Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup,
,17(51(7
Input, Application, Support.
&217(17 0(18 #79

2 / Select an icon with the  or 
button.

3 ENTER Press ENTER to access the

sub-menu.

4 / Select the desired submenu with
the  or  button.

1DY JDW RQ


5 / Adjust the value of an item with the
 or  button. The adjustment in
the OSD may differ depending on
the selected menu.
 MENU button: Displays the main on-screen menu.
ENTER 
 ENTER / Direction button: Move the cursor and
select an item. Confirm the setting.
6 Press ENTER to confirm the
selection.
EXIT /
 EXIT button: Exits the on-screen menu.
 RETURN button: Returns to the previous menu.
7 Press EXIT.

English 
Basic Features
Channel Menu F Using Favorite Channels

F Seeing Channels " MENU  Channel  Channel List  ENTER

Add to Favorite / Delete from Favorite

Channel List 8
Add, delete or set Favorite channels and use
Set channels you watch frequently as Favorites.
the program guide for digital broadcasts.
1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button.
" MENU  Channel  Channel List  CHLIST
2. Add or delete a channel using the Add to Favorite or
ENTER Delete from Favorite menu respectively.
Select a channel in the All Channels, Added
6 Air
Channels, Favorite or Programmed screen by
61 * TV #6
pressing the  /  and ENTER buttons.

$   %

Then you can watch the selected channel. 7 Air + % 

$;<
6 Air 8 Air
! . 
9 Air
61 * TV #6   %' =
$   %

91 * TV #9 # % $%%

7 Air 10 Air
10 1 * TV #10
8 Air
11 1 * TV #11
9 Air
91 * TV #9 $ $  B : # % 1 =%=!%

10 Air
10 1 * TV #10 To show all Favorite channels, click on
11 1 * TV #11 the button shown on the right.
$ $  B : # % 1 =%=!%

FAV.CH
■ All Channels: Shows all currently available channels.
■ Added Channels: Shows all added channels.
■  Favorite: Shows all favorite channels.
F Memorizing Channels
■ Programmed: Shows all currently reserved
programs. " MENU  Channel  ENTER
✎ Using the color buttons with the Channel List
x Red (Antenna): Switches to Air or Cable.
Antenna (Air / Cable) 8
x Green (Zoom): Enlarges or shrinks a channel
B

number. Before your television can begin memorizing the available

channels, you must specify the type of signal source that is
x Yellow (Select): Selects multiple channel lists.
connected to the TV (i.e. an Air or a Cable system).
Select desired channels and press the Yellow button
to set all the selected channels at the same time. The
- mark appears to the left of the selected channels. Auto Program
x 1 (Page): Move to next or previous page.
■ Air: Air antenna signal.
x % (Tools): Displays the Channel List option menu.
(The options menus may differ depending on the ■ Cable: Cable antenna signal.
situation.) ■ Auto: Air and Cable antenna.
Channel Status Display Icons

Icons Operations
- A channel selected.
 A channel set as a Favorite.
 A reserved Program.

 English
✎ NOTE
x When selecting the Cable TV system: STD, HRC
and IRC identify various types of cable TV systems.
Contact your local cable company to identify the
type of cable system that exists in your particular
area. At this point, the signal source has been
selected.
x After all the available channels are stored, it starts
to remove scrambled channels. The Auto Program
menu then reappears.
F Editing Channels
" MENU  Channel  Channel List  ENTER
Channel Name Edit
1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button.
2. Edit the channel name using the Channel Name Edit
menu.
■ Channel Name Edit (analog channels only): Assign your
own channel name.
F Other Features
" MENU  Channel  ENTER
Clear Scrambled Channel
This function is used to filter out scrambled channels after
Auto Program is completed. This process may take up to
20~30 minutes.
How to Stop Searching Scrambled Channels
1. Press the ENTER button to select Stop.
2. Press the  button to select Yes.
3. Press the ENTER button.
✎ This function is only available in Cable mode.
Channel List
Channel List Option Menu
Set each channel using the Channel List menu options (Add
/ Delete, Timer Viewing, Select All / Deselect All). Option
menu items may differ depending on the channel status.
1. Select a channel and press the TOOLS button.
2. Select a function and change its settings.
■ Add / Delete: Delete or add a channel to display the
channels you want.
✎
03 Basic Features
NOTE
x All deleted channels will be shown on the All
Channels menu.
x A gray-colored channel indicates the channel
has been deleted.
x The Add menu only appears for deleted
channels.
x Delete a channel from the Added Channels or
Favorite menu in the same manner.
■ Timer Viewing: You can set a desired channel to be
displayed automatically at the reserved time. Set the
current time first to use this function.
1. Press the  /  /  /  buttons to select the
desired channel in Channel List.
2. Press the TOOLS button, then select Timer
Viewing.
3. Scroll up or down to adjust the settings in the box,
or use the numeric buttons on your remote to enter
the date and time.
✎ If you selected Once, Every Week or EveryDay
in Repeat you can enter the date you want.
4. Select OK, then press the ENTER button when
done.
✎ NOTE
x Only memorized channels can be reserved.
x Reserved programs will be displayed in the
Programmed menu.
x When a digital channel is selected, press the 
button to view the digital program.
■ Select All: Select all the channels in the channel list.
■ Deselect All: Deselect all the selected channels.
✎ You can only select Deselect All when one or
more channels are selected.
Programmed
(in Channel List)
You can view, modify or delete a show you have reserved
to watch. Programmed timer viewing is displayed here.
Highlight a program and press the TOOLS button to display
Options.
■ Change Info: Change a show you have reserved to
watch. Begin with step 3 of “Timer Viewing” above.
■ Cancel Schedules: Cancel a show you have reserved
to watch.
✎ This deletes the highlighted or selected
program(s).
English 
Basic Features
■ Information: Display a show you have reserved
to watch. (You can also change the reservation
Information.)
✎ Alternatively, you can view Information by
highlighting a program and pressing the
ENTER button.
■ Select All / Deselect All: Select or deselect all reserved
programs.
Fine Tune
(analog channels only)
If the reception is clear, you do not have to fine tune the
channel, as this is done automatically during the search and
store operation. If the signal is weak or distorted, fine tune
the channel manually. Scroll to the left or right until the image
is clear.
✎ Settings are applied to the channel you're currently
watching.
✎ Fine tuned channels that have been saved are marked
with an asterisk “*” on the right-hand side of the
channel number in the channel banner.
✎ To reset the fine-tuning, select Reset.
Picture Menu
F Changing the Preset Picture Mode
" MENU  Picture  Mode  ENTER
Mode 8
Select your preferred picture type.
■ Dynamic: Suitable for a bright room.
■ Standard: Suitable for a normal environment.
■ Natural: Suitable for reducing eye strain.
✎ Natural is not available in PC mode.
■ Movie: Suitable for watching movies in a dark room.
 English
F Adjusting Picture Settings
" MENU  Picture  ENTER
Backlight / Contrast / Brightness /
Sharpness / Color / Tint (G/R)
Your television has several setting options for picture quality
control.
✎ NOTE
x When you make changes to Backlight, Contrast,
Brightness, Sharpness, Color or Tint (G/R) the
OSD will be adjusted accordingly.
x In PC mode, you can only make changes to
Backlight, Contrast and Brightness.
x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each
external device connected to the TV.
F Economical Solutions
The Eco Function can be used to enhance your power
savings.
Eco Solution
" MENU  Picture  Eco Solution  ENTER
■ Energy Saving (Off / Low / Medium / High / Picture
Off / Auto): This adjusts the brightness of the TV in
order to reduce power consumption. If you select
Picture Off, the screen is turned off, but the sound
remains on. Press any button except the volume button
to turn on the screen.
■ Eco Sensor (Off / On): To enhance your power savings;
the picture settings will automatically adapt to the light
in the room.
✎ If you adjust the Backlight, the Eco Sensor will
be set to Off.
Min Backlight: When Eco sensor is On, the minimum
screen brightness can be adjusted manually.
✎ If Eco Sensor is On, the display brightness may
change (become slightly darker in most cases)
depending on the surrounding light intensity.
■ No Signal Power Off (Off / 15 min. / 30 min. / 60
min.): To avoid unnecessary energy consumption,
set how long you want the TV to remain on if it's not
receiving a signal.
✎ Disabled when the PC is in power saving mode.
F Changing the Picture Options ■ RGB Only Mode (Off / Red / Green / Blue): Displays

03 Basic Features
the Red, Green and Blue color for making fine
adjustments to the hue and saturation.
Advanced Settings ■ Color Space (Auto / Native / Custom): Adjust the
range of colors available to create the image. To adjust
" MENU  Picture  Advanced Settings  Color, Red, Green, Blue and Reset, set Color Space
ENTER to Custom.
(Advanced Settings are available in Standard / Movie mode) ■ White Balance: Adjust the color temperature for a more
Compared to previous models, new Samsung TVs have a natural picture.
more precise picture. R-Offset / G-Offset / B-Offset: Adjust each color's
✎ In PC mode, you can only make changes to Dynamic (red, green, blue) darkness.
Contrast, Gamma and White Balance, LED Motion R-Gain / G-Gain / B-Gain: Adjust each color's (red,
Plus. green, blue) brightness.
Reset: Resets the White Balance to it's default

  settings.
%>!  "1??   ■ 10p White Balance (Off / On): Controls the white
+@
 ",  balance in 10 point intervals by adjusting the red, green,
# + % "2 and blue brightness.
/ " ✎ Available when the picture mode is set to Movie
=F   "1?? and when the external input is set to HDMI or
/1%@,  "1?? Component.
%#  "'< ✎ Some external devices may not support this
 function.
&,< === =$=  Interval: Select interval to adjust.
Red: Adjust the red level.
■ Black Tone (Off / Dark / Darker / Darkest): Select the Green: Adjust the green level.
black level to adjust the screen depth. Blue: Adjust the blue level.
■ Dynamic Contrast (Off / Low / Medium / High): Adjust Reset: Resets the 10p White Balance to its default
the screen contrast. settings.
■ Flesh Tone: Emphasize pink “Flesh Tone.”
■ Shadow Detail (-2~+2): Increase the brightness of dark
images. ■ Edge Enhancement (Off / On): Emphasize object
boundaries.
■ Gamma: Adjust the primary color intensity.
■ xvYCC (Off / On): Setting the xvYCC mode on
■ Expert Pattern (Off / Pattern1 / Pattern2): By
increases detail and color space when watching movies
running the Expert Pattern function, the picture can
from an external device (e.g. BD/DVD player) connected
be calibrated. If the OSD menu disappears or a menu
to the HDMI or Component IN jacks.
other than the Picture menu is opened, the calibration is
saved and the Expert Pattern window disappears. ✎ Available when the picture mode is set to Movie
and when the external input is set to HDMI or
Off: Turns the Expert Pattern function off.
Component.
Pattern1: This is a test screen designed to demonstrate
the affects of display settings on shades. ✎ Some external devices may not support this
function.
Pattern2: This is a test screen designed to demonstrate
the affects of display settings on colors. ■ LED Motion Plus (Off / On): Removes drag from fast
✎ After selecting Pattern1 or Pattern2, you can scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clear picture.
adjust any of the advanced settings to the desired
effect.
✎ While the Expert Pattern is running, sound is not
output.
✎ Only enabled in DTV, Component and HDMI
modes.

English 
Basic Features
Picture Options
" MENU  Picture  Picture Options  ENTER
✎ In PC mode, you can only make changes to the Color
Tone, Size and Auto Protection Time.
✎ NOTE
x After selecting Zoom1, Zoom2 or Wide Fit:
1. Press the  button to select Position.
2. Press the ENTER button.
3. Press the  or  button to move the picture up
or down.
 
4. Press the ENTER button.
%!  "'%  
5. Press the  button to select Reset.
#J  "K"Q
+ %'
;%  "$ 6. Press the ENTER button to reset the picture
to its default position.
,=/'
;%  "$
*+,-%>X < % "'% x After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI (1080i/1080p) or
;%,  "1?? Component (1080i/1080p) mode, you may need to
center the picture:
$,%
 "#
 1. Press the  or  button to select Position.
2. Press the ENTER button.
&,< === =$= 
3. Press the , ,  or  button to move the
picture.
■ Color Tone (Cool / Normal / Warm1 / Warm2)
4. Press the ENTER button.
✎ Warm1 or Warm2 will be deactivated when the picture 5. Press the  or  button to select Reset.
mode is Dynamic.
6. Press the ENTER button.
✎ Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external
device connected to an input on the TV. x HD (High Definition): 16:9 - 1080i/1080p (1920x1080),
720p (1280x720)
■ Size: Your cable box/satellite receiver may
have its own set of screen sizes as well. x Settings can be adjusted and stored for each
However, we highly recommend you use external device you have connected to an input on
16:9 mode most of the time. P SIZE the TV.
16:9 : Sets the picture to 16:9 wide mode. Input Source Picture Size
Zoom1: Use for moderate magnification. ATV, AV, 16:9, Zoom1,
Zoom2: Use for a stronger magnification. Component (480i, 480p) Zoom2, 4:3
Wide Fit: Enlarges the aspect ratio of the DTV(1080i), 16:9, 4:3, Wide Fit,
picture to fit the entire screen. Component (1080i, 1080p), Screen Fit
✎ Available with HD 1080i / 720p signals in 16:9 HDMI (720p, 1080i, 1080p)
mode.
PC 16:9, 4:3
4:3 : Sets the picture to basic (4:3) mode.
✎ Do not watch in 4:3 format for a long time. Traces
of borders displayed on the left, right and center
of the screen may cause image retention(screen
burn) which are not covered by the warranty.
Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off
when HDMI (720p / 1080i / 1080p) or Component
(1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted.

 English
■ Digital Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High / Auto F Viewing TV using the 3D function

03 Basic Features
/ Auto Visualization): If the broadcast signal received
by your TV is weak, you can activate the Digital Noise
Filter feature to reduce any static and ghosting that may
" MENU  Picture  3D  ENTER
appear on the screen. IMPORTANT HEALTH AND SAFETY INFORMATION FOR
✎ When the signal is weak, try other options until the 3D PICTURES. Read and understand the following safety
information before using the TV’s 3D function.
best picture is displayed.
Auto Visualization: When changing analog channels, ) WARNING
displays signal strength. x Some viewers may experience discomfort while
✎ Only available for analog channels. viewing 3D TV such as dizziness, nausea and
✎ When bar is green, you are receiving the best headaches. If you experience any such symptom,
stop viewing 3D TV, remove 3D Active Glasses and
possible signal.
rest.
■ MPEG Noise Filter (Off / Low / Medium / High /
Auto): Reduces MPEG noise to provide improved
x Watching 3D images for an extended period of time
may cause eye strain. If you feel eye strain, stop
picture quality.
viewing 3D TV, remove your 3D Active Glasses and
■ HDMI Black Level (Normal / Low): Selects the black rest.
level on the screen to adjust the screen depth. x A responsible adult should frequently check on
✎ Available only in HDMI mode. children who are using the 3D function. If there are
■ Film Mode (Off / Auto1 / Auto2): Sets the TV to any reports of tired eyes, headaches, dizziness, or
automatically sense and process film signals from all nausea, have the child stop viewing 3D TV and rest.
sources and adjusts the picture for optimum quality. x Do not use the 3D Active Glasses for other purposes
✎ Available in TV, AV, COMPONENT (480i / 1080i) (such as general eyeglasses, sunglasses, protective
goggles, etc.)
and HDMI (480i / 1080i).
■ Auto Motion Plus (Off / Clear / Standard / Smooth /
x Do not use the 3D function or 3D Active Glasses
while walking or moving around. Using the 3D
Custom / Demo): Removes drag from fast scenes with
function or 3D Active Glasses while moving around
a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture.
may result in injuries due to running into objects,
✎ If noise occurs on the screen, please set the tripping, and/or falling.
Auto Motion Plus to Off. If Auto Motion Plus
is Custom, you can set up the Blur Reduction,
Judder Reduction or Reset manually.
✎ If Auto Motion Plus is Demo, you can compare
the difference between on and off modes.
Blur Reduction: Adjusts the blur reduction level from
video sources.
Judder Reduction: Adjusts the judder reduction level
from video sources when playing films.
Reset: Reset the custom settings.
■ Auto Protection Time (2 hours / 4 hours / 8 hours
/ 10 hours / Off): Set the time the screen remains idle
with a still image until the screen saver is activated. The
screen saver prevents the formation of ghost images on
the screen.

English 
Basic Features
3D ✎ “Side by Side” and “Top & Bottom” are available
when the resolution is 720p, 1080i and 1080p in
This exciting new feature enables you to view DTV, HDMI and USB mode or when set to PC
3D content. In order to fully enjoy this feature, and the PC is connected through an HDMI/DVI
you must purchase a pair of Samsung 3D cable.
Active Glasses (SSG-2100AB, SSG-2200AR,
SSG-2200KR) to view 3D video.
3D ✎ “Vertical Strip”, “Line by Line” and “Checker
Board” are available when the resolution is set to
Samsung 3D Active Glasses are sold PC and the PC is connected through an HDMI/
separately. For more detailed purchasing DVI cable.
information, contact the retailer where you
purchased this TV. ✎ “Frequency” displays the frequency (60Hz only)
when the resolution is set to PC.
■ 3D  2D (Off / On): Displays the image for the left eye
only.
✎ This function is deactivated when 3D Mode is set
to “2D  3D” or Off.
■ 3D View point: The overall adjustment of 3D
perspective.
3D emitter
✎ This function is deactivated when 3D Mode is set
to “2D  3D” or Off.

✎ If there is any obstacle between the emitter and 3D ■ Depth: Adjusts focus / depth in “2D  3D” mode.
Active Glasses, the proper 3D effect may not be ✎ This function is only activated when the 3D Mode
obtained. is “2D  3D”.
■ 3D Mode: Select the 3D input format. ■ Picture Correction: Adjusts the images for the left and
✎ If you want to feel the 3D effect fully, please wear right eye.
the 3D Active Glasses first, and then select 3D ■ 3D Auto View (Off / On): If 3D Auto View is set to On,
Mode from the list below that provides the best a “Side-By-Side” format HDMI signal with one of the
3d viewing experience. resolutions below is automatically switched to 3D. Here,
✎ When watching 3D images, turn on 3D Active correct 3D information must be sent from the Standard
Glasses. HDMI 3D Format.
✎ If a 3D failure occurs due to a 3D information error,
3D Mode Operation set 3D Auto View to Off and manually select a
Off Turns the 3D function off. 3D Mode using the 3D button or corresponding
menu.
2D  3D Changes a 2D image to 3D.
Displays two images next to
✎ Support resolution (16:9 only)
Side by Side
each other. Resolution Frequency (Hz)
Displays one image above 1280 x 720p 60 Hz
Top & Bottom
another.
1920 x 1080i 60 Hz
Displays the images for the left
Line by Line 1920 x 1080p 24 / 30 / 60 Hz
and right eye alternately in rows.
Displays the images for the ■ 3D Optimize: The overall adjustment of 3D effect.
Vertical Stripe left and right eye alternately in
columns. Resolution supported for HDMI PC mode
Displays the images for the The resolution for HDMI PC mode is optimized to 1920 x
Checker
left and right eye alternately in 1080 input.
Board
pixels.
An input resolution other than 1920 x 1080 may not be
Displays the images for the displayed properly in 3D display or full screen mode.
Frequency left and right eye alternately in
frames.

 English
How to watch the 3D image Before using 3D function...

03 Basic Features
 ✎ NOTE
! [+\ [+ %

 x You may notice a small amount of screen flickering


    %

 when watching 3D images in poor light conditions
.  [+!.
?%  (from a strobe light, etc.), or under a fluorescent lamp
 
@
 @ ?  ] (50Hz ~ 60Hz) or 3 wavelength lamp. If so, dim the
JJ

 light or turn the lamp off.

1Z  % x 3D mode is automatically disabled in following cases:
when changing a channel or the input source, or
,< === =/==F accessing Media Play or Internet@TV.



x Some Picture functions are disabled in 3D mode.
x The Touch Control does not support 3D pictures.
^
^



 
X=;!]-/*!> @

  %\
X=;!] /*! @  
   % 

% 

% ?
 
 

 
  % ? 
   
 
x 3D Active Glasses from other manufacturers may not
be supported.
x When the TV is initially powered on, it may take some
time until the 3D display is optimized.
x The 3D Active Glasses may not work properly if there
is any other 3D product or electronic devices turned
,< === =/==F
 < ==  =/==F
1. Press the CONTENT button, then the Content View
menu will appear.
2. Press the  or  button, then select 3D.
To watch in 3D, wear 3D Active Glasses and press the
power button on the glasses.
3. Select OK, then press the ENTER button.
4. Using the  or  buttons on your remote control, select
the 3D Mode of the image you want to view.
✎ Some 3D modes may not be available depending
on the format of the image source.
on near the glasses or TV. If there is a problem, keep
other electronic devices as far away as possible from
the 3D Active Glasses.
x Photos of Media Play are shown in “2D  3D”
mode only.
x If you lie on your side while watching TV with 3D
active glasses, the picture may look dark or may not
be visible.
x Be sure to stay within the viewing angle and optimum
TV viewing distance when watching 3D pictures.
– Otherwise, you may not be able to enjoy proper 3D
effects.

Supported formats and operating specifications for

x The ideal viewing distance should be three times
or more the height of the screen. We recommend
Standard HDMI 3D
sitting with viewer's eyes on a level with the screen.
✎ The 3D formats indicated below are recommended by
the HDMI association and must be supported.
Source signal format Standard HDMI 1.4 3D
1920x1080p@24Hz x 2 1920x2205p@24Hz
1280x720p@60Hz x 2 1280x1470p@60Hz

The mode is automatically switched to 3D in one of the

source signal formats above.
For the Standard HDMI 3D format with 24Hz, the TV is
optimized as follows:
– Resolution First Display Mode: If Auto Motion Plus
is set to Off, Clear or Standard, you can watch the
video at a high resolution optimized to the resolution
of the source video.
– Judder Reduction Display Mode: When Auto
Motion Plus is set to Smooth or Custom, you can
watch a smooth picture without judder.

English 
Basic Features
Picture Reset (OK / Cancel) Sound Menu
Resets your current picture mode to its default settings.
F Changing the Preset Sound Mode
F Setting up the TV with Your PC
" MENU  Sound  SRS TheaterSound 
Set the input source to PC. ENTER
" MENU  Picture  ENTER
SRS TheaterSound 8
Auto Adjustment 8 ■ Standard: Selects the normal sound mode.
Adjust frequency values/positions and fine tune the settings ■ Music: Emphasizes music over voices.
automatically.
■ Movie: Provides the best sound for movies.
✎ Not available when connecting with an HDMI/DVI cable. ■ Clear Voice: Emphasizes voices over other sounds.
■ Amplify: Increase the intensity of high-frequency sound
Screen to allow a better listening experience for the hearing
■ Coarse / Fine: Removes or reduces picture noise. If the impaired.
noise is not removed by Fine-tuning alone, then adjust
the frequency as best as possible (Coarse) and Fine- F Adjusting Sound Settings
tune again. After the noise has been reduced, readjust
the picture so that it is aligned to the center of screen. " MENU  Sound  Equalizer  ENTER
■ Position: Adjust the PC’s screen positioning if it does
not fit the TV screen. Press the  or  button to adjust
the Vertical-Position. Press the  or  button to adjust Equalizer
the Horizontal-Position.
Adjusts the sound mode (standard sound mode only).
■ Image Reset: Resets the image to default settings. ■ Balance L/R: Adjusts the balance between the right and
left speaker.
Using Your TV as a Computer (PC) Display
■ 100Hz / 300Hz / 1kHz / 3kHz / 10kHz (Bandwidth
Setting Up Your PC Software (Based on Windows XP)
Adjustment): Adjusts the level of specific bandwidth
Depending on the version of Windows and the video card,
frequencies.
the actual screens on your PC will probably look different, but
the same basic set-up information will apply in most cases. ■ Reset: Resets the equalizer to its default settings.
(If not, contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung
Dealer.)
1. Click on “Control Panel” on the Windows start menu.
2. Click on “Appearance and Themes” in the “Control
Panel” window and a display dialog-box will appear.
3. Click on “Display” and a display dialog box will appear.
4. Navigate to the “Settings” tab on the display dialog-box.
y The correct size setting (resolution) [Optimum: 1920 X
1080 pixels]
y If a vertical-frequency option exists on your display
settings dialog box, the correct value is “60” or “60 Hz”.
Otherwise, just click “OK” and exit the dialog box.

 English
F Sound Settings Speaker Select (External Speaker / TV

03 Basic Features
Speaker)
" MENU  Sound  ENTER
A sound echo may occur due to a difference in decoding
speed between the main speaker and the audio receiver. In
SRS TruSurround HD (Off / On) 8 this case, set the TV to External Speaker.

(standard sound mode only)

✎ When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker, the
volume and MUTE buttons will not operate and the
This function provides a virtual 5.1 channel surround sound
sound settings will be limited.
experience through a pair of speakers using HRTF (Head
Related Transfer Function) technology. ✎ When Speaker Select is set to External Speaker.
x TV Speaker: Off, External Speaker: On
SRS TruDialog (Off / On) ✎ When Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker.
(standard sound mode only) x TV Speaker: On, External Speaker: On
This function allows you to increase the intensity of a voice ✎ If there is no video signal, both speakers will be mute.
over background music or sound effects so that dialog can
be heard more clearly.
SPDIF Output
Preferred Language SPDIF (Sony Philips Digital Interface) is used to provide digital
sound, reducing interference going to speakers and various
(digital channels only) digital devices such as an A/V Receiver/Home theater.
Digital-TV broadcasts are capable of ■ Audio Format: During the reception of a digital TV
simultaneous transmission of many audio broadcast, you can select the Digital Audio output
tracks (for example, simultaneous translations MTS (SPDIF) format from the options PCM or Dolby Digital.
of the program into foreign languages).
■ Audio Delay: Correct audio-video sync problems, when
✎ You can only select a language among watching TV or video, and when listening to digital audio
the ones being broadcasted. output using an external device such as an AV receiver
(0ms ~ 250ms).
Multi-Track Sound (MTS) 8
(analog channels only) Sound Reset (OK / Cancel)
■ Mono: Choose for channels that are Reset all sound settings to the factory defaults.
broadcasting in mono or if you are having
difficulty receiving a stereo signal. MTS
■ Stereo: Choose for channels that are
broadcasting in stereo.
■ SAP: Choose to listen to the Separate
Audio Program, which is usually a foreign-
language translation.
✎ Depending on the particular program being broadcast,
you can listen to Mono, Stereo or SAP.

Auto Volume (Off / Normal / Night)

To equalize the volume level on each channel, set to Normal.
■ Night: This mode provides an improved sound
experience compared to Normal mode, making almost
no noise. It is useful at night.

English 
Basic Features
Setup Menu F Setting the On / Off Timer

F Setting the Time " MENU  Setup  Time  Timer 1  ENTER

You can set the TV to turn on automatically at a preset time.
" MENU  Setup  Time  ENTER ■ Timer 1 / Timer 2 / Timer 3: Three different on / off
timer settings can be made. You must set the clock first.

Time  
1!
■ Clock: Setting the clock is for using various timer ▲
-< 00 00 am
features of the TV. ▼

1??!
" The current time will appear every time you press -< 00 00 am
the INFO button. .% # $    %

✎ If you disconnect the power cord, you have to set

10 TV Cable 3

the clock again.   

# , ! )  !  ; #

Clock Mode (Auto / Manual) 1

– Auto: Set the current time automatically using the ,< =&=$d
== =$= 
time from a digital channel.
✎ The antenna must be connected in order to set
the time automatically.
– Manual: Set the current time manually.
✎ Depending on the broadcast station and signal,
the auto time set up may not be correct. In this
case, set the time manually.
Clock Set: Set the Month, Day, Year, Hour, Minute and
am/pm manually.
✎ Available only when Clock Mode is set to
Manual.
✎ You can set the Month, Day, Year, Hour and
Minute directly by pressing the number buttons
on the remote control.
DST (Daylight Saving Time) (Off / On): Switches the
Daylight Saving Time function on or off.
✎ This function is only available when the Clock
Mode is set to Auto.
Time Zone: Select your time zone.
✎ This function is only available when the Clock
Mode is set to Auto.
F Using the Sleep Timer
" MENU  Setup  Time  Sleep Timer 
ENTER
■ Sleep Timer 8 : Automatically shuts off the TV
after a preset period of time. (30, 60, 90, 120, 150 and
180 minutes).
✎ To cancel the Sleep Timer, select Off.
 English
On Time / Off Time: Set the hour, minute, and activate
/ inactivate. (To activate the timer with the setting you’ve
chosen, set to Activate.)
Volume: Set the desired volume level.
Source: Select TV or USB content to be played when
the TV is turned on automatically. (USB can be selected
only when a USB device is connected to the TV)
Antenna (when the Source is set to TV): Select Air or
Cable.
Channel (when the Source is set to TV): Select the
desired channel.
Contents (when the Source is set to USB): Select a
folder in the USB device containing music or photo files
to be played when the TV is turned on automatically.
✎ NOTE
x If there is no music file on the USB device or the
folder containing a music file is not selected, the
Timer function does not operate correctly.
x When there is only one photo file in the USB,
the Slide Show will not play.
x If a folder name is too long, the folder cannot be
selected.
x Each USB you use is assigned its own folder.
When using more than one of the same type of
USB, make sure the folders assigned to each
USB have different names.
 Repeat: Select Once, Everyday, Mon~Fri, Mon~Sat,
Sat~Sun or Manual to set at you convenience. If you
select Manual, you can set up the day you want to
activate the timer.
✎ The - mark indicates the day is selected.
✎ Auto Power Off (available only when the TV is turned
on by the Timer): The TV will be automatically turned off
after 3 hours of being left idle to prevent overheating.
F Locking Programs
" MENU  Setup  Security  ENTER
Security
The PIN input screen appears, Enter your 4 digit PIN number.
■ V-Chip: The V-Chip feature automatically locks out
programs that are deemed inappropriate for children.
The user must enter a PIN (personal identification
number) before any of the V-Chip restrictions are set up
or changed.
✎ NOTE
x V-Chip is not available in HDMI, Component
or PC mode.
x The default PIN number of a new TV set is
“0-0-0-0”.
x Allow All: Press to unlock all TV ratings.
x Block All: Press to lock all TV ratings.
V-Chip Lock (Off / On): You can block rated TV
Programs.
TV Parental Guidelines: You can block TV programs
depending on their rating. This function allows you to
control what your children are watching.
– TV-Y: Young children / TV-Y7: Children 7 and over /
TV-G: General audience / TV-PG: Parental guidance
/ TV-14: Viewers 14 and over / TV-MA: Mature
audience
– ALL: Lock all TV ratings. / FV: Fantasy violence / V:
Violence / S: Sexual situation / L: Adult Language / D:
Sexually Suggestive Dialog
✎ The V-Chip will automatically block certain
categories dealing with more sensitive material.
For example, if you block the TV-Y category,
then TV-Y7 will automatically be blocked.
Similarly, if you block the TV-G category, then
all the categories in the young adult group will
be blocked (TV-G, TV-PG, TV-14 and TV-MA).
The sub-ratings (D, L, S, V) work similarly. So,
if you block the L sub-rating in TV-PG, then
the L sub-ratings in TV-14 and TV-MA will
automatically be blocked.
MPAA Rating: You can block movies depending on
03 Basic Features
their MPAA rating. The Motion Picture Association of
America(MPAA) has implemented a rating system that
provides parents or guardians with advanced information
on which films are appropriate for children.
– G: General audience (no restrictions). / PG: Parental
guidance suggested. / PG-13: Parents strongly
cautioned. / R: Restricted. Children under 17 should
be accompanied by an adult. / NC-17: No children
under age 17. / X: Adults only. / NR: Not rated.
✎ The V-Chip will automatically block any
category that deals with more sensitive material.
For example, if you block the PG-13 category,
then R, NC-17 and X will automatically be
blocked.
Canadian English: You can block TV programs
depending on their Anglophone Canadian ratings.
– C: Programming intended for children under age 8. /
C8+: Programming generally considered acceptable
for children 8 years and over to watch on their own.
/ G: General programming, suitable for all audiences.
/ PG: Parental Guidance. / 14+: Programming
contains themes or content which may not be
suitable for viewers under the age of 14. / 18+: Adult
programming.
✎ The V-Chip will automatically block any
category that deals with more sensitive material.
For example, if you block the G category, then
PG, 14+ and 18+ will automatically be blocked.
Canadian French: You can block TV programs
depending on their French Canadian rating.
– G: General / 8 ans+: Programming generally
considered acceptable for children 8 years and over
to watch on their own. / 13 ans+: Programming may
not be suitable for children under the age of 13. / 16
ans+: Programming is not suitable for children under
the age of 16. / 18 ans+: Programming restricted to
adults.
✎ The V-Chip will automatically block any
category that deals with more sensitive material.
For example, if you block the 8 ans+ category,
then 13 ans+, 16 ans+ and 18 ans+ will
automatically be blocked also.
Downloadable U.S. Rating: Parental restriction
information can be used while watching DTV channels.
English 
Basic Features
✎ NOTE
x If information is not downloaded from the
broadcasting station, the Downloadable U.S.
Rating menu is deactivated.
x Parental restriction information is automatically
downloaded while watching DTV channels. It
may take several seconds.
x The Downloadable U.S. Rating menu
is available for use after information is
downloaded from the broadcasting station.
However, depending on the information from
the broadcasting station, it may not be available
for use.
x Parental restriction levels differ depending on
the broadcasting station. The default menu
name and Downloadable US Rating change
depending on the downloaded information.
x Even if you set the on-screen display to another
language, the Downloadable U.S. Rating
menu will appear in English only.
x The rating will automatically block certain
categories that deal with more sensitive
material.
x The rating titles (For example: Humor Level..etc)
and TV ratings (For example: DH, MH, H..etc)
may differ depending on the broadcasting
station.
■ Change PIN: The Change PIN screen will appear.
Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and enter them. As
soon as the 4 digits are entered, the Confirm New
PIN screen appears. Re-enter the same 4 digits. When
the Confirm screen disappears, your PIN has been
memorized.
How to watch a restricted channel
If the TV is tuned to a restricted channel, the V-Chip will
block it. The screen will go blank and the following message
will appear:
This channel is blocked by V-Chip. Please enter the PIN to
unblock.
✎ If you forget the PIN, press the remote-control buttons
in the following sequence, which resets the pin to “0-0-
0-0:” POWER (off)  MUTE  8  2  4  POWER
(on)
 English
F Other Features
" MENU  Setup  ENTER
Menu Language
Set the menu language.
1. Select Menu Language and press the ENTER
button.
2. Choose desired language and press the ENTER
button.
✎ Choose between English, Español and Français.
Caption
(On-Screen Text Messages)
■ Caption (Off / On): You can switch the
caption function on or off. If captions are not
available, they will not be displayed on the
CC
screen.
✎ The Caption feature doesn’t work in
Component, HDMI or PC modes.
■ Caption Mode: You can select the desired
caption mode.
✎ The availability of captions depends on the
program being broadcast.
Default / CC1~CC4 / Text1~Text4: (analog channels
only) The Analog Caption function operates in either
analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied
from an external device to the TV. (Depending on the
broadcasting signal, the Analog Caption function may or
may not work with digital channels.)
Default / Service1~Service6 / CC1~CC4 /
Text1~Text4: (digital channels only) The Digital Captions
function works with digital channels.
✎ Service1~6 may not be available in digital caption
mode depending on the broadcast.
■
Digital Caption Options: (digital channels only)
Size: Options include Default, Small, Standard and
Large. The default is Standard.
Font Style: Options include Default and Styles 0 to 7.
The default is Style 0.
Foreground Color: Options include Default, White,
Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan. You
can change the color of the letter. The default is White.
Background Color: Options include Default, White,
Black, Red, Green, Blue, Yellow, Magenta and Cyan.
You can change the background color of the caption.
The default is Black.
Foreground Opacity: This adjusts the opacity of text.
Options include Default, Transparent, Translucent, Solid
and Flashing.
Background Opacity: This adjusts the opacity of
the caption background. Options include Default,
Transparent, Translucent, Solid and Flashing.
Return to Default: This option sets each Size, Font
Style, Foreground Color, Background Color, Foreground
Opacity and Background Opacity to its default.
✎ NOTE
x Digital Caption Options are available only
when Default and Service1 ~ Service6 can be
selected in Caption Mode.
x The availability of captions depends on the
program being broadcasted.
x The Default setting follows the standards set by
the broadcaster.
x The Foreground and Background cannot be set
to have the same color.
x You cannot set both the Foreground Opacity
and the Background Opacity to Transparent.
Network (Network Type / Network Setup
/ Network Test / SWL(Samsung Wireless
Link) / SWL connect)
For details on set up options, refer to the “Network
Connection” instructions (p. 32).
03 Basic Features
General
■ Game Mode (Off / On): When connecting to a game
console such as PlayStation™ or Xbox™, you can enjoy
a more realistic gaming experience by selecting the
game menu.
✎ NOTE
x Precautions and limitations for game mode
– To disconnect the game console and connect
another external device, set Game Mode to Off in
the setup menu.
– If you display the TV menu in Game Mode, the
screen shakes slightly.
x Game Mode is not available when the input source
is set to TV or PC.
x After connecting the game console, set Game Mode
to On. Unfortunately, you may notice reduced picture
quality.
x If Game Mode is On:
– Picture mode is set to Standard and Sound mode
is set to Movie.
– Equalizer is not available.
■ BD Wise (Off / On): Provides the optimal picture quality
for Samsung DVD, Blu-ray and Home Theater products
which support BD Wise. When BD Wise is turned On,
the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal
resolution.
✎ Available when connecting Samsung products
that support BD Wise through a HDMI cable.
■ Menu Transparency (Bright / Dark): Set the
Transparency of the menu.
■ Slide Key (On / Off): You can choose to use the LED
touch pad, which is centered underneath the stand, or
not.
■ Melody (Off / Low / Medium / High): Set so that a
melody plays when the TV is turned on or off.
✎ Melody is disabled when FastStart is On.
■ FastStart (Off / On): When the TV is powered on, the
screen will come on quickly with this feature.
English 
Basic Features
Wireless Remote Control (Off / On) ■ Signal Information: (digital channels only) An HD
channel’s reception quality is either perfect or the
Turn on/off or give permission to Samsung mobile phones/ channels are unavailable. Adjust your antenna to
devices. increase signal strength.
You must have a Samsung Mobile phone/device which
■ Troubleshooting: If the TV seems to have a problem,
supports Wireless Remote Control. For more details, refer
refer to this description.
to each device's manual.
✎ If none of these troubleshooting tips apply, contact
the Samsung customer service center.
Support Menu

" MENU  Support  ENTER Software Upgrade

Software Upgrade can be performed by network
Legal Notice connection or downloading the latest firmware from “www.
samsung.com.” to a USB memory device.
✎ The Legal Notice may differ depending on the country. Current Version - the software already installed in the TV.
✎ Software is represented as “Year/Month/Day_Version.”
Self Diagnosis

  
✎ Self Diagnostic might take few seconds, this is part of  . 
 ]]gf
the normal operation of the TV.
■ Picture Test: Use to check for picture problems.
Yes: If the test pattern does not appear or there is
noise in the test pattern, select Yes. There may be a @^#   
problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for @1%
assistance (1-800-SAMSUNG). $% < #?  2222]22]22f222222
No: If the test pattern is properly displayed, select No.
There may be a problem with your external equipment.
Please check your connections. If the problem persists, &,< === =$= 
refer to the external device’s user manual.
■ Sound Test: Use the built-in melody sound to check for Installing the Latest Version
sound problems.
✎ If you hear no sound from the TV’s speakers,
Stand Side Panel

before performing the sound test, make sure

Speaker Select is set to TV Speaker in the
Sound menu.
✎ The melody will be heard during the test even if
Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the
sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button.
Yes: If you can hear sound only from one speaker or not
at all during the sound test, select Yes. There may be a
problem with the TV. Contact Samsung’s Call Center for
assistance (1-800-SAMSUNG).
No: If you can hear sound from the speakers, select No.
There may be a problem with your external equipment.
Please check your connections. If the problem persists,
refer to the external device’s user manual.
or
USB Drive
■ By USB: Insert a USB drive containing the firmware
upgrade file, downloaded from “www.samsung.com,”
into the TV. Please be careful not to disconnect the
power or remove the USB drive until upgrades are
complete. The TV will be turned off and on automatically
after completing the firmware upgrade. When software is
upgraded, video and audio settings you have made will
return to their default settings. We advise you to to write
down your settings so that you can easily reset them
after the upgrade.

 English
■

03 Basic Features
By Online: Upgrade the software using the Internet.
✎ First, configure your network. For detailed
procedures on using the Network Setup, refer to
the “Network Connection” instructions.
✎ If the internet connection doesn’t operate properly,
the connection may be broken. Please retry
downloading. If the problem persists, download by
USB and upgrade.
■ Alternative Software: Displays the software version
downloaded through By Online. During the software
upgrading, When the Upgrade will discontinue from last
step, this function be activated.

HD Connection Guide
Refer to this information when connecting external devices
to the TV.

Contact Samsung
View this information when your TV does not work properly
or when you want to upgrade the software. You can find
information regarding our call centers and how to download
products and software.

English 
Advanced Features
Network Connection
You can set up your TV so that it can access the Internet through your local area network (LAN) using a wired or wireless
connection.

F Connecting to a Wired Network

You can attach your TV to your LAN using cable in three ways:
y You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to an external modem using a Cat
5 cable. See the diagram below.

The Modem Port on the Wall Stand Rear Panel

External Modem
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV)

Modem Cable (Not Supplied) LAN Cable (Not Supplied)

y You can attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN port on the back of your TV to a IP Sharer which is connected
to an external modem. Use a Cat 5 cable for the connection. See the diagram below.

The Modem Port on the Wall Stand Rear Panel

External Modem IP Sharer
(ADSL / VDSL / Cable TV) (having DHCP server)

Modem Cable LAN Cable

(Not Supplied) (Not Supplied) LAN Cable (Not Supplied)

y Depending on how your network is configured, you may be able to attach your TV to your LAN by connecting the LAN
port on the back of your TV directly to a network wall outlet using a Cat 5 cable. See the diagram below. Note that the wall
outlet is attached to a modem or router elsewhere in your house.

The LAN Port on the Wall

Stand Rear Panel

LAN Cable (Not Supplied)

If you have a Dynamic Network, you should use an ADSL modem or router that supports Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP). Modems and routers that support DHCP automatically provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway,
and DNS values your TV needs to access the Internet so you don’t have to enter them manually. Most home networks are
Dynamic Networks.
Some networks require a Static IP address. If your network requires a Static IP address, you must enter the IP address,
subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values manually on your TV’s Cable Setup Screen when you set up the network
connection. To get the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values, contact your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If
you have a Windows computer, you can also get these values through your computer.
✎ You can use ADSL modems that support DHCP if your network requires a Static IP address. ADSL modems that
support DHCP also let you use Static IP addresses.

 English
Network Setup (Auto)
Use the Automatic Network Setup when connecting your
TV to a network that supports DHCP. To set up your TV’s
cable network connection automatically, follow these steps:
How to set up automatically
1. Connect your TV to your LAN as described in the
previous section.
2. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on your
remote, use the  or  button to select Setup, and
then press the ENTER button.
3. Use the  or  button to select Network in the Setup
menu, and then press the ENTER button. The
Network screen appears.

Network Setup (Manual)
04 Advanced Features
Use the Manual Network Setup when connecting your TV to
a network that requires a Static IP address.
Getting the Network Connection Values
To get the Network connection values on most Windows
computers, follow these steps:
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the
screen.
2. In the pop-up menu that appears, click Status.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab.
4. On the Support Tab, click the Details button. The
Network connection values are displayed.
How to set up manually
To set up your TV’s cable network connection manually,
' >!@  ")   follow these steps:
' >#  1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the “How to set up
' >!
 automatically” procedure.
#)X&#
 ) %

X>( "1 2. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual.

#)X 
3. Press the  button on your remote to go to the first
entry field.
&,< === =$= 
4. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and
4. On the Network screen, select Network Type. DNS Server values. Use the number buttons on your
5. Set Network Type to Wired. remote to enter numbers and the arrow buttons to move
from one entry field to another.
6. Select Network Setup. The Network Setup screen
appears. 5. When done, press the RETURN button on your remote.
6. Select Network Test to check the Internet connectivity.


-  %#  "$ 
-$

 "   
# ,
> "   
/ @ "   

+'# "$

+'## <  "   

&,< === =$= 

7. Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto.

8. Auto acquires and enters the needed Internet values
automatically.
9. Wait two minutes, and then press the RETURN button
on your remote.
10. If the Network Function has not acquired the network
connection values, go to the directions for Manual.

English 
Advanced Features
F Connecting to a Wireless Network
To connect your TV to your network wirelessly, you need a wireless router or modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter
(WIS09ABGN2), which you connect to your TV’s side panel USB jack. See the illustration below.

Stand Side Panel

Wireless IP Sharer The LAN Port on

(AP having DHCP Server) the Wall

or

Samsung Wireless LAN Cable (Not Supplied)

LAN Adapter

✎ When the USB 1 port is connected to a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter, you
may not be able to use the HDMI IN 4 and USB 2 ports. We recommend
connecting a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the USB 2 port.

Samsung’s Wireless LAN adapter supports the IEEE 802.11A/B/G and N communication protocols. Samsung recommends
using IEEE 802.11N. When you play video over a IEEE 802.11B/G connection, the video may not play smoothly.
✎ NOTE
x You must use the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” (WIS09ABGN2) to use a wireless network.
x To use a wireless network, your TV must connect wirelessly to a wireless IP sharer (either a router or a modem). If the
wireless IP sharer supports DHCP, your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network.
x Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used. If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer
is currently being used by another device nearby, this will result in interference and communication failure.
x If you apply a security system other than the systems listed blow, it will not work with the TV.
x If you select the Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11N mode and set your AP's Security Encryption type to WEP,
TKIP or TKIPAES (WPS2Mixed), your Samsung TV will not support the connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi
certification specifications.
x If your AP supports WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), you can connect to the network via PBC (Push Button
Configuration) or PIN (Personal Identification Number). WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in
either mode.
x If your router, modem, or device isn’t certified, it may not connect to the TV via the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.”
x Connection Methods: You can setup the wireless network connection six ways.
– Samsung Auto Configuration - For non-Samsung devices.
– PBC (WPS)
– Auto Setup (Using the Auto Network Search function)
– Manual Setup
– SWL(Samsung Wireless Link) - For Samsung devices only.
– Ad-Hoc
x The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter may not be recognized or work properly when connecting via a USB hub or via
a USB extension cable other than the one available from Samsung.

 English
Notice
The picture may appear corrupted or have static for some
channels when the TV is connected to the Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter. In such a case, connect the Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter using a USB cable in a place that is not
affected by radio interference.
Method
Connect via an extension cable
✎ The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter should be
installed in an interference-free area in order to avoid
interference between the adapter and tuner.
or
To connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter using an
extension cable, follow these steps:
1. Connect the extension cable to the USB port.
2. Connect the extension cable and Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter.
3. Attach the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the back
of the TV near the top, using double-sided adhesive
tape.
Network Setup (Samsung Auto
04 Advanced Features
Configuration)
The Samsung Auto Configuration function lets you connect
your Samsung TV automatically to non-Samsung wireless
APs. If your non-Samsung AP does not support Samsung
Auto Configuraton, you must connect using one of the
other methods: PBC (WPS), auto configuration, or manual
configuration.
✎ To use this function, you must set SWL(Samsung
Wireless Link) to Off in the TV’s on-screen menu.
✎ You can check for equipment that supports Samsung
Auto Configuration on www.samsung.com.
How to set up using Samsung Auto Configuration
1. Place the AP and TV next to each other and turn them
on.
✎ Because AP booting times vary, you may have
to wait approximately two minutes for your AP to
boot up.
✎ Ensure the LAN cable is connected to the
WAN port of the AP during Samsung Auto
Configuration. If it is not connected, Samsung
Auto Configuration only confirms that the TV is
connected to the AP, but does not confirm it is
connected to the Internet.
2. After 2 minutes, connect the Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter to the TV. When the Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter establishes a connection with your TV, a pop-up
window appears.
3. As soon as a connection is established, place the AP
parallel to the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter and not
farther than than 9 and 7/8s inches (25cm) from it.
4. Wait until the connection is automatically established.
✎ If Samsung Auto Configuration does not connect
your TV to your AP, a pop-up window appears on
the screen notifying you of the failure. If you want
to try using Samsung Auto Configuration again,
reset the AP, disconnect the Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter and then try again from Step 1. You
can also choose one of the other connection
setup methods: PBC (WPS), auto, or manual.
5. Place the AP in a desired location.
✎ If the AP settings change or you install a new
AP, you must perform the Samsung Auto
Configuration procedure again, beginning from
Step 1.
English 
Advanced Features
Network Setup (PBC (WPS)) How to set up automatically
To set up the wireless connection automatically, follow these
How to set up using PBC (WPS) steps:
If your router has a PBC (WPS) button, follow these steps: 1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the “How to set up using
PBC (WPS)” procedure.
1. Connect your TV to your LAN as described in the
previous section. 2. Press the  button to select Internet Protocol Setup,
and then press the ENTER button. Press the  or
2. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on your
 button to select Auto, and then press the ENTER
remote, use the  or  button to select Setup, and
button.
then press the ENTER button.
3. Press the  button to go to Select a Network, and
3. Use the  or  button to select Network in the Setup
then press the ENTER button. The Network function
menu, and then press the ENTER button.
searches for available wireless networks. When done, it
4. On the Network screen, select Network Type. displays a list of the available networks.
5. Set Network Type to Wireless. 4. In the list of networks, press the  or  button to select
6. Select Network Setup. The Network Setup screen a network, and then press the ENTER button.
appears. ✎ If the AP is set to Hidden (Invisible), you have
to select Add Network and enter the correct


Network Name (SSID) and Security Key to
# % ' > "'# %    establish the connection.
-  %#  "$ 5. If the Security/PIN pop-up appears, go to Step 6. If the
$

 "    Network Connecting Screen appears, go to Step 10.

# ,
> "    6. Press the  or  button to select Security or PIN. For
/ @ "    most home networks, you would select Security (for
+'# "$ Security Key). The Security Screen appears.
+'## <  "   


&)#(=&=,< === =$=  # @Z @

7. Press the Red button on your remote.    

8. Press the PBC (WPS) button on your router within 2 A B C D E F G 0~9 ' 
minutes. Your TV player automatically acquires all the H I J K L M N  X 

network setting values it needs and connects to your O P Q R S T U  B + % 
network.
V W X Y Z  #
9. After the network connection is set up, press the
RETURN button to exit the Network Setup screen. 4,< === =$= 

Network Setup (Auto) 7. On the Security screen, enter your network’s Pass
Phrase.
Most wireless networks have an optional security system
that requires devices that access the network to transmit
✎ You should be able to find the Pass Phrase on
one of the set up screens you used to set up your
an encrypted security code called an Access or Security router or modem.
Key. The Security Key is based on a Pass Phrase, typically
a word or a series of letters and numbers of a specified
length you were asked to enter when you set up security for
your wireless network. If you use this method of setting up
the network connection, and have a Security Key for your
wireless network, you will have to enter the Pass Phrase
during the setup process.

 English
8. To enter the Pass Phrase, follow these general
directions:
– Press the number buttons on your remote to enter
numbers.
– Use the direction buttons on your remote to move
from button to button on the Security Key screen.
– Press the Red button to change case or display
symbols/characters.
– To a enter letter or symbol, move to the letter or
symbol, and then press the ENTER button.
– To delete the last letter or number you entered, press
the Green button on your remote.
9. When done, press the Blue button on your remote. The
Network Connecting screen appears.
10. Wait until the connection confirmation message is
displayed, and then press the ENTER button. The
Network Setup screen re-appears.
11. To test the connection, press the RETURN button to
select Network Test, and then press the ENTER
button.
Network Setup (Ad-Hoc)
You can connect to a mobile device without an access point
through the “Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter” by using a
peer to peer network.
✎ This function is available when SWL(Samsung
Wireless Link) is set to Off in the TV’s on-screen
menu.
How to connect to new Ad-hoc device
1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the “How to set up using
PBC (WPS)” (p. 36).
2. Choose Select a Network. A list of devices/networks
appears.
3. While in the device list, press the Blue button on the
remote.
✎ The message Ad-hoc is a direct Wi-Fi
connection with cell phone or PC. The existing
network system may have limited functionality.
Do you want to change the network
connection? is displayed.
4. Input the generated Network Name (SSID) and
Security Key into the device you want to connect.
How to connect an existing Ad-hoc device
04 Advanced Features
1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the “How to set up using
PBC (WPS)” (p. 36).
2. Choose Select a Network. The Device/Network list
appears.
3. Select the device you want in the Device list.
4. If security key is required, input the security key.
✎ If network doesn’t operate normally, check
the Network Name (SSID) and Security Key
again. An incorrect Security Key may cause a
malfunction.
Network Setup (Manual)
If the other methods do not work, you need to enter the
Network setting values manually.
Getting the Network Connection Values
To get the Network connection values on most Windows
computers, follow these steps:
1. Right click the Network icon on the bottom right of the
screen.
2. In the pop-up menu, click Status.
3. On the dialog that appears, click the Support tab.
4. On the Support tab, click the Details button. The
Network settings are displayed.
How to set up manually
To enter the Network connection values manually, follow
these steps:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 6 in the “How to set up using
PBC (WPS)” (p. 36).
2. Press the  button to select Internet Protocol Setup,
and then press the ENTER button. Press the 
or  button to select Manual, and then press the
ENTER button.
3. Press the  button to go to the first entry field (IP
Address).
4. Use the number buttons to enter numbers.
5. When done with each field, use the  button to move
successively to the next field. You can also use the other
arrow buttons to move up, down, and back.
6. Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Gateway
values.
7. Press the  or  button to go to DNS.
8. Press the  button to go to the first DNS entry field.
Enter the numbers as above.
9. When done, press the  button to go to Select a
Network. Select your network, and then press the
ENTER button.
10. Go to Step 4 in the “How to set up automatically” (p.
36), and follow the directions from that point on.
English 
Advanced Features
SWL(Samsung Wireless Link) If Your TV Fails to Connect to the Internet
This function lets you connect your TV to a Samsung device Your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet
(router, etc.) that supports PBC (WPS) . You can connect the because your ISP has permanently registered the
TV to the device even if a sharer is not connected to the TV. MAC address (a unique identifying number) of your
✎ For the TV to use Internet@TV, the AP (access point) PC or modem, which it then authenticates each time
you connect to the Internet as a way of preventing
must be connected to the wireless network. unauthorized access. As your TV has a different MAC
✎ Only sharers using the 2.4 Ghz band are supported. address, your ISP can not authenticate its MAC address,
Sharers using the 5 Ghz band are not supported. and your TV can not connect.
To resolve this problem, ask your ISP about the
procedures required to connect devices other than a PC
SWL connect (such as your TV) to the Internet.
You can directly connect the TV to a Samsung device that If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password
supports PBC (WPS). to connect to the Internet, your TV may not be able to
✎ This function is available when SWL (Samsung connect to the Internet. If this is the case, you must enter
your ID or password when connecting to the Internet.
Wireless Link) is set to On in the TV’s on-screen
menu. The internet connection may fail because of a firewall
problem. If this is the case, contact your Internet service
✎ To use the SWL(Samsung Wireless Link) function, provider.
connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adpater to the
If you cannot connect to the Internet even after you have
USB port.
followed the procedures of your Internet service provider,
How to connect using Samsung Wireless Link please contact Samsung Electronics at 1-800-SAMSUNG.
To connect using Samsung Wireless Link, follow these steps:
1. Follow Steps 1 through 5 in the “How to set up using
PBC (WPS)” (p. 36).
2. Select SWL(Samsung Wireless Link) by using the 
button, and then press the ENTER button to turn it
On.
3. Select SWL connect by using the  button, and then
press the ENTER button.
4. If the Press the PBC button on the PBC(WPS)
supported device to connect within 120 seconds.
message appears, press the PBC button on the device
to connect.
✎ For more information, refer to the wireless network
setup manual of the device to be connected.
5. If the TV connects properly to the device after the count
in the message box starts, then the message box
disappears automatically.
✎ If the connection fails, please retry after 2 minutes.

 English
 04 Advanced Features
Media Play

Enjoy photos, music and/or movie files saved on , %@

a USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) device.
. 

MEDIA.P
" MENU  Application  Content View
 Media Play  ENTER

SUM   + < . + <

=== =$= 

F Connecting a USB Device

Stand Side Panel
1. Turn on your TV.
2. Connect a USB device containing photo, music and/or movie files to the USB 1
or USB 2 jack on the side of the TV.
3. When USB is connected to the TV, a popup window appears. Then you can
select Media Play.

or
USB Drive
F Connecting to your PC through a network
You can play pictures, music and videos saved on your PC through a network connection in the Media Play mode.
✎ If you want to use Media Play to play files saved on your PC over your TV, you should download “PC Share Manager” and
the users manual from “www.samsung.com.”

PC

Stand Side Panel

LAN
or

External Modem Samsung Wireless Wireless IP

(ADSL/VDSL/Cable TV) LAN Adapter Sharer

LAN Cable (Not Supplied) Modem Cable (Not Supplied)

LAN Cable (Not Supplied) LAN Cable (Not Supplied) LAN Cable (Not Supplied)

1. For more information on how to configure your network, refer to “Network Connection” (p. 32).
– You are recommended to locate both the TV and the PC in same subnet. The first 3 parts of the subnet address of the
TV and the PC IP addresses should be the same and only the last part (the host address) should be changed. (e.g. IP
Address: 123.456.789.**)
2. Using a LAN cable, connect between the external modem and the PC onto which the Samsung PC Share Manager
Program will be installed.
– You can connect the TV to the PC directly without connecting it through a Sharer (Router).

English 
Advanced Features
✎ Functions that are not supported when connecting to a PC through a network:
x The Background Music and Background Music Setting functions.
x Sorting files by preference in the Photos, Music, and Videos folders.
x The R=(REW) or  (FF) button while a movie is playing.
✎ Divx DRM, Multi-audio, embedded captions are not supported.
✎ Samsung PC Share manager should be permitted by the firewall program on your PC.
✎ When you use Media Play mode through a network connection, depending on the functions of the provided server:
x The sorting method may vary.
x The scene search function may not be supported.
x The Play Continuously function, which resumes playing of a video, may not be supported.
– The Play Continuously function does not support multiple users. (It will have only memorized the point where the
most recent user stopped playing.)
x The  or  buttons may not work depending on the content information.
x You may experience file stuttering while playing a video in Media Play through a network connection.
✎ It might not work properly with unlicensed multimedia files.
✎ Need-to-Know List before using Media Play
x MTP (Media Transfer Protocol) is not supported.
x The file system supports FAT16, FAT32 and NTFS.
x Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV.
x Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class (MSC) devices. MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk-Only
Transport device. Examples of MSC are Thumb drives, Flash Card Readers and USB HDD (USB HUB are not
supported). Devices should be connected directly to the TV’s USB port.
x Before connecting your device to the TV, please back up your files to prevent them from damage or loss of data.
SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data file damage or data loss.
x Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading.
x The higher the resolution of the image, the longer it takes to display on the screen.
x The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels.
x For unsupported or corrupted files, the “Not Supported File Format” message is displayed.
x If the files are sorted by Basic View, up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder.
x MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non-free site cannot be played. Digital Rights Management
(DRM) is a technology that supports the creation, distribution and management of the content in an integrated and
comprehensive way, including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers, the prevention of the
illegal copying of contents, as well as managing billings and settlements.
x If more than 2 PTP devices are connected, you can only use one at a time.
x If more than two MSC devices are connected, some of them may not be recognized. A USB device that requires high
power (more than 500mA or 5V) may not be supported.
x If an over-power warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device, the device may not
be recognized or may malfunction.
x If the TV has been no input during time set in Auto Protection Time, the Screensaver will run.
x The power-saving mode of some external hard disk drives may be released automatically when connected to the TV.
x If a USB extension cable is used, the USB device may not be recognized or the files on the device may not be read.
x If a USB device connected to the TV is not recognized, the list of files on the device is corrupted or a file in the list is
not played, connect the USB device to the PC, format the device and check the connection.
x If a file deleted from the PC is still found when Media Play is run, use the “Empty the Recycle Bin” function on the PC
to permanently delete the file.

 English
F Screen Display

04 Advanced Features
Move to the desired file using the up/down/right/left buttons and then press the ENTER or O (Play) button. The file is
played.
✎ Supports the View Devices and Home in Media Play homepage.
Information: . 
/Movie 01.avi 1/1 
You can ascertain the selected
file name and the number of files
Movie 01.avi Movie 02.avi
and page. Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010

Movie 03.avi Movie 04.avi

Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 File List Section:
Movie 05.avi Movie 06.avi
You can confirm the files and
Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010 groups that are sorted by
Sort List Section: Movie 07.avi Movie 08.avi category.
Displays the sorting standard. Jan.10.2010 Jan.10.2010

✎ The sorting standard is Movie 09.avi

Jan.10.2010
Movie 10.avi
Jan.10.2010
different depending on the
contents. SUM    + < =# %  # =%=!%

Operation Buttons
Red (Change Device): Selects a connected device.
B Green (Preference): Sets the file preference. (not supported in Basic view)
Yellow (Select): Selects multiple files from file list. Selected files are marked with a symbol.
Blue (Sorting): Selects the sort list.
% Tools: Displays the option menu.
✎ Using the R (REW) or ? (FF) button, file list can move to next or previous page.

Videos
Playing Video
1. Press the  or  button to select Videos, then press the ENTER button in the Media Play menu.
2. Press the /// button to select the desired video in the file list.
3. Press the ENTER button or O (Play) button.
– The selected file is displayed on the top with its playing time.
– If video time information is unknown, play time and progress bar are not displayed.
– During video playback, you can search using the  and  button.
✎ In this mode, you can enjoy movie clips contained on a Game,
but you cannot play the Game itself. 00 04 03 / 00 07 38 1/1
Movie 01 avi
y Supported Subtitle Formats
Name File extension Format
MPEG-4 time-based text .ttxt XML
SAMI .smi HTML
SubRip .srt string-based
SubViewer .sub string-based
Micro DVD .sub or .txt string-based
SUM =   ==w=%=!%
=$= 

English 
Advanced Features
y Supported Video Formats
Frame rate Bit rate
File Extension Container Video Codec Resolution Audio Codec
(fps) (Mbps)
Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
*.avi AVI MP3 / AC3 / LPCM /
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
*.mkv MKV ADPCM / DTS Core
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
Motion JPEG 800x600 6 ~ 30 8
Divx 3.11 / 4.x / 5.1 / 6.0 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
XviD 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
MP3 / AC3 / LPCM /
*.asf ASF H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
ADPCM / WMA
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
Motion JPEG 800x600 6 ~ 30 8
*.wmv ASF Window Media Video v9 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25 WMA
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
*.mp4 MP4 MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8 MP3 / ADPCM / AAC
XVID 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8
H.264 BP / MP / HP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
*.3gp 3GPP ADPCM / AAC / HE-AAC
MPEG4 SP / ASP 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 8

VRO MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30

*.vro AC3 / MPEG / LPCM
VOB MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
MPEG1 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
*.mpg
PS MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30 AC3 / MPEG / LPCM / AAC
*.mpeg
H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
MPEG2 1920x1080 24 / 25 / 30 30
*.ts
AC3 / AAC / MP3 / DD+ /
*.tp TS H.264 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25
HE-AAC
*.trp
VC1 1920x1080 6 ~ 30 25

Other Restrictions
✎ NOTE
x If there are problems with the contents of a codec, the codec will not be supported.
x If the information for a Container is incorrect and the file is in error, the Container will not be able to play
correctly.
x Sound or video may not work if the contents have a standard bitrate/frame rate above the compatible Frame/sec
listed in the table above.
x If the Index Table is in error, the Seek (Jump) function is not supported.

Video Decoder Audio Decoder

• Supports up to H.264, Level 4.1 • Supports up to WMA 7, 8, 9, STD
• H.264 FMO / ASO / RS, VC1 SP / MP / AP L4 and AVCHD are not • WMA 9 PRO does not support 2 channel excess multi channel or
supported. lossless audio.
• XVID, MPEG4 SP, ASP : • WMA sampling rate 22050Hz mono is not supported.
– Below 1280 x 720: 60 frame max
– Above 1280 x 720: 30 frame max
• GMC 2 over is not supported.
• Only Samsung Techwin MJPEG is supported.
• H.263 is not supported.

 English
Playing movie continuously (Resume Play)

04 Advanced Features
If you exit the playing movie function, the movie can be played later from the point where it was stopped.
✎ If you press the ENTER button (Chaptering) during playing the file, you can explore scene divided into 5 chapters
you want.
✎ If the index information is damaged or unsupported, you will not be able to use the Chaptering function.
1. Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing
the  or  button to select it from the file list section. 00 04 03 / 00 07 38 1/1
Movie 01 avi
2. Press the O (Play) / ENTER button.
3. Select Play Continuously (Resume Play) by pressing the Blue
button. The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped.
✎ The Blue button is available when resuming play.
✎ If the Continuous Movie Play Help function is set to On %@
%@
in the Settings menu, a pop-up message will appear 

%@ ? %
<  

  
when you resume play a movie file.
SUM %@
%@==   ==w=%=!%
=$= 

Music
Playing Music
1. Press the  or  button to select Music, then press the
ENTER button in the Media Play menu. %@%
 3/15
I Love You I Love you
2. Press the /// button to select the desired Music file in Jhon Jhon
the file list. 1st Album
Music 1
No Singer
Pop
3. Press the ENTER button or O (Play) button. 2010
4.2MB
Music 2
No Singer
Music 3
– During music playback, you can search using the  and  No Singer
buttons. 01:10 / 04:02 Music 4
No Singer
– R (REW) and ? (FF) buttons do not function during play. Music 5

✎ Only displays the files with MP3 and PCM file extension. Other
No Singer

=
==w=%=!%
=$= 
file extensions are not displayed, even if they are saved on the SUM

same USB device.

✎ If the sound is abnormal when playing MP3 files, adjust the
Equalizer in the Sound menu. (An over-modulated MP3 file
may cause a sound problem.)

Creating My Playlist
1. Press the /// button to select the tracks you want to add and press the TOOLS button.
2. Select Add My Playlist.
3. When the Add My Playlist menu appears, select New My Playlist.
✎ To add to an old play list, simply select the play list you want to add music to.
4. The newly created or updated playlist will be in the main Music page.

Playing My Playlist
Select the My Playlist folder and it will play automatically. Press the  or  button to select a different music file within the
playlist.

English 
Advanced Features
Photos
Viewing a Photo (or Slide Show)
1. Press the  or  button to select Photos, then press the '% Image1024.jpg 1024x768 2010/2/1 3/15
ENTER button in the Media Play menu.
2. Press the /// button to select the desired photo in the
file list.
3. Press the ENTER button or O (Play) button.
– While a photo list is displayed, press the O (Play) /
ENTER button on the remote control to start the slide
show.
– All files in the file list section will be displayed in the slide show.
– During the slide show, files are displayed in order.
=
== <
]' F=%=!%
=$= 
✎ Music files can be automatically played during the slide show if
SUM

the Background Music is set to On.

✎ The BGM Mode cannot be changed until the BGM has finished
loading.

F Playing Multiple Files

Playing selected video/music/photo files

1. Press the Yellow button in the file list to select the desired file.
. 
/Movie 01 avi |%

%   1/1 
2. Repeat the above operation to select multiple files.
✎ NOTE Movie 01 avi Movie 02 avi

x The - mark appears to the left of the selected files. Movie 03 avi
Jan 10 2010
Movie 04 avi
Jan 10 2010

x To cancel a selection, press the Yellow button again.

Movie 05 avi
Jan 10 2010
Movie 06 avi
Jan 10 2010

x To deselect all selected files, press the TOOLS button

Movie 07 avi
Jan 10 2010

Movie 08 avi
Jan 10 2010

and select Deselect All. Jan 10 2010 Jan 10 2010

3. Press the TOOLS button and select Play Selected Contents. Movie 09 avi
Jan 10 2010
Movie 10 avi
Jan 10 2010

SUM   + < # %  # =%=!%

Playing the video/music/photo file group

1. While a file list is displayed, move to any file in the desired group.
2. Press the TOOLS button and select Play Current Group.

F Media Play - Additional Functions

Sorting the file list

Press the Blue button in the file list to sort the files.
Category Operation Videos Music Photos
Basic View Displays the whole folder. You can view the photo by selecting the folder.   
Title Sorts and displays the file title in Symbol/Number/Alphabet/Special order.   
Preference Sorts and displays the file by preference. You can change the file preference in the file
  
list section using the Green button.
Latest Date Sorts and shows files by the latest date.  
Earliest Date Sorts and shows files by the earliest date.  
Artist Sorts the music file by artist in alphabetical order. 
Album Sorts the music file by album in alphabetical order. 
Genre Sorts music files by the genre. 
Mood Sorts music files by the mood. You can change the music mood information. 
Monthly Sorts and shows photo files by month. 

 English
Videos/Music/Photos Play Option menu

04 Advanced Features
During file playback, press the TOOLS button.
Category Operation Videos Music Photos
Title You can move directly to another Title. 
Repeat Mode You can play movie and music files repeatedly.  
Picture Size You can adjust the picture size to your preference.

(Mode1 / Mode2 / Original)
Picture Setting You can adjust the picture setting. (p. 18 ~ 24)  
Sound Setting You can adjust the sound setting. (p. 24, 25)   
Subtitle Setting You can play the video with Subtitles. This function only works if the subtitles are the

same file name as the video.
Audio You can enjoy video in one of supported languages as required. The function is only

enabled when stream-type files which support multiple audio formats are played.
Stop Slide Show / You can start or stop a slide show.

Start Slide Show
Slide Show Speed You can select the slide show speed during the slide show. 
Slide Show Effect You can set various slide show effects. 
Background Music You can set and select background music when watching a slide show. 
Zoom You can zoom into images in full screen mode. 
Rotate You can rotate images in full screen mode. 
Home Background You can move the file to the Media Play desktop. 
Information You can see detailed information about the played file.   

Settings
Using the Setup Menu
■ Background Setting: Select to display the background you want.
■ Continuous Movie Play Help (Resume Play) (On / Off): Select to display the help pop-up message for continuous movie
playback.
■ Get DivX® VOD registration code: Shows the registration code authorized for the TV. If you connect to the DivX web site
and register, you can download the VOD registration file. If you play the VOD registration using Media Play, the registration
is completed.
✎ For more information on DivX® VOD, visit “www.DivX.com.”
■ Get DivX® VOD deactivation code: When DivX® VOD is not registered, the registration deactivation code is displayed. If
you execute this function when DivX® VOD is registered, the current DivX® VOD registration is deactivated.
■ Information: Select to view information about the connected device.

English 
Advanced Features
Anynet+

What is Anynet+? 8
Anynet+ is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet+ with your Samsung
TV’s remote. The Anynet+ system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet+ feature. To be sure your
Samsung device has this feature, check if there is an Anynet+ logo on it.

To connect to a Samsung Home Theater

Anynet+ Device 1 Home Theater Stand Rear Panel Stand Side Panel

1%% &'#% (

*+,-% 
&'#% (

Anynet+ Device 2, 3, 4
*+,-% &'#  (

*+,-% &'#  (

1. Connect the HDMI IN (1(DVI), 2(ARC), 3 or 4) jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+
device using an HDMI cable.
2. Connect the HDMI IN jack of the Home Theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet+ device using an
HDMI cable.
✎ NOTE
x Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input
on the Home Theater.
x The ARC function enables digital output of sound using the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port and can only be operated when
the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports the ARC function.
x When following the connection above, the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio. You will only hear sound from
the Home Theater’s Front, Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer. If you want to hear 5.1 channel audio, connect
the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT (OPTICAL) jack on the DVD / Satellite Box (i.e. Anynet Device 1 or 2) directly to the
Amplifier or Home Theater, not the TV.
x You can connect only one Home Theater.
x You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+ functions.
x Anynet+ works when the AV device supporting Anynet+ is in the standby or on status.
x Anynet+ supports up to 12 AV devices in total. Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type.

 English
Anynet+ Menu

04 Advanced Features
The Anynet+ menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet+ devices connected to the TV.
Anynet+ Menu Description
View TV Changes Anynet+ mode to TV broadcast mode.
Device List Shows the Anynet+ device list.
(device_name) MENU Shows the connected device menus. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the disc menu of
the DVD recorder will appear.
(device_name) INFO Shows the play menu of the connected device. E.g. If a DVD recorder is connected, the
play menu of the DVD recorder will appear.
Recording: (*recorder) Starts recording immediately using the recorder. (This is only available for devices that
support the recording function.)
Stop Recording: (*recorder) Stops recording.
Receiver Sound is played through the receiver.

If more than one recording device is connected, they are displayed as (*recorder) and if only one recording device is
connected, it will be represented as (*device_name).

F Setting Up Anynet+

" MENU  Application  Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC)  ENTER

■ Setup
Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) (Off / On): To use the Anynet+ Function, Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) must be set to On.
✎ When the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) function is disabled, all the Anynet+ related operations are deactivated.
Auto Turn Off (No / Yes): Setting an Anynet+ Device to turn off automatically when the TV is turned off.
✎ The active source on the TV must be set to TV to use the Anynet+ function.
✎ Even if an external device is still recording, it may turn off.

F Switching between Anynet+ Devices

1. Anynet+ devices connected to the TV are listed.
✎ If you cannot find a device you want, press the Red button to refresh the list.
2. Select a device and press the ENTER button. You can switch to the selected device.
✎ The Device List menu will only appear when you set Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) to On in the Application menu.
x Switching to the selected device may take up to 2 minutes. You cannot cancel the operation during the switching
operation.
x If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button, you cannot use the Anynet+ function.
Make sure to switch to an Anynet+ device by using the Device List.

English 
Advanced Features
F Recording
You can make a recording of a TV Program using a Samsung recorder.
1. Select Recording.
✎ When there are more than two recording devices
x When multiple recording devices are connected, the recording devices are listed. Select one recording device in
the Device List.
✎ When the recording device is not displayed, select Device List and press the Red button to search devices.
2. Press the EXIT button to exit.
✎ You can record the source streams by selecting Recording: (device_name).
✎ Pressing the Q (REC) button will record whatever you are currently watching. If you are watching video from
another device, the video from the device is recorded.
✎ Before recording, check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device. To properly
connect an antenna to a recording device, refer to the recording device’s users manual.

F Listening through a Receiver

You can listen to sound through a receiver (i.e Home Theater) instead of the TV Speaker.
1. Select Receiver and set to On.
2. Press the EXIT button to exit.
✎ If your receiver supports audio only, it may not appear in the device list.
✎ The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT (OPTICAL) jack of the TV.
✎ When the receiver (i.e Home Theater) is set to On, you can hear sound output from the TV’s Optical jack. When
the TV is displaying a DTV (air) signal, the TV will send out 5.1 channel sound to the receiver. When the source is a
digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI, only 2 channel sound will be heard from
the receiver.
✎ NOTE
x You can only control Anynet+ devices using the TV remote control, not the buttons on the TV.
x The TV remote control may not work under certain conditions. If this occurs, reselect the Anynet+ device.
x The Anynet+ functions do not operate with other manufacturers’ products.

Using the ARC function

You can listen to sound through a receiver connected HDMI cable without the need for a separate optical cable.
1. Select Receiver and set to On.
2. Press the EXIT button to exit.
✎ To use the ARC function, a receiver which supports the HDMI-CEC and ARC features must be connected to the HDMI
IN 2 (ARC) port.
✎ To disable the ARC function, set the Receiver to Off. Even if the TV transmits the ARC signal continuously, the receiver
will be blocked from receiving the signal.

 English
F Troubleshooting for Anynet+
Problem
Anynet+ does not work.
I want to start Anynet+.
I want to exit Anynet+.
The message “Connecting to
Anynet+ device...” appears on the
screen.
The Anynet+ device does not play.
The connected device is not
displayed.
The TV Program cannot be
recorded.
The TV sound is not output
through the receiver.
04 Advanced Features
Possible Solution
• Check if the device is an Anynet+ device. The Anynet+ system supports Anynet+ devices only.
• Only one receiver (home theater) can be connected.
• Check if the Anynet+ device power cord is properly connected.
• Check the Anynet+ device’s Video/Audio/HDMI cable connections.
• Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
• Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode.
• Check whether the remote control is Anynet+ compatible.
• Anynet+ doesn’t work in certain situations. (Searching channels, operating Media Play or Plug & Play (initial
setup), etc.)
• When connecting or removing the HDMI cable, please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off
and on again.
• Check if the Anynet+ Function of Anynet+ device is set on.
• Check if the Anynet+ device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to
On in the Anynet+ Setup menu.
• Press the TOOLS button to display the Anynet+ menu and select a menu you want.
• Select View TV in the Anynet+ menu.
• Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a non- Anynet+ device.
• Press ;, PRE-CH, and FAV.CH to change the TV mode. (Note that the channel button operates
only when a tuner-embedded Anynet+ device is not connected.)
• You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynet+ or switching to a view mode.
• Use the remote control when the Anynet+ setting or switching to view mode is complete.
• You cannot use the play function when Plug & Play (initial setup) is in progress.
• Check whether or not the device supports Anynet+ functions.
• Check whether or not the HDMI cable is properly connected.
• Check whether Anynet+ (HDMI-CEC) is set to On in the Anynet+ setup menu.
• Search Anynet+ devices again.
• You can connect an Anynet+ device using the HDMI cable only. Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet+
functions.
• If connection is terminated because there has been a power interruption or the HDMI cable has been
disconnected, please repeat the device scan.
• Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected.
• Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver.
• The ARC function enables digital output of sound using the HDMI IN 2(ARC) port and can only be operated
when the TV is connected to an audio receiver that supports the ARC function.
English 
Advanced Features
Internet@TV

F Getting Started with Internet@TV

   
Internet@TV brings useful and entertaining
contents and services directly from the web to
INTERNET@TV your TV.
,@$%
@+ ]

" MENU  Application  Content View

 Internet@TV  ENTER

#
 $
# 

X  B ,>
;<  #@=$= 

Screen Display

TV Screen:     Recommended Applications:

Displays the current channel. Displays the recommended service by
Samsung. You are not able to add or
delete a service in this list.
Information:
,@$%
@+ ]
Displays notices, new
applications, and
advertisements brought to
Downloaded Applications:
you by Samsung product
Displays the downloaded applications
introductions.
through the Samsung Apps.

Application service:
#
 $
# 

You can experience

=X  B =,>
;<  =#@=$= 
various service by provided
samsung.
Internet@TV Settings:
Edit and configure applications
and Internet@TV settings.
Controls:
• Red (Login): To log in to Internet@TV.
• B Green (Mark as Favorite): To mark the applications as a favorite.
• Blue (Sort by): To sort the applications.
• $ Return: To return to the previous menu.
✎ The color buttons may work differently depending on the application.

✎ NOTE
x Configure the network settings before using Internet@TV. For more information, refer to “Network Connection” (p.
32).
x Unsupported fonts within the provider’s content will not display normally.
x Slow responses and/or interruptions may occur, depending on your network conditions.
x Depending on the region, English may be the only language supported for application services.
x This feature is not available in some locations.
x If you experience a problem using a application, please contact the content provider.
x According to circumstances of the contents provider, an application’s updates or the application itself may be
discontinued.
x Depending on your country’s regulations, some applications may have limited service or not be supported.

 English
Account Login ■ System Setup

04 Advanced Features
For an application with multiple accounts, use  and  to Ticker Autorun (Off / On): You can set Ticker Autorun
access the different accounts. to come on when powering on the TV.
✎ The Ticker application provides useful News,
  Weather, and Stock Market information. The
Ticker application on Internet@TV must be
downloaded to use this feature.
User account : admin ✎ Depending on your country, the Ticker application
may have a different service or not be supported.
Password : Channel Bound Service (Off / On): Some channels
support applications as an Internet data service, allowing
you to access the Internet service while watching TV.
  €Q= -'=$= % ✎ Only available if supported by the broadcaster.
Change the Service Lock password
✎ For a more enjoyable application experience, register ✎ The default password set is “0-0-0-0.”
and log in to your account.
✎ If you forget the password you created, press the
✎ For instructions on creating an account, refer to following sequence of remote control buttons to
Settings  Internet@TV ID  Create. reset the password to “0-0-0-0”: POWER (off) 
1. Press the Red button in the Internet@TV home page. MUTE  8  2  4  POWER (on).
2. Select the desired User account, then press the Reset: Resets Internet@TV settings to factory default
ENTER button. settings.
✎ If you want to create an account, press the Red ■ Internet@TV ID
button; then the create account OSD window will You can use this menu when creating and deleting
appear. the account. You can control your account including
3. After selecting User account, enter the Password using contents site’s account information.
the number button on the remote control. Create: Create an account and link it with desired
✎ When login succeeds, User account will be service applications.
displayed on the screen. ✎ NOTE
x Maximum number of accounts is 10.
F Setting up Internet@TV x Maximum number of characters is 8.

Settings
Create IDs and configure Internet@TV settings from this
screen. Highlight Settings using the  and  buttons and
press the ENTER button.
# 

}#@
 #  }!> $ "1??
}Internet@TV ID }  %# < "1??
}Service Manager
}Change the Service Lock password
}Properties
}Reset

$ 

English 
Advanced Features
How to create Internet@TV ID
Before creating a User account, you should download
the application first on the Samsung Apps.
1. Using the /// button, select Settings. Then
press the ENTER button.
2. Press the  button to select Internet@TV ID, then
press the ENTER or  button.
3. Select Create. The Keypad screen will appear.
4. The keypad OSD will be displayed on the screen.
Using the Keypad
Pressing the – button on the remote while you are
using the Screen Keypad enables you to change the
text fields to lower case, upper case, numbers and
icons.
You can use this Screen Keypad in a several Internet@
TV applications.
Here is how to input characters.
4-1. For example, suppose that you want to input
“105Chang”.
4-2. Press the – button on the remote twice to
change the input mode from lower case to
numbers.
4-3. Press the 1, 0 and 5 button in numerical order.
4-4. Press the – button on the remote 3 times to
change the input mode from numbers to upper
case.
4-5. Press the 2 button on the remote 3 times to
input C.
4-6. Press the – button on the remote 3 times to
change the input mode from upper case to
lower case.
4-7. Press buttons on the remote to input the rest
of “Chang”. When done, press the ENTER
button.
 English
5. Using the number buttons, enter the User account
and Password.
x Password must be numbers only.
x You can delete the entered character using the
PRE-CH button.
x Using the R (REW) or ? (FF) button, you
can select icon you want to enter in icon keypad
screen.
6. Account created. You can use the services provided
by all users of your Samsung TV with a single
login by linking the users’ account to the TV ID. If
you want to register a service site ID, select Yes.
Service Site list will appear on the screen.
7. Select Register of the Service Site you want, then
press the ENTER button.
8. Using number buttons, enter your application site ID
and password. Then press the ENTER button.
9. Registered successfully. If you add another service
site, select Yes. then press the ENTER button,
go to step 5.
10. When completed, select OK. Then press the
ENTER button.
Manager
– Service Site: Register login information for service
sites.
– Change Password: Change account password.
– Delete: Delete the account.
■ Service Manager: Delete and lock applications installed
to Internet@TV.
Lock: Lock the application.
✎ Accessing a locked application requires the
password.
Delete: Delete the application.
■ Properties: Display information about Internet@TV. Use
the Check the speed of your internet connection
option to test your network connection.
F Using the Internet@TV service Using the Samsung Apps by category

04 Advanced Features
The following categories are available:
y What’s New?: Displays newly registered applications.
Samsung Apps y Video: Displays various video media such as movies, TV
shows and short length videos.
Samsung Apps is a store for downloading applications to be
used on Samsung TV/AV equipment. y Sports: Displays various sports media such as match
information, images and short length video.
Users can enjoy a variety of contents such as videos, music,
photos, games, useful information etc. using the downloaded y Game: Displays various games such as sudoku and
applications. chess.
Additional applications will be available in the future. y Lifestyle: Includes various lifestyle media services such
as music, personal photo management tools and social
#
 $

networking such as Facebook and Twitter.

;   ,
%  ,
   '
) ‚
' ƒ
y Information: Includes various information services such
.  0!
You Tube ; as news, stocks and weather.
#
!.
 !
^

/
y Other: Includes other miscellaneous services.
X?
@% y My Page: Displays the application list and your cyber
-? cash balance.
1  ✎ Starting in the middle of 2010 (US and Korea
,@ only), you can purchase cyber-cash for buying
* % applications through tv.samsung.com.
X  B !  %.  =#@=$=  y Help: If you have questions about Internet@TV, check
this section first.
✎ Using the color buttons with the Samsung Apps.
x Red (Login): To log in to the internet service.
x B Green (Thumbnail View): To change the view

mode.
x Blue (Sort By): To sort the applications by
Featured, Most downloaded, Most recent or
Name.
x $ Return: Moves to previous menu.

[ Legal Statement ]
Due to the various capabilities of products featuring the Samsung Internet@TV - Content Service, as well as limitations in the
available content, certain features, applications, and services may not be available on all devices or in all territories. Some
features on Internet@TV may also require additional peripheral devices or membership fees that are sold separately. Please
visit http://www.samsung.com for more information on specific device information and content availability. The services and
availability of content through Internet@TV are subject to change from time to time without prior notice.

English 
Advanced Features
Yahoo

Internet@TV provides an integrated Internet and television experience powered by the Yahoo!® Widget
Engine. You can monitor financial stocks, share photos with friends and family, and track news and
weather all through the Yahoo!® Widget Engine.
Yahoo
✎ When running Internet@TV for the first time, you will be prompted to configure the basic settings.
✎ Depending on your country’s regulations, some applications may have limited service or not be
supported.

Screen Display
y Dock Mode

Welcome Banner: Shows your profile.

* %%w „
…"…$,,w@Q • Blue (Viewport): Toggles between Viewport and
.  ==# 
Overlay modes.
• Yellow (Edit Snippet): To edit snippets with a help
window.
✎ In Viewport mode, the TV or video plays in a
scaled-down area with graphics outside. In
overlay mode, the graphics are displayed on
top of the TV or video.

Dock: Displays your snippets.

• Snippets are quick launch icons for your widgets.
#  
 )=$!*= ) /%% @ ;-'$'= ✎ PROFILE Widget and Widget Gallery cannot be
w  deleted.

y Sidebar Mode

;-'$'=
Widget logo and Current menu.
,@#>

! < 
>

@%  

%  
? %
 %
Contents List :
The current selection is highlighted in blue.
Displays the current page and number of total pages.

Controls:
$' #@%
• Red: To close the widget. If you want to see the Dock mode,
-#@%
;0 „ press the Yahoo button.
+
%@; .% • B Green: To change the widget’s settings.
$0 „;  • Yellow: To manage your snippets.
• Blue: To size video to fit or display in full screen.
✎ Some buttons may not be available with certain widgets.

Editing Snippets in the Dock

1. Edit a snippet by selecting it in the dock and pressing the Yellow button.
2. The snippet moves to the Second position and its tile slides up to show the following help text:
✎ Using the color buttons with the dock mode.
x Red (Delete): To remove the widget.
✎ Deleted widgets can be restored from Widget Gallery.
x Blue (Move): To rearrange snippets.
x Yellow (Done): To exit the Edit Snippet menu.

 English
F PROFILE Widget
Set up user profiles through Profile Widget. You can set up
multiple profiles, each with its own list of widgets. Use the
Switch Profile option to switch to a different user profile.
✎ There must be at least two registered profiles. For
instructions on adding a profile, refer to Administrative
Controls.
y Use the Profile Settings option to customize and
protect your profile.
– User profiles can be
customized with a unique
name and avatar (a picture
used to represent your
profile).
– Your profile’s name and
avatar are displayed in the
profile snippet in the dock.
– Protect your profile using
the Create Profile PIN
option.
– When setting up a new
PIN, you can set a Security
Question.
y The Profile Settings option limits access to the profile’s
widgets.
– If you forget your Profile PIN, answer your profile’s
Security Question.
– New widgets cannot be added to profiles with the
Limit Profile indicator enabled.
✎ Owner PIN must be set to use this feature.
For instructions on setting Owner PIN, refer to
Administrative Controls.
y System Settings allows you to:
– Change your Location and Zip Code (US only) to
tailor contents specific to your region.
– Replay the tutorial that was shown during guided
setup.
– Restore Factory Settings resets all widget settings
and information.
✎ When you cannot run Restore Factory
Settings normally or you can not install/run
the specific widgets normally, press the remote
control buttons in the following sequence,
which resets the Yahoo Service: POWER (on)
 MUTE  9  4  8  EXIT  POWER
(off)  POWER (on)  YAHOO! (If Yahoo
Service is displayed on the TV Screen, You
should stop the Yahoo Service using EXIT
button in advance.).
y From the Administrative Controls menu you can:
04 Advanced Features
– Configure the Screen Saver timeout to avoid screen
burn-in.
– Create Owner PIN and set a Security Question to
control other profiles.
– Create and configure a new profile with a unique set
of widgets.
– Delete an existing profile.
y Sign into Yahoo!® from PROFILE Widget using your
Yahoo! ID.
– If you have a Yahoo! ID, you can access personalized
content using Yahoo! TV widgets.
– You will be automatically signed-in to all installed
Yahoo! TV widgets with your profile’s Yahoo! ID.
– If you do not have a Yahoo! account, visit “www.
yahoo.com” to create one.
– You may not be able to log in with an ID created
through a Yahoo website in a country that does not
support Internet@TV.
y About Profile Widget: Press the Green button to view
a brief description of Profile Widget, Copyright Policy,
Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy.
F Widget Gallery
Use Yahoo!® Widget Gallery to add more widgets to your TV.
View available TV widgets in the following categories:
■ Featured: Displays
recommended widgets.
■ Latest: Displays the most
recent widgets.
■ All widgets: Displays all
widgets.
■ Categories: Displays all
widgets by category.
✎ To install a widget, select Add Featured
Latest
Widget to My Profile and All widgets
press the ENTER button. Categories
The widget will be installed
and become available in the
dock.
■ Widget Gallery Settings: Press the Green button.
– About Yahoo! Widget Gallery...: You can view brief
information for the Widget Gallery, Copyright Policy,
Terms of Service, and Privacy Policy.
– TV Widget Software: Displays the current version of
the system software, and installed widgets.
– Create your own widgets through the Developer
Settings menu. For more information, visit our
developer site at http://connectedtv.yahoo.com/.
English 
Advanced Features
F Troubleshooting for Internet@TV

Problem Possible Solution

Some application contents only appear
in English. How can I change the
language?
Some application services do not work.
When a network error occurs, I can only
use the setting menu.
The Application content language may be different from the application user
interface language.
The ability to change the language depends on the service provider.
Check with the service provider.
Refer to the help website for application service provider information.
If network connection doesn’t work, your service might be limited, as all
functions except the setting menu are needed to connect to the internet.

All content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other
intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or
services in a manner that has not been authorized by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorized
by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works,
exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device.
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE AND ACCURACY IS WITH YOU. THE DEVICE AND ALL THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE DEVICE AND ANY CONTENT AND SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS OR, IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF
QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY,
TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT THE DEVICE, CONTENT OR SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, OR THAT OPERATION OF THE DEVICE OR
SERVICES WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE
LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY
FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A
RESULT OF THE USE OF THE DEVICE, OR ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE ACCESSED BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Third party services may be changed, suspended, removed, terminated or interrupted, or access may be disabled at any time, without notice, and
Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are
transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this
disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any change, interruption, disabling, removal of or suspension of any content
or service made available through this device. Samsung may impose limits on the use of or access to certain services or content, in any case and
without notice or liability.
Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the
content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.

F Help Website

✎ Accessing steps may be changed in the future.

✎ It can be different links for special countries.
Country Website
^#$ 

 
 
! % <
 Œ-  Œ!.
 

 
 
!. Œ-  Œ!.


 
 %%<

 Œ-  Œ!.
, F 

 
 
 % <

 Œ-  Œ!.

 English

AllShare
" MENU= Application  Content View  AllShare
 ENTER
F About AllShare
AllShare connects your TV and compatible Samsung mobile
phones/ devices through a network. On your TV, you can
view call arrivals, SMS messages and schedules set on your
mobile phones. In addition, you can play media contents
including videos, photos and music saved on your mobile
phones or the other devices (such as your PC) by controlling
them on the TV via the network. Additionally, you can use
your TV for browsing web pages in your mobile phones.
✎ For more information, visit “www.samsung.com” or
contact the Samsung call center. Mobile devices may
need additional software installation. For details, refer to
each device’s user’s guide.
F Setting Up AllShare
Setup
■ Message (On / Off): Enables or disables the message
function (for call arrivals, SMS messages and schedules
set on your mobile phones).
■ Media (On / Off): Enables or disables the media
function. When the media function is on, it plays videos,
photos and music from a mobile phone or other device
that supports AllShare.
■ ScreenShare (On / Off): Enables or disables the
ScreenShare function for using mobile phone as a
remote control.
■ TV name: Sets the TV name so you can find it easily on
a mobile device.
✎ If you select User Input, you can type on the TV
using the OSK (On Screen Keyboard).
3/7
04 Advanced Features
Message / Media / ScreenShare
Shows a list of mobile phones or connected devices which
have been set up with this TV for using the Message,
Media, or ScreenShare function.
✎ The Media function is available in all mobile devices
which support AllShare.
■ Allowed / Denied: Allows/Blocks the mobile phone.
■ Delete: Deletes the mobile phone from the list.
✎ This function only deletes the name of the mobile
from the list. If the deleted mobile device is turned
on or trys to connect to the TV, it may appear on
the list again.
Using the Message Function
Using this function, you view call arrivals, SMS messages
and schedules set on the mobile phone through the alarm
window while watching TV.
✎ NOTE
x To disable the alarm window, set Message to Off in
Setup of AllShare.
x If OK is selected, or if OK is not selected after the
message has appeared three times, the message
will be deleted. The message is not deleted from the
mobile phone.
x The alarm window can be displayed while using
some applications such as Media Play etc. To view
the contents of a message, switch to TV viewing
mode.
x When a message from an unknown mobile phone is
displayed, select the mobile phone on the message
menu in AllShare and select Denied to block the
phone.
Message View
If a new SMS message arrives while you are watching
TV, the alarm window appears. If you click the OK
button, the contents of the message are displayed.
✎ You can configure the viewing settings for SMS
messages on your mobile phones. For the
procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual.
✎ Some types of characters may be displayed as
#  ,

  1 blank or broken characters.

,

 ,  1
,  # #   1

# #  !.  * !.

=# % =$= =/==F

# =$= 

English 
Advanced Features
Call Arrival Alarm Using ScreenShare Function
If a call arrives while you are watching TV, the alarm Using ScreenShare, you can browse various web contents
window appears. provided by the mobile phone. For example, the image
below displays an access page for contents on a mobile.
Schedule Alarm You can read the mobile’s files and view the phone book and
While you are watching TV, the alarm window appears to calendar on the TV. Also, in the phone book, you can make a
display the registered event. call to another person, or send to SMS.
✎ You can configure viewing settings for schedule ✎ NOTE
contents on your mobile phones. For the
procedures, refer to the mobile phone manual. x You must have ScreenShare installed on your
Samsung Mobile phone/device to use this feature.
✎ Some special characters may be displayed as
x Doc Viewer can read files in doc format, but cannot
blank or broken characters.
modify them.
Using the Media Function x The screen display may differ depending on the
An alarm window appears informing the user that the media connected device.
contents (videos, photos, music) sent from a mobile phone
will be displayed on your TV. The contents are played !" !#$
automatically 3 seconds after the alarm window appears.
If you press the RETURN or EXIT button when the alarm
window appears, the media contents are not played.
✎ NOTE
x If the media function executes for the first time, 
%  +.  

the warning popup window appears. Press the

ENTER button to select Allow, then you can use =# %   

Media function on that device.

Ž^>+ < 
 
    |%  %% %@
Using your Samsung Phone to Operate Your TV
-?@
%%  |%  %@ @ < \% 



Ž$ %\ 


Ž+ @
Before you can use this feature, you must connect to
0%
   
 &
 (? 
?  Ž$%%#   a Samsung mobile phone that supports ScreenShare
# 
functions. When operating the TV with your mobile phone,
) "% 
  ?@ < 
  
  only the POWER, :, ; and MUTE buttons
?% >\   
  %@ 
-?@ 
   >‘
 @ ‚
 

\ are supported.
✎ Even if you keep pressing down on a control button
 
 %@   @Ž$%%  
%@

$%% + @ (channel or volume) on the mobile phone, the value will

only go up or down by one unit.

x To turn off the media contents transmission from

the mobile phone, set Media to Off in the AllShare
setup.
x Contents may not be played on your TV depending
on their resolution and format.
x The ENTER and  /  buttons may not work
depending on the type of media content.
x Using the mobile device, you can control the media
playing. For details, refer to each mobile’s user’s
guide.
x When you want to play media contents from
your PC, select the PC icon on the main display
of AllShare. Then the TV’s Media Play menu
automatically changes. For more detail information,
refer to “Media Play” (p. 39).

 English
Other Information

05 Other Information
Assembling the Cables

Wall-Mount Type

✎ Do not pull the cables too hard when arranging them. This may cause damage to the product’s connection terminals.

English 
Other Information
Securing the TV to the Wall

Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall. In particular, ensure your children
do not hang over or destabilize the TV; doing so may cause the TV to tip over, causing serious injuries or
death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the
anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows.

Accessories

TV-Holder Screw (M4XL12)

To prevent the TV from falling

1. Remove the screw attached to the back of your TV, then connect the TV-Holder to the TV with the screw.
✎ Make sure to only use the supplied screw.

2. Firmly fasten the screw to the wall or cabinet where the TV is to be installed. Tie the TV-Holder attached to the TV and the
screw fastened on the wall or cabinet so that the TV is fixed.
✎ Only the screw needed to attach the holder to the TV is supplied. The screw to attach the Holder to the wall or
cabinet must be purchased separately. We recommend purchasing a size M4xL20 wood screw.
✎ Install the TV close to the wall so that it does not fall.
✎ When attaching the TV to the wall, tie the cord level with the ground or slanted downwards for safety purposes.
✎ Check the cord occasionally to make sure it is secure.
✎ Before moving the TV, separate the connected cord first.

3. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any
doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer.

 English

If the TV seems to have a problem, first try this list of possible problems and solutions. If none of these troubleshooting tips
apply, visit “www.samsung.com,” then click on Support, or call Samsung customer service at 1-800-SAMSUNG.
Issues
Poor picture
The TV image does not look as good as it
did in the store.
The picture is distorted: macro block error,
small block, dots, pixelization.
Color is wrong or missing.
There is poor color or brightness.
There is a dotted line on the edge of the
screen.
The picture is black and white.
When changing channels, the picture
freezes or is distorted or delayed.
3D
The 3D Active Glasses may not work
properly if there is any other 3D product
or electronic devices turned on near the
glasses or TV.
You may notice a small amount of screen
flickering when watching 3D images in
poor light conditions (from a strobe light,
etc.), or under a fluorescent lamp (50Hz ~
60Hz) or 3 wavelength lamp.
The ideal viewing distance should be three
times or more the height of the screen.
If you leave 3D glasses on, battery lifespan
is shortened.
05 Other Information
Troubleshooting
Solutions and Explanations
First of all, please perform the Picture Test and confirm that your TV is properly displaying the test image.
(go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Picture Test) (p. 30)
If the test image is properly displayed, the poor picture may be caused by the source or signal.
• If you have an analog cable/satellite box, upgrade to an HD digital set top box. Use HDMI or
Component cables to deliver HD (high definition) picture quality.
• Cable/Satellite subscribers: Try HD stations from the channel line up.
• Antenna connection: Try HD stations after performing Auto program.
✎ Many HD channels are up scaled from SD(Standard Definition) contents.
• Adjust the Cable/Sat box video output resolution to 1080i or 720p.
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially in fast moving pictures such
as sports and action movies.
• Low signal level can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem.
• Mobile phones used close to the TV (up to 3.3 ft) may cause noise in picture on analog and digital TV.
• If you’re using Component connection, make sure the component cables are connected to the
correct jacks. Incorrect or loose connections may cause color problems or a blank screen.
• Adjust the Picture options in the TV menu (go to Picture mode / Color / Brightness / Sharpness)
(p. 18)
• Adjust Energy Saving option in the TV menu (go to MENU – Picture – Eco Solution –
Energy Saving) (p. 18)
• Try resetting the picture to view the default picture settings (go to MENU - Picture - Picture Reset)
(p. 24)
• If the picture size is set to Screen Fit, change it to 16:9 (p. 20).
• Change cable/satellite box resolution.
• If you are using an AV composite input, connect the video cable (yellow) to the Green jack of
component input 1 on the TV.
• If connected to a cable box, please try to reset it. (reconnect the AC cord and wait until the cable box
reboots. It may take up to 20 minutes)
• Set the output resolution of the cable box to 1080i or 720p.
• If there is a problem, keep other electronic devices as far away as possible from the 3D Active
Glasses.
• If so, dim the light or turn the lamp off.
• We recommend sitting with viewer's eyes on a level with the screen.
• Turn off 3D glasses while not using them.
English 
Other Information
Issues
Sound Problem
There is no sound or the sound is too low
at maximum volume.
The picture is good but there is no sound.
The speakers are making an inappropriate
noise.
No Picture, No Video
The TV won’t turn on.
The TV turns off automatically.
There is no picture/video.
RF(Cable/Antenna) Connection
The TV is not receiving all channels.
No Caption on digital channels.
The picture is distorted: macro block error,
small block, dots, pixelization.
PC Connection
A “Mode Not Supported” message
appears.
“PC” is always shown on the source list,
even if a PC is not connected.
The video is OK but there is no audio.
 English
Solutions and Explanations
First of all, please perform the Sound Test to confirm that your TV audio is properly operating.
(go to MENU - Support - Self Diagnosis - Sound Test) (p. 30)
If the audio is OK, the sound problem may caused by the source or signal.
• Please check the volume of the device (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) connected to your TV.
• Set the Speaker Select option to TV Speaker in the Sound menu (p. 25).
• If you are using an external device, make sure the audio cables are connected to the correct audio
input jacks on the TV.
• If you are using an external device, check the device’s audio output option (ex. you may need to
change your cable box’s audio option to HDMI when you have a HDMI connected to your TV).
• If you are using a DVI to HDMI cable, a separate audio cable is required.
• If your TV has a headphone jack, make sure there is nothing plugged into it.
• Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable.
• Check cable connections. Make sure a video cable is not connected to an audio input.
• For antenna or Cable connections, check the signal strength. Low signal level may cause sound
distortion.
• Perform the Sound Test as explained above.
• Make sure the AC power cord is securely plugged in to the wall outlet and the TV.
• Make sure the wall outlet is working.
• Try pressing the POWER button on the TV to make sure the problem is not the remote. If the TV turns
on, refer to “Remote control does not work” below.
• Ensure the Sleep Timer is set to Off in the Setup menu (p. 26).
• If your PC is connected to the TV, check your PC power settings.
• Make sure the AC power cord is plugged in securely to the wall outlet and the TV.
• When watching TV from an antenna or cable connection, the TV will turn off after 10 - 15 minutes if
there is no signal.
• Check cable connections (remove and reconnect all cables connected to the TV and external
devices).
• Set your external device’s (Cable/Sat Box, DVD, Blu-ray etc) video outputs to match the connections
to the TV input. For example, if an external device’s output is HDMI, it should be connected to an
HDMI input on the TV.
• Make sure your connected devices are powered on.
• Be sure to select the TV’s correct source by pressing the SOURCE button on the remote control.
• Reboot the connected device by reconnecting the device’s power cable.
• Make sure the coaxial cable is connected securely.
• Please try Auto Program to add available channels to the channel list. Go to MENU - Channel -
Auto Program then select Auto and make sure the correct Cable TV signal type is set in the menu.
There are 3 options (STD, HRC and IRC) (p. 16)
• Verify the Antenna is positioned correctly.
• Check Caption Setup menu. Try changing Caption Mode Service1 to CC1 (p. 28).
• Some channels may not have caption data.
• Compression of video contents may cause picture distortion, especially with fast moving pictures
such as sports and action movies.
• A low signal can cause picture distortion. This is not a TV problem.
• Set your PC’s output resolution so it matches the resolutions supported by the TV (p. 14).
• This is normal; “PC” is always shown on the source list, regardless of whether a PC is connected.
• If you are using an HDMI connection, check the audio output setting on your PC.
Issues
Network Connection
The wireless network connection failed.
Software Upgrade over the network fails.
Others
Purple/green rolling horizontal bars and
buzzing noise from the TV speakers with
Component cable connection.
The picture won’t display in full screen.
The remote control does not work.
The cable/set top box remote control
doesn’t turn the TV on or off, or adjust the
volume.
A “Mode Not Supported” message
appears.
Caption on TV menu is greyed out.
There is a plastic smell from the TV.
The TV Signal Information is unavailable
in the Self Diagnostic Test menu.
The TV is tilted to the side.
The channel menu is greyed out
(unavailable).
Your settings are lost after 30 minutes or
every time the TV is turned off.
You have intermittent loss of audio or
video.
You see small particles when you look
closely at the edge of the frame of the TV.
POP (TV’s internal banner ad) appears on
the screen.
✎ This TFT LED panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels which require sophisticated technology to produce. However,
there may be a few bright or dark pixels on the screen. These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the
product.
Solutions and Explanations
05 Other Information
• The Samsung Wireless USB dongle is required to use a wireless network.
• Make sure the Network Connection is set to Wireless (p. 34).
• Make sure the TV is connected to a wireless IP sharer (router).
• Try network test in Setup menu (p. 29).
• If you have latest SW version, SW upgrade will not proceed.
• Remove the left and right audio connections from the set-top-box. If the buzzing stops, this indicates
that the set-top-box has a grounding issue. Replace the Component video cables with an HDMI
connection.
• HD channels will have black bars on either side of the screen when displaying up scaled SD (4:3)
contents.
• Black bars on the Top & Bottom will be shown on movies that have aspect ratios different from your
TV.
• Adjust the picture size options on your external device or TV to full screen.
• Replace the remote control batteries with the poles (+/–) in the right direction.
• Clean the sensor’s transmission window on the remote.
• Try pointing the remote directly at the TV from 5~6 feet away.
• Program the Cable/Set remote control to operate the TV. Refer to the Cable/Set user manual for the
SAMSUNG TV code.
• Check the supported resolution of the TV, and adjust the external device’s output resolution
accordingly. Refer to the resolution settings on page 14 of this manual.
• Caption can not be selected in the TV menu when connected via HDMI or Component (p. 28).
• Caption must be activated on the external device (p. 28).
• This smell is normal and will dissipate over time.
• This function is only available with digital channels from an Antenna / RF/Coax connection (p. 30).
• Remove the base stand from the TV and reassemble it.
• The Channel menu is only available when the TV source is selected.
• If the TV is in the Store Demo mode, it will reset audio and picture settings every 30 minutes.
Change the settings from Store Demo mode to Home Use mode in the Plug & Play procedure.
Press the SOURCE button to select TV mode, and go to MENU  Setup  Plug & Play 
ENTER (p. 10).
• Check the cable connections and reconnect them.
• Loss of audio or video can be caused by using overly rigid or thick cables. Make sure the cables are
flexible enough for long term use. If mounting the TV to a wall, we recommend using cables with 90
degree connectors.
• This is part of the product’s design and is not a defect.
• Select Home Use under Plug & Play mode. For details, refer to Plug & Play Feature (p. 10).
English 
Other Information
Enclosed Wireless LAN Adapter
WIS09ABGN2

Features
• Compatible with IEEE 802.11a/b/g and 802.11n draft 2.0
• Supports USB 2.0
• Compact and Lightweight Pocket-Sized Design
• Supported Model: The Enclosed wireless LAN Adapter will only be work with the TV is was shipped with.

Safety Precautions
• Do not let children swallow the product or play with the plastic bag. Keep the product and the plastic bag out of the reach of children.
• Do not let water or other liquids come into contact with the product, as it may result in damage.
• Keep the product away from direct sunlight, fire or a heat source such as a heater. This may reduce the product lifetime or result in fire.

Warranty: 1 Year
• If the product is not working properly due to a performance defect that appears under normal circumstances within the warranty period, please visit
the retailer where you purchased it.

FCC
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. To comply with the FCC RF exposure compliance requirements, this device and its antenna must not be co-located or operated in
conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter

Specifications
Standard IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n ( n : draft 2.0)
Host Interface USB 2.0
Frequency Range 2.412 ~ 2.4835GHz
5.15 ~ 5.850GHz
Security 64/128bit WEP, WPA /WPA2, 802.1x, WPS
Output Power 802.11a: 11dBm at 54Mbps
802.11b: 17dBm at 11, 5.5, 2, and 1Mbps
802.11g: 14dBm at 54Mbps
802.11n(2.4GHz): 14dBm (20MHz) / 12dBm (40MHz)
802.11n(5GHz): 11dBm (20MHz) / 9dBm (40MHz)
Data Rate 802.11a/g: 54,48,36,24,18,12,9 and 6Mbps
802.11b: 11,5.5,2 and 1Mbps
802.11n: up to 300Mbps (40MHz / spatial streams: 2)
Sensitivity 802.11a: –68dBm at 54Mbps
802.11b: –84dBm at 11Mbps
802.11g: –68dBm at 54Mbps
802.11n: –68dBm (20MHz) / –65dBm (40MHz)
Power consumption TX: 500mA at continuous transmit mode (2 Tx chains on )
RX: 300mA at continuous receive mode (2 Rx chains on )
Dimensions (L X W X D) 3.3 X 1.047 X 0.63 inches (84 X 26.6 X 16 mm)

Ideal For 802.11n (5GHz) 802.11n (2.4GHz) 802.11 a/b/g

streaming HD video not recommended not recommended
streaming SD video recommended
recommended recommended
music, photo

• Network conditions and environmental factors (including but not limited) volume of network traffic, building materials and construction, may lower
actual data throughput rate.
• Environmental conditions will affect wireless signal coverage.
• Video clips with lower than 20Mbps bit-rates are recommended for the wireless video streaming.

 English
 License

05 Other Information
TheaterSound, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
TheaterSound technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;
6,487,535 & other U.S. and worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and the Symbol are
registered trademarks. & DTS 2.0+ Digital Out and the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Product Includes software. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.

ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX,Inc. This is an official DivX Certified device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.
com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.
To generate the registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in the device setup menu.
Go to vod.divx.com with this code to complete the registration process and learn more about DivX VOD. Pat. 7,295,673; 7,460,688; 7,519,274

Open Source License Notice

In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the product menu.
Open Source License Notice is written only English.

Specifications

Panel native 1920 x 1080

Environmental Considerations
Operating Temperature 50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C)
Operating Humidity 10% to 80%, non-condensing
Storage Temperature -4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C)
Storage Humidity 5% to 95%, non-condensing
Stand Swivel (Left / Right) -20˚ ~ 20˚
Model Name UN46C9000 UN55C9000
Screen Size 46 inches 55 inches
(Diagonal) (45.9 inches measured diagonally) (54.6 inches measured diagonally)
Sound
(Output) 10 W X 2 15 W X 2
Dimensions (WxDxH)
Body 43.5 X 0.3 X 26.6 inches 51.0 X 0.3 X 30.9 inches
(1104.2 X 7.98 X 674.8 mm) (1295.1 X 7.98 X 784.4 mm)
With stand 43.5 X 12.1 X 32.3 inches 51.0 X 12.1 X 34.4 inches
(1104.2 X 306.1 X 819.5 mm) (1295.6 X 306.1 X 873.3 mm)
Weight
Without Stand 25.4 Ibs (11.5 kg) 33.1 Ibs (15 kg)
With Stand 48.1 Ibs (21.8 kg) 55.8 Ibs (25.3 kg)
With Wall Mount 38.1 Ibs (17.3 kg) 45.9 Ibs (20.8kg)

✎ Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

✎ This device is a Class B digital apparatus.
✎ For information about power supply, and more about power consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.

English 
Other Information
Dimensions
■ Front view / Side view

 






 

(Unit: inches)
Model name        
UN46C9000 43.5 40.2 22.7 30.2 26.6 32.3 0.3 12.1
UN55C9000 51.0 47.7 26.9 30.2 30.9 34.4 0.3 12.1

NOTE: All drawings are not necessarily to scale. Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice. Refer to the
dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV. Not responsible for typographical or printed errors.
© 2010 Samsung Electronics America, Inc

 English
 05 Other Information
Index

A F R
AllShare 57 FAV.CH button 8, 16 Receiver 48
Amplify 24 Favorite Channel 16 Recording 48
Antenna 16 Film Mode 21 Remote Control 6, 7
Anynet+ 46 Fine Tune 18 Repeat Mode 45
AUDIO OUT 13 Flesh Tone 19 RGB Only Mode 19
Auto Adjustment 24 Frequency 14 Rotate 45
Auto Volume 25
H S
B HDMI 11, 46 Select All 17
Background Music 45 Home Theater 13, 46 Self Diagnosis 30
Balance L/R 24 Sharpness 18
Basic View 44 I Signal Information 30
Batteries 6, 7 Sleep Timer 26
Installation Space 2
Black Tone 19 Slide Show 44
Internet@TV 50
Brightness 18 Software Upgrade 30
Source List 15
C L Speaker Select 25
Language 28 Specifications 65
Change PIN 28
License 65 Standby mode 5
Channel Menu 16
Symbol 3
Clock 26
Color Tone 20 M
Component 12
T
Media Play 39
Connecting to a PC 14 Melody 29 Timer 26
Connecting to an Audio Device 13 Menu Transparency 29 Title 44
Mono 25 Tools 3
D Music 43 Troubleshooting 61
TV Speaker 25
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT 13, 46
DivX® VOD 45 N
D-sub 14
U
Navigate 15
Dynamic 18 Network Connection 32 USB Drive 30, 39
Dynamic Contrast 19 Network Setup 33
V
E O Video Formats 42
Eco Sensor 18 Optimal resolution 14 Videos 41
Edit Name 15 Volume 5
Editing Channels 17
Energy Saving 18
P
W
Equalizer 24 Password 51
Photos 44 Warm 20
External Speaker 25
Picture Size 20, 45 White Balance 19
Plug & Play 10 Widget 55
Power Indicator 5

English 
Other Information
Regulatory Compliance Information

FCC Compliance Statement

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.

Interference
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will
not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which
can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the
following measures:
y Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
y Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
y Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
y Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Wireless Radio
For product available in the USA/Canada market, only channel 1~11 can be operated. Selection of other channels is not
possible. This device is going to be operated in 5.15~5.25GHz frequency range, it is restricted in indoor environment only.
Important: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator
& your body.

Industry Canada Statement

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
This device and its atenna(s) must not be colocated or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.

Wireless Radio
For product available in the USA/Canada market, only channel 1~11 can be operated. Selection of other channels is not
possible.
The device could automatically discontinue transmission in case of absence of information to transmit, or operational failure.
Note that this is not intended to prohibit transmission of control or signaling information or the use of repetitive codes where
required by the technology.
Important: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
IC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance 20cm between the radiator
& your body.

 English
&RQWDFW6$0681*:25/':,'(
,I\RXKDYHDQ\TXHVWLRQVRUFRPPHQWVUHODWLQJWR6DPVXQJSURGXFWVSOHDVHFRQWDFWWKH6$0681*FXVWRPHUFDUHFHQWHU

&RPPHQWFRQWDFWHU6DPVXQJGDQVOHPRQGH
6LYRXVDYH]GHVVXJJHVWLRQVRXGHVTXHVWLRQVFRQFHUQDQWOHVSURGXLWV6DPVXQJYHXLOOH]FRQWDFWHUOH6HUYLFH&RQVRPPDWHXUV
6DPVXQJ

&RPXQtTXHVHFRQ6$0681*:25/':,'(
6LGHVHDIRUPXODUDOJXQDSUHJXQWDRFRPHQWDULRHQUHODFLyQFRQORVSURGXFWRVGH6DPVXQJFRPXQtTXHVHFRQHOFHQWURGH
DWHQFLyQDOFOLHQWHGH6$0681*

&RXQWU\ &XVWRPHU&DUH&HQWHU :HE6LWH $GGUHVV

&$1$'$ 6$0681* ZZZVDPVXQJFRP 6DPVXQJ(OHFWURQLFV&DQDGD,QF&XVWRPHU6HUYLFH
6WDQGLVK&RXUW0LVVLVVDXJD2QWDULR/5%
&DQDGD
86$ 6$0681* ZZZVDPVXQJFRP 6DPVXQJ(OHFWURQLFV$PHULFD,QF&KDOOHQJHU
5RDG5LGJH¿HOG3DUN1-

‹6DPVXQJ(OHFWURQLFV&R/WG$OOULJKWVUHVHUYHG
%1$
Quick Setup Guide Step 3: Connect External Devices
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Samsung 1V.
Read this setup guide to get your1V up and running quickly. Connect your TV to your Home Theater
~~~_~.~~~!~fJ ..~.~..'YY..~~_'!~~.~.Jgyg!~).~.~~~¥.J?~~y.~~!.~~p.I.~!.~~!~)~~!~ ..~~~!.~~~:~ ......................•............._ _ _ .
or other audio device to enjoy enhanced
1-800-SAMSUNG (1-800-726-7864)
Sound quality. USing an Optical Cable
Samsung Electronics America, Inc. Best Connection
Digital Audio System
105 Challenger Road Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-0511
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc.
55 Standish Court Mississauga, Ontario L5R 4B2
Call Center hours of operation: Mon-Sun, 9:00 AM -12 USing an HDMI Cable
Use one of the connections below to connect
AM EST.
To register this product, visit: www.samsung.com/ your TV to an externallVV device, I HDMIOUT I DVD, Blu-rayHDplayer, HD cable box,
STB (Set-Top-Box),
register. We recommend using HDMI for the highest Device satellite receiver
picture quality.

USing an AudiO Cable

Very Good Connection Audio Cable (Not Supplied) Amplifier / DVD home theater
Step I: Install the Batteries into the Remote I AUDIOI: I
HDMI toDVI Cable (Not Supplied)
USing an HDMI to DVI Cable
Touch Remote Control
I ~~~:OU~ I
Device
~~~.~.~~~!~~._~.~~ _-_.._.._-_._ _ _._ _ __ _ _._---
IAUDIOO~T I Connect your TV to a PC to use it as a Monitor,

Audio Cable (Not Supplied)

AVAdapter(Supplied)
USing an HOMI to DVI Cable
Lowest Quality Connection Component Adapler (Supplied)
Good Connection

1 Slide and open the 2 Insert the battery 3 Slide and close the
AVAdapter(Supplied)

USing an AudloNldeo Cable ComponenlCable(NotSupplied)

USing a Component Cable
battery cover in with the Samsung battery cover in Audio Cable (NolSupplied)

the direction of the logo facing up. the direction of the DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box,
DVD, Blu-ray player, cable box,
arrow. arrow. STB satellite receiver, VCR
STB satellite receiver, VCR USing a D·Sub Cable
Device

Video Cable (Not Supplied)

Mini Remote Control

1 Turn the battery cover

counterclockwise to unlock it Step 4: Run Plug & Play ~ If your TV is attached to a cable or satellite box, skip Steps 3 through 5. After
and then separate the battery
When you turn on your TV for the first time, it automatically launches the Plug & Plug & Play is complete, set your TV to Channel 3 or 4, according to the
cover.
Play function. With Plug & Play, you can select the On Screen Display language, set directions for your cable or satellite box,
the clock mode, and launch the TV's channel memorizing process.
2 Insert a 3V Lithium battery. It also displays connection instructions similar to those in this guide, 6 The TV memorizes the available channels, This process can take up to 45 16:9 Wide screen 4:3 Standard screen Wide Fit
To navigate while Plug & Play is running, press the Up, Down, Left or Right arrow minutes,
3 Place the battery cover into buttons on your remote, To make a selection, press the ENTER G button.
the remote control aligning it
with the grooves and then turn the battery cover clockwise to lock the cover.
To skip a screen, press them button, To turn on your TV, press the POWER button
on the remote or on the TV. To run Plug & Play, follow these steps:
7 After the TV has memorized the channels, choose the Clock Mode. Select
Auto if you have a digital channel in your area, Select Manual if you don't, or
~ If the remote control doesn't work, check the following: if you have a cable or satellite box. When done, press the ENTER G button,
• Is the TV power on?
1 Turn on the TV and Touch Remote, and AutomatlCallyPnPMenuwlllbedlsplayed~
PlI'.. ~ If you select Manual, the clock setting screen appears,
then tap OK on your remote. afterpalringtheremotecontroltotheTV

• Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed? ~ Screen Fit: Displays the full image without any cut-off when HDMI (720p /
• Are the batteries drained?
~ It may take about one minute to establish
a wireless connection between the TV and ~ 8 Select the daylight savings time setting: Off or On, and then press the 1080i / 1080p) or Component (1080i / 1080p) signals are inputted.
ENTERG button.
• Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged? touch remote using the Samsung Wireless
• Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby? LAN Adapter. ~ This function is only available when the Clock Mode is set to Auto, ~~~!-l.9-~~9_~!l.~.~~~~~~~ __~_~~~_ _ _._._ _.__._._ _
Your TV has four preset Picture Modes with factory adjusted settings, each
2 Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN 9 Select the time zone in which you live, and then press the ENTER G button. designed to give you an excellent picture under specific conditions,
Step 2: Connect Power and Antenna or Cable Adapter to the TV. If you are failed, reconnect the Samsung Wireless LAN The Picture Modes are listed and described in the table below:
Adapter and then try again, For connecting the Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter, please see your Owner's Manual.
10 After the time zone screen, The connection method for best HD screen Mode Description
quality is displayed. Press Right arrow button on your remote to view each
screen in succession. Press the Blue button to skip this section, Dynamic Brightens picture. For a vibrant, enhanced image in brightly lit or
VHF/UHF Antenna
3 Using your remote control, select the language for the On Screen Display sunny room.
(OSD), and then press ENTER G button, 11 The Enjoy your TV. screen appears, Then press the ENTER G button.
Standard
Natural
For a bright, detailed picture in a normally lit room,
For a comfortable, easy-on-the-eyes picture in a normally lit room.
4 Select Home Use, and then press the ENTER G button. If you select Store
~~~~.9-~~9.~.~.~.~~!~~~.~}.~.~_. __. _._ _ _.__ _._ . Movie For a studio quality cinema picture in a dimly lit or dark room.
Demo, the TV will reset your picture and audio settings every 30 minutes.
Your TV has several screen size options, each designed to work best with specific To change the Picture Mode, follow these steps:
5 Select Antenna Source. If Antenna Source is Air, Cable or Auto, you must types of video input. If you have a cable box or satellite receiver, it may have its own
set of screen sizes as well.
1. Turn on your TV, press the TOOLS button on your remote, The Tools menu
Usea750hm(round)cable. select your cable system type, After selecting source, select Search; then appears.
press the ENTER G button on your remote. To change the screen size, press the P.SIZE button on your remote, The first time
2. Using the'" or T on your remote, select Picture Mode.
you press it, your TV displays the current setting. Thereafter, each time you press
~ Most cable systems are Standard (STD) systems, If you are not sure about the P.SIZE button, you change the size of the picture on the screen, 3. On the Picture Mode menu, use the .... or ~ on your remote to select the
what kind of cable system you have, contact your cable company. Picture Mode you want.
The following sizes are available:
4. Press the EXIT button to exit the menu.
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
BN68-02834A-OO
Step 5: Remote Control Buttons and Functions
!~_~_~_~_~~!!l_~!~__~~~~~iJ~!~~~_________________________________________________________________
Step 6: The Internet@TV and Media Play Features
Your TV's Internet@TV feature lets you connect to an ever-expanding portal of your
!~_~_~~_~_~~~!~_~_~~!~~~ _ favorite on-line digital content. Customizable widgets give you access to Blockbuster,
Facebook, YouTube, Flickr, Netflix* and more - all on your HDTV. The Media Play
feature lets you connect to your PC through your home network and stream PC audio
Network Connection - Wireless
You can connect your TV to your LAN through a standard wireless router or
modem. To connect your TV to your network wirelessly, you need a wireless router
or modem and a Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter (WIS09ABGN2), which you
connect to your TV's side panel USB jack. See the illustration below.

'"- [51Jjl-- _
and video files to your HDTV using your remote. To use IPTV or Samsung PC Share
Manager, you must connect your TV to your network. You can attach the TV to your
TV Power button - \
\ I@ network in two ways, by cable, using CAT 5 cable, or wirelessly, using a Samsung
Wireless LAN Adapter. Instructions for both connection methods are below.
(\l
~
Wireless IP sharer
(AP haVlng DHCP server)
The LAN Port on
the Wan

Touch screen
~~!~9_~~_~~~~_~_~!~~~ ~_~_i_~~~ __ _
Power Turn the TV on and off.
There are two main ways to connect your TV to your network using cable,
MUTE Mute or unmute. Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter LAN Cable (Not Supphed)
depending on your network setup. They are illustrated below:
Adjust the volume by pressing the Volume
Volume
button on the remote.
Change the channels by pressing the
Channel button on the remote.
Samsung's Wireless LAN Adapter supports the IEEE 802.11A1B/G and N
Channel ~ If your TV is attached to a cable or
--~~-~
CH
~ communication protocols. Samsung recommends using IEEE 802.11 N. When you
Speaker Earphone jack satellite box, change the channel
play video over a IEEE 802.11 B/G connection, the video may not play smoothly.
using the box's remote.
Most wireless network systems incorporate a security system that requires devices
that access the network through an access point or AP (typically a wireless IP
~ You can also change the channels by pressing the v CH A button on the
Sharer) to transmit an encrypted security code called an access key.
front panel of your TV and adjust the volume by pressing the - VOL + button.
If you select the Pure High-throughput (Greenfield) 802.11 n mode and set your AP's
Security Encryption type to WEP, TKIP or TKIPAES (WPS2Mixed), your Samsung
__
~~~~~!~~~ ~_~9_~~~~ _ TV will not support the connection in compliance with new Wi-Fi certification
To watch a movie on your Blu-ray player or watch your favorite TV show, you must specifications.
To view the On Screen Menus, follow these steps:
1. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on select the correct source. A source is a device, such as a Blu-ray/DVD player, a
__
~~~!i_~~~~~Jt!~~ ~~~_~_~~~_~~~_~_~~!~~_~ __:_~~~~9 _
your remote. The main menu appears. The cable/satellite box, antenna or a cable TV input. Sources can be connected to Most home networks use the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) to
menu's left side has the following menu options: your TV through the HDMI, DVI, Component, Composite, or D-sub connections, or configure network connections. Home networks that support DHCP automatically
through the Antenna or Cable In connections. The instructions below are for networks that use the Dynamic Host Configuration
Picture, Sound, Channel, Setup, Input, provide the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS values your TV needs to Protocol (DHCP) to configure network connections automatically. If your have a
Application, and Support. To view the signal from a source connected to the HDMI, DVI, Component, access the Internet so you don't have to enter them manually. Static IP network, see your user's manual for configuration instructions.
2. Press the .& or T button on your remote to Composite, or D-sub jack, press the SOURCE button on your remote. Each time To configure your network connection for a network that uses DHCP, follow these
you press the SOURCE button, you change to a different source. To configure your network connection for a network that uses DHCP, follow these
select a menu option, and then press the steps: steps:
ENTER G button. 1. Connect your TV to your network as shown in one of the illustrations above. 1. Connect your TV to your network as shown in the illustrations above.
3. When done using the menu, press the EXIT 2. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on your remote, and then select 2. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on your remote, and the select Setup
button on your remote to exit. Setup ----.. Network. ----.. Network.
3. Set the Network Type to Wired if it is not already set to Wired. 3. Set the Network Type to Wireless if it is not already set to Wireless.
4. Select Network Setup. The Network Setup screen appears. 4. Select Network Setup. The -- ._----------.
Network Setup
Mini Remote Control 5. On the Network Setup menu, Network Setup screen appears.
set Internet Protocol Setup and ~netwOrk-~~
5. On the Network Setup menu,

..
DNS to Auto. Auto acquires and Internet Protocol Setup : Auto
~ This is a special remote control for the visually impaired persons and has Braille points on the Channel and Volume buttons. select an AP (Access Point) or ad
enters the necessary internet values
automatically.
hoc network. if you have selected
network with a security key, the
••••
••••
~\
IrDA transmitter 6. Press the RETURN button, and Security Key screen appears. --- - - - _ _~~-
DNS
Power On/Off button ~ Point the IrDA transmitter at the TV then select Network Test to check 6. Enter the security key using the
••••
----H\\V)
IL~
and use the mini remote. Internet connectivity. numbers on the remote, and then
Next channel
Volume decrease .
Volume mease
~ Some networks are Static IP
networks. If your network is a
press the Blue button on your
remote.
A PBCIWPSI ~ Move l.p Enter') Return

Static IP network, you can not ~ Use the Direction button on your remote to move to the characters and
Previous channel use DHCP to configure the network connection. Instead, you must enter the enter key to select them.
the IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS Server manually. For 7. On the Network Setup menu, set Internet Protocol Setup and DNS to Auto.
instructions explaining how to configure a Static IP network, see your Owner's The Auto acquires and enters the necessary internet values automatically.
SI\MSUNG
manual.
8. Press the RETURN button, and then select Network Test to check internet
connectivity.
~!~~i_~~U~!~~~_~~~ry _
~ For more information, see your Owner's manual.
To view the On Screen
~~!!~~-~_!~~--~~~~-~------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ~~~~9_~~!_~_~~!i_~~_~_I_~_~ _ Menus, follow these steps: __
~~~_~_~~!~~~ ~_~_~~.~_~_~_i_~_~_!~~_~~9_i_~ __~!~y. _
1. Turn on your TV, press
Before you can use your TV's On/Off Timer, you must set the clock. To set the Auto Motion Plus ™ technology virtually eliminates any blur in video that include the MENU button You can enjoy photo, music,
clock, follow these steps: fast motion such as sports and action movies. To activate Auto Motion Plus, follow on your remote, then and movie files stored on a
1. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on your remote, then select Setup ----.. these steps: select Application ----.. USB device by connecting
Time. 1. Turn on your TV, press the MENU button on your remote, then select Content View. it to the TV and using
2. Select Clock Mode, and then press the ENTER G button. Picture Options ----.. Auto Motion Plus. 2. Press the <IIlII or ~ the Media Play feature.
2. Select the Auto Motion Plus setting you want. button to select For Media Play operating
3. Choose Auto or Manual.
Internet@TV, then instructions, please see your
~ If noise occurs on the screen, please set the Auto Motion Plus to Off. If
• If you select Auto, the current time will be set automatically using the time press the ENTER G Owner's Manual.
Auto Motion Plus is Custom, you can set up the
from a digital channel. button. The USER TERMS and PRIVACY POLICY windows appears, then
Blur Reduction, Judder Reduction or Reset manually.
• If you select Manual, you can set the Month, Day, Year, Hour, Minute select Yes.
~ If Auto Motion Plus is Demo, you can compare the difference between
and am/pm directly by pressing up, down, left and right arrow button on 3. Follow the directions on your screen to set up Internet@TV. For detailed
on and off modes.
your remote. instructions, see your Owner's Manual.
4. Press the RETURN button on your remote when done. 3. Press the RETURN button on your remote when done.
~ For best Internet@TV results, your broadband company should provide
sustained download speeds of 3.5 mb/sec or more.
 English

1 Eco sensor
This power-saving feature automatically adjusts the screen brightness of the 1V according to the ambient light intensity
detected by the Ught Sensor.

2 Enabling or Disabling Eco Sensor

Go to Picture ---> Eco Solution ---> Eco Sensor and select On or Off.

3 Precaution
If you find the screen too dark while watching 1V in a dark area, this may be caused by the Eco Sensor. Change the
Eco Sensor setting following the instructions above. For details, see the Eco Sensor section in the User manual.

Franyais

1 Capteur Eco
Cette caracteristique d'economie d'energie regie automatiquement la luminosite du televiseur en fonction de I'intensite
de la lumiere ambiante detectee par Ie capteur de lumiere.

2 Activation ou desactivation du capteur Eco

Allez a Image ---> Solution Eco ---> Capteur Eco et selectionnez On ou Off.

3 Precaution
Si I'image semble trop sombre durant I'ecoute du televiseur dans une piece sombre, cela peut etre attribuable au
Capteur Eco. Modifiez Ie reglage du Capteur Eco selon les instructions ci-dessus. Pour de plus ampies details,
consultez la section Capteur Eco dans Ie Guide de I'utilisateur .

Espanol

1 Sensor Eco
Esta funcion de ahorro de energfa ajusta automaticamente el brillo de la pantalla del televisor de acuerdo con la
intensidad de la iluminacion ambiental detectada por el sensor de luz.

2 Habilitacion 0 inhabilitacion del sensor eco

Vaya a Imagen ---> Soluci6n Eco ---> Sensor Eco y seleccione Encendido 0 Apagado.

3 Precaucion
Si mientras ve la television en un entorno con poca luz Ie parece que la pantalla esta demasiado oscura, esto puede
deberse al Sensor Eco. Cambie la configuracion de Sensor Eco mediante las instrucciones siguientes. Para ver mas
informacion, consulte el apartado de Sensor Eco en su Manual de usuario.

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
BN68-02928A-OO
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please
register your product at
www.samsung.com/register
 lV Power -+-.-
button
"JlI
~. ,0- ---+-- Battery cover
Touch screen ---;---'--, @'-------+-- Charge port

MUTE button

/·Ij Channel button

v~: --+-+--1b ' ) SOURCE button

l,fII'
,., , Speaker
~
"'-...l..
~ ~
• ~';n
"_'_j) Phone Jack
(Sold separatel:)

IR receiver for learning "

external deVIces.

Power
MUTE
Volume
Channel
SOURCE

Accessories

.. /
• .-...........
~
'?
/ / .. --.. '>.
/)
.Y
,/
J
USB Cable Power Adapter Battery User Manual Quick Setup Guide
/Warranty Card
 Slide and open the battery cover in the direction of the arrow.

I Insert the battery wijh the Samsung logo facing up.

Slide and close the battery cover in the direction of the arrow.

Charge the battery fully before using the remote control.

Plug the small end of the USB cable into the charge port with the tnangle
facing up.
Plug the power adapter into the outlet. The triangle lights up red.
When the battery is fully charged, the triangle turns green. Unplug the
adapter from the wall outlet.

2
The default setup screen appears when your touch remote IS turned on for the first
time. To connect the touch remote to the N. you must complete the following steps.

Select the desired language. and then tap <OK>.

Select <OK> to connect the touch remote and N or select

<Skip> to connect later. If you selected <Skip>. refer to "Setting
up the Network" (p 4) when you want to connect the Nand
touch remote,
• The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter must be connected to the N
before you establish a connection,
• The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter and touch remote must be
parallel and no farther than 8 Inches (20cm) apart,
• If you are failed, reconnect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter,
and then try again.
• For InltlalN settings. refer to the N manual.

3
 Setting Up Your Remote
You can set up your Touch Remote to control your lV in three ways:

• As a standard, IR (I nfra Red) remote

As an IR remote, your LCD Touch Remote works the same way as a standard push button
remote, except you touch icons and symbols on the LCD screen to control your TV instead of
pushing buttons. Using your Touch Remote as an IR remote requires no more set up than a
standard remote and gives you access to most of the remote's functions and features.
• As an extended distance, Wi-Fi remote
As an extended distance, Wi-Fi remote, your Touch Remote offers all the functions and
features of the IR mode and, because it uses Wi-Fi radio waves instead of infra red waves
to control your lV, it lets you control your lV from a much greater distance and even from
around corners. It also gives you access to the Twin Display function which lets you watch the
program or content that is on your lV screen on the LCD screen of the Touch remote. The
long distance, Wi-Fi mode requires a few additional setup steps. It also requires you to attach
Samsung's Wireless LAN Adaptor (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, or WIS10ABGN) to one of
your lV's USB ports.
• As a networked, Wi-Fi remote
As a networked. Wi-Fi remote, your Touch Remote gives you all the functions and features of
the IR and the extended distance modes and also gives you access to the Multimedia function
which lets you listen to or view music, movie, and picture files from your PC on your TV screen.
You can also download upgrades to your Touch Remote's software directly from the Internet.
The networked, Wi-Fi mode requires the largest number of setup steps. In addition, to use
the networked, Wi-Fi mode, you need a working local area network and a wireless router.
You also need to attach Samsung's Wireless LAN Adaptor (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, or
WIS10ABGN) to one of your lV's USB ports. To use the Multimedia function, you need to install
Samsung's PC Share Manager on your PC. You can download PC Share Manager from http://
www.samsung.com.

4
In the services main screen, tapQ -+ <Remote Settings> -+ <Network>.
• A connection cannot be established using Network Setup unless the TV and touch remote
are connected in First Time User Setup.
• Configure the network settings for the TV before you connect the TV and touch remote. For
details, refer to the TV manual.
• The touch remote uses IR signals. Point the touch remote at the IR sensor on the TV when
you press a button.

Stand Side Panel

Touch Remote

Within 8 Inches
+ • A
(20 cm)

If you want to use the SAMSUNG Wireless

LAN Adapter(WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2
or WIS 1OABGN), you should use a gender
featuring for the connection.

111111111111111111111111
BN68-02922A-OO 5
How to connect using the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter

Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the TV

• To connect uSing Samsung Auto Configuration. turn off any
other devices nearby that support auto configuration first.
Keep within 8 inches (2Ocm) between Touch Remote and
Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.
On the <Network> Screen. tap <Auto Configuration>.
• It may take about one minute to establish a Wireless connection
between the TV and Touch Remote uSing the Samsung Wireless
LAN Adapter.
If the network is connected, tap m. The <Connect TV>
screen appears.
• If the connectton falls, choose one of the other connectton
methods. PBC(WPS), auto configuration, or manual
configuration,

On the <Connect TV> screen, select the TV you want to

connect.
• If the TV you want to connect cannot be found on the liSt, lap
.It to retry.
When done, tap a.

6
 Touch Remote

Wireless,
PC
~
Router

If you want to use the SAMSUNG Wireless

LAN Adapter (WIS09ABGN. WlS09ABGN2
or WIS10ABG I. you should use a gender
featunng for the connection. J

~oW to connect using the wireless router

On the <Network> screen. select the APs (Access POint)
connectec to the Tv.
• To connect the network. you can select one of the other
methods: PBC(WPS). PIN or SecUrity Key.
If the network is connectec, tap m. The <Connect TV>
screen appears.
• If the connection fails, choose one of the other connection
methods: PBC(WPS). auto configuration. or manual
configuration.
On the <Connect TV> screen. select the TV you want to
connect.
• If the TV you want to connect cannot be found on the list. tap
~t to retry
When done. tap D.

7
 o Press numbers to directly access
channels.
Press the dash (-) to access
Number .,. additional digital channels broadcast
keys v on the same channel.
For example, 22-1, 22-2, etc.

------==-
o Returns to the previous channel.
CONTENT: Displays the Content
View, which Includes Channel List,
Internet@TV, Media Play, AIiShare,
and 3D.
e MENU: Brings up the OSD (On
Screen Display).
INTERNET@TV: Unk to various
Internet services.
RETURN: Returns to the previous
menu.
TOOLS: QUickly select frequently
Menu keys
e used functions.
INFO: Displays information on the
TV screen.
EXIT: Exits the menu.
Use these bu1tons In Media Play
and Anynet+ modes.
o (_ :Controls recording for
Samsung recorders that have the
Anynet+ feature)
Buttons used In the Channel List,
o Internet@TV, Media Play menu, etc.

8
 Move left, right, up, down, return, and
Navigation
exit.

You can use the QWERTY keyboard to

type text on the TV screen.
Enables you to change the
text fields to lower case and
upper case.
Enables you to change the
Keyboard text fields to numbers and
icons.

- Inputs a blank space on the

text fields.
Changes the language for the
QWERTY keyboard.
IC Confirms your input.

9
Touch Remote
user manual

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www.samsung.com/register
 Use basic functions .. 03 Description
04 Inserting the battery
04 Charging the battery
First Time User Setup 05 First Time User Setup
Setting up the Network 06 Setting Up Your Remote
TV control menu 10 TV control menu
Services 13 HOT-KEY menu
13 Twin Display
Multimedia 14 Photo / Music / Movie (from your PC)
CH Info 15 View the Channel List
15 Touch Remote Channel Ust
16 Antenna Mode / Channel Ust Mode
16 Channel Edit (analog channels only)
Devices control 17 Add External device
19 Learning Remote
Settings menu 20 Add Macro
21 Channel macro
21 Remote Settings
Troubleshooting 24 Troubleshooting
Specification 25 Specification

* Product design and specifications may be changed without notice.

* Avoid displaying still images (such as jpeg picture files) or still image elements (such
as TV Program logos, panorama or 4:3 format images, stock or news bars at the
screen bottom etc.) on the screen. The continuous display of a still picture can
cause uneven wear of the screen phosphors, which can affect image quality. To
reduce the risk of this occurring, please follow these recommendations:
- Avoid displaying the same TV channel for long periods.
::"f.:
::.; - Always try to display any image on a full screen. Use the TV set picture format menu for
best possible match.
- Reduce brightness and contrast values to the minimum required to achieve the desired
picture quality. Exceeding these values may speed up the burn-in process.
• Frequently use all the TV features designed to reduce image retention and screen burn-
2 in. Refer to the proper user manual section for details.
 :- ... <.:- ....:.

Use ba~iQ
-------------

TVPower-~~
button
s.ll·
s'- Battery cover
-~--
Touch screen -~"":-~;;4 ~:~
...:....----...;-- Charge port

·~_~:iii~!il:i:!!I:liil!ii:il:i:i!iii!t,~I!!!~i:!ll:1::~:!iITurn the TV on and off.

:~i~i;ii!i:rlil~[[l[,11!~ililii;1ii;iliil;-M-u-te-o-r -un-m-ut-e-.- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
'\tii:II~1i!iil!~i;J~I!:I!ill~II:iiji;l:itPress to control the volume.
,:.:::i~ii;~f~!ii},:ijrl]!Ji111~~~ij~ilii\t.~1: Press to change channels.
.::::::.:::::·:::::::]:~1~;1!f~f~;i~r[~®ii!fl:I:~f.;iilDisplay the source list (TV, PC, etc.) on the screen.
Accessories

USB Cable Power Adapter Battery

o
User Manual Quick Setup Guide 3
/ Warranty Card
 Inserting the battery

Charging the battery

Charge the battery fully before using the remote control.

Charge Port
.; - -.- ..

.......
"'"

'" ;
:::;-'

4
First Time User Setup
The default setup screen appears when your touch remote is turned on for the first
time. To connect the touch remote to the lV, you must complete the following steps.

Select the desired language, and then tap <OK>.

Select <OK> to connect the touch remote. If you want

to connect to it later or if you have changed the touch
remote to a new one, select <Skip>. If you selected
<Skip>, refer to "Setting up the Network" (p. 7) when you
want to connect the lV and touch remote.
• The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter must be connected
to the TV before you establish a connection.
• The Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter and touch remote
must be parallel and no farther than 8 inches (2Ocm)
apart.
• If you are failed, reconnect the Samsung Wireless LAN
Adapter, and then try again.
• For initial TV settings, refer to the TV manual.

5
 '.::.-: .
.: '.

Setting Up Your Remote

You can set up your Touch Remote to control your lV in three ways:

• As a standard, IR (Infra Red) remote

As an IR remote, your LCD Touch Remote works the same way as a standard push
button remote, except you touch icons and symbols on the LCD screen to control
your lV instead of pushing buttons. Using your Touch Remote as an IR remote
requires no more set up than a standard remote and gives you access to most of
the remote's functions and features.
• As an extended distance, Wi-Fi remote
As an extended distance, Wi-Fi remote, your Touch Remote offers all the functions
and features of the IR mode and, because it uses Wi-Fi radio waves instead of
infra red waves to control your lV, it lets you control your lV from a much greater
distance and even from around corners. It also gives you access to the Twin Display
function which lets you watch the program or content that is on your lV screen
on the LCD screen of the Touch remote. The long distance, Wi-Fi mode requires a
few additional setup steps. It also requires you to attach Samsung's Wireless LAN
Adaptor (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, or WIS1 OABGN) to one of your lV's USB
ports.
• As a networked, Wi-Fi remote
As a networked, Wi-Fi remote, your Touch Remote gives you all the functions and
features of the IR and the extended distance modes and also gives you access to
the Multimedia function which lets you listen to or view music, movie, and picture
files from your PC on your lV screen. You can also download upgrades to your
Touch Remote's software directly from the Internet.
The networked, Wi-Fi mode requires the largest number of setup steps. In addition,
to use the networked, Wi-Fi mode, you need a working local area network and
a wireless router. You also need to attach Samsung's Wireless LAN Adaptor
(WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2, or WIS10ABGN) to one of your lV's USB ports. To
use the Multimedia function, you need to install Samsung's PC Share Manager on
,
..... .. your PC. You can download PC Share Manager from http://www.samsung.com.

6
In the services main screen, tap.Q ': ~ <Remote Settings> ~ <Netw
ork>.
• A connection cannot be establish~ using Network Setup unless the
TV and
touch remote are connected in First Time User Setup.
• Configure the network settings for the TV before you connect the TV
and touch
remote. For details, refer to the TV manual.
• The touch remote uses IR signals. Point the touch remote at the IR senso
r on the
TV when you press a button.

Stand Side Panel

Touch Remote

D
..
- •
~

¥
Within 8 Inches
(20 cm) ;;/
1---- ----.. 11 \s \s'\

If you want to use the SAMSUNG Wireless

LAN Adapter(WIS09A8GN, WIS09ABGN2
or WIS1 OABGN). you should use a gender
featuring for the connection.

.......-..::
........
\ •••J;
..•...•.
;::~.;:
......-;-..
.... /

7
 How to connect using the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter
Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter to the lV.
• To connect using Samsung Auto Configuration, turn off
any other devices nearby that support auto configuration
first.
Keep within 8 inches (20cm) between Touch Remote and
Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.
On the <Network> Screen, tap <Auto Configuration>.
• It may take about one minute to establish a wireless
connection between the TV and Touch Remote using the
Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter.
If the network is connected, tap . The <Connect TV>
screen appears.
• If the connection fails, choose one of the other connection
methods: PBC(WPS), auto configuration, or manual
configuration.

On the <Connect TV> screen, select the lV you want to

connect.
• If the TV you want to connect cannot be found on the list.
tap -It to retry.

When done, tap

8
 Touch Remote

Wireless
PC
Router

If you want to use the SAMSUNG Wireless

LA.N Adapter (WIS09ABGN, WIS09ABGN2
or WIS10ABGN), you should use a gender
featuring for the connection.

How to connect using the wireless router

On the <Network> screen, select the APs (Access Point)
connected to the N.
• To connect the network, you can select one of the other
methods: PBC(WPS), PIN or Security Key.
If the network is connected, tap . The <Connect TV>
screen appears.
• If the connection fails, choose one of the other connection
methods: PBC(WPS), auto configuration, or manual
configuration.
On the <Connect TV> screen, select the N you want to
connect.
• If the TV you want to connect cannot be found on the list,
tap -It to retry.
When done, tap
c

9
 • Press numbers to directly access
. channels.
Press the dash (-) to access
Number additional digital channels broadcast
keys on the same channel.

- For example, 22-1, 22-2, etc.

-----'----------
Returns to the previous channel.
- - - - - - CONTENT: Displays the Content
View, which includes Channel List,
Internet@TV, Media Play, AIIShare,
and 3D.
MENU: Brings up the OSD (On
Screen Display).
INTERNET@TV: Unk to various
internet services.
RETURN: Returns to the previous
~ ;.t .;~
menu.
TOOLS: Quickly select frequently
Menu keys used functions.
INFO: Displays information on the
TV screen.
EXIT: Exits the menu.
~ -------------
Use these buttons in Media Play
and Anynet+ modes.
( : Controls recording for
Samsung recorders that have the
Anynet+ feature)
Buttons used in the Channel List,
Internet@TV, Media Play menu,
etc.

10
Navigation
Move left, right, up, down, return, and
exit.

You can use the QWER1Y keyboard to

type text on the 1V screen.
Enables you to change the
text fields to lower case and
upper case.
Enables you to change the
Keyboard text fields to numbers and
icons.
Inputs a blank space on the
text fields.
:.=' Changes the language for the
QWER1Y keyboard.
Confirms your input.

11
 Services·
With Services, you can go directly to an item which was originally set on the main
screen.

Play the program of the main

Twin display 1V on the remote screen
simultaneously.
-----
Usten to or view the music,
Multimedia movies, and pictures from your
PC.
Provide the on-air channel list.
CH info
Add, edit, and search channels.
-----
Devices Add the external device you want
control to control.
-----
Set the 1V and the remote control
Settings
menus.

Press to view net contents and search information

such as time and news through your 1V without
opening an internet browser on your PC.
Press to access the media of the connected
device. (Blu-ray player, DVD player, etc.)
-_:...--
Press to switch the video effect from 20 to 3D,
so you can enjoy 3D multimedia using a pair of
3D Active glasses.
---- Press to access content provided by Yahoo!
widget.
--~-
Press to create a channel list on the 1V screen
• that lets you access favorite channels quickly.
--~-
Move to the favorite channel you set previously.

Press to set the screen ratio to 16:9, Zoom 1,

Zoom2, or 4:3.

Press to turn the subtitle setting on and off.

Press to set the multi-track sound to SAP or

stereo.

12
 HOT-KEY menu
On the Services main screen, Touch to manage
the HOT-KEYS.
To modify or delete a hot key, drag and drop the hot key
to or
Tap <OK>.

Twin Display
With Twin Display, you can watch the channel displayed on the main 1V simultaneously
on the LCD screen of the remote.
The Touch Remote does not support 3D pictures.

Channel ---1~~~~ Favorite

information ~ Channel

Volume button - - : i Channel button

r-••i1i.-~~~~- Volume Bar

ON/OFF the main - - - - - - - - EXIT button

1V button <Touch Remote Screen>

13
 Mul.timedia
Photo,/Muslc I M9~ie (from yoar PQ)..
Before you can use the Multimedia function, you must link your TV and the Touch
remote to your home network and install Samsung PC Share manager on your PC.

o On the Services main screen, touch

....~, Movie
Select <Photo , Music .J
contents screen.
o You can view or play the contents on TV.
o Tap ff~ to control the contents.

\ f

: : .., / 4 N O T E - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
""'- ..... ~;(/
~¢<
.~ • You must install Samsung PC Share Manger (ver 4.0 or higher) on your PC and
allow access to your TV and the Touch Remote to play contents from your PC
on your TV using the remote.
• The PC. TV and Touch Remote should be connected to the same sub-
network
• You can download PC Share Manager from www.Samsung.com
"

~;)

14
CH Info
You can configure various settings for your TV channels with features such as Program
information, Favorite channels and Channel editing.

View the Channel List

On the Services main screen, touch
• The channel list appears. If there are no stored
channels, a pop-up message appears.
Tap . The list of channels added to the TV will
appear.
Tap a channel. The current channel on the TV switches
to the selected channel.

Touch Remote Channel Ust

Tap fili" The list of channels added to the Touch
Remote appears.
To register a channel as a hot key in Services, touch
and hold the channel in the channel list submenu
for one second. After the <Add to Services> menu
appears at the bottom of the screen, drag and drop the
channel to <Add to Services>.
,. If a channel is added to the list of channels of the Touch
Remote, a hot key for the channel is created in the
<Services> main screen.
To delete a channel from the list of channels in the
Touch Remote, drag and drop the channel to
• Channels can also be modified or deleted in the
<Services> main screen.

15
 Antenna Mode / Channel Ust Mode
To change the antenna mode, tap <Air/Cable> on the
Channel list screen.
To change the channel list mode, tap <.AIVAdded/
Favorite> on the Channel list screen.

Channel Edit (analog channels only)

Tap ;; on the Channel list screen.
• The channel list is appears. If there are no stored
channels, a pop-up message appears.
Tap <Option> on the Detail Info screen.
Tap <Edit Name> on the Option menu.
Enter the desired channel name using the keyboard.
Tap . Even if you are viewing an external source
on the lV, you can view lV channels on The Touch
Remote screen by tapping <Preview>.

, N O T E - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -_ _

• When you change the attitude of the remote from vertical to horizontal or
vise versa, the remote screen automatically changes from portrait view to
landscape view or back.

16
Devices control
This function lets you control conne cted external devices such
as Blu-ray players,
DVD players, etc. with your LCD remote. After you connect the
device to the TV, the
LCD remote can learn the navigation, number, and other keys neede
d to operate and
control the device. The LCD remote controls the devices with its
standard, IR (infra red)
control functionality.
• Make sure the external device is properly connected to the TV before
adding it to the
remote control.

Add External device

On the Services main screen, touch

Tap <Dev ice type> on the screen.

'. To change the device name, tap <Edit >.

Select the input source on the list.

Select <Rem ote Settin gs> on the screen to search for

the desired code set.

Select the brand on the list and choose the code set
you want.

.........
0'

17
 Change the code set by tapping or and then
select <Send IR>.
If the external device turns on or off, select <Apply> to
register the external device.
If you can't find codeset on the list. tap <Learn> to
start the remote's external device registration process.
• Tap <Help> for learning guide or tap <OK> to start
learning.
You must now assign the control buttons on the
device's remote to corresponding buttons on the LCD
remote. To begin, tap a button on the LCD remote's
screen to which you want to assign a button from the
device's remote.
• The selected button blinks.
Press the corresponding button on the device's remote.
• When the button LCD remote's stops blinking, the
assignment is complete. Assign the other buttons in the
same way.
• To register the Channel, Volume and Mute buttons on
an external device, tap <VOUCH> at the top of the
touch remote.
Select <OK> to complete the registration .

..... ;
C
~

()
.•

18
Learning Remote

The distance between Samsung remote and the remote to be learnt is at a ideal
distance of 2cm.
The learning LED is directly facing the remote to be learnt (within 45-60 degree
depending on the LED chosen).
The two remotes are placed on a flat non glossy surface.
The remote to be learnt does not feature a long signal.

\ I
:~eTE-------------------­
~.~ • Put the LCD remote and the device remote about 2cm apart and configured
as shown above. If you do not, the remote Jeamlng process may not operate
normally.
• Some external device remote controls are not compatible with the LCD
remote. 8earch the codeset to find the compatible remotes.
• During remote controlleamlng, ensure there is no object between the FR
sensors on the Touch Remote and the remote control for the external device.

19
 Settings menu
Add Macro
You can register a function of an added external device as a hot key in <Services>.
When you tap that hot key, the device performs the function. For example, turns on.

On the Services main screen, tap 0 -+ <Add Macro>.

Select a device, then a function, and then tap <Next>.

Select <Add> to add the function and <Edit> to rename it. (for example. DVD
On).
Tap <Test>. If the key works properly, select <Done>.
ex) Power Macro (TV Power ON - 1sec - STS Power ON)

20
 Channel macro
You can register a function of an added external device as a hot key in <Services>.
When you tap that hot key, the device performs the function. For example, turns on.

On the Services main screen, tap" . -+ <Channel macro>.

Modify and rename the target channel and tap

Remote Settings
You can control a range of settings on the remote.
On the Services main screen, tap -+ <Remote Settings>.

21
 General Settings
Set the Basic settings.
• <Button Volume>: Control the volume of the remote.
• <Brightness>: Control the brightness of the screen.
• <Touch Alert Tone>: Set the screen touch mode to sound or vibration.
• <Backlight Duration>: Set the interval time of the auto LCD off.

Language
Select the menu language from three choices.
• <Language>: Set the desired language type.

Select Signal
Select the type of signal emitted by the remote control.
• <WIFI(AUTO»: "WIFI" is the default option when the lV is linked to the Touch Remote.
(((,~ : The remote displays this icon If it transmits the signal by win.)
,.11 - '
• <IR>: Infra red.
( ~ : The remote displays this icon If it transmits the signal by IR.)
,II I - .
. -- .

Network
For configuring <Network> settings, see page 6.
• Network conditions and environmental factors Oncluding but not limited to) volume of
network traffic, building materials. and construction may lower actual data throughput
rate.
• Environmental conditions will affect wireless signal coverage.

22
Connect TV
For configuring <Connect TV> settings. see page 8.

81W Upgrade
Upgrade the software of the remote control to the latest version. The charger must be
connected before you perform an upgrade.

Initialization
Reset the remote control to initial settings. The user settings will be deleted and
manufacturer's default settings restored.

Self Diagnosis
Test the current state of network and the video and sound.

System Information
Check the network and software version information.

23
 If the remote control signal type is set to WiFi (auto)

:::::./:'::':::;:::::';::::/:::;.:::'::;::..:.::::.!.j:::::::./ :::;-::"::'::\:::::X The automatic screen turn off mode operates

·1~
III'';"J'"1"I:"1':"::'1" ···I'..··!:I··I:·:I'....;....·1·....1..· ..·1· '1'·[·11·11....:··"1·:-::1·..
'''11' '1' !~:~~~~~~~:~!~~~i~i~:~~i~;:~~
Configuration. General Settings and Backlight
.':'.':::::..::,:.:...:!::.:.::..::::.::':::':.::::.'::.':: :......:.. ):i::.' ?'" Duration. The time can be extended to a maximum
. '. .. of 3 minutes. (You can select 1 minute, 2 minutes or
';:.;::;::::':':::'\:::'.'•.0::::0::::::.:;::::):::::::::::':: ·.::·::::,::·5J:::..i···::··::·;:·).!·./.:·:.: 3 minutes.)
-------------------

..... :

::: ~'.:
:::.:;

24
 50°F to 104°F (10°C to 40°C)
::0:.0:0:::<:::<::::0:: :0:0::':::':
i=( :: '::::\:: 10% to 80%, non-condensing
-4°F to 113°F (-20°C to 45°C)
:"0:>"::::::::):::::'::::>::::'<::::<:::'::::::::::::,:,>,.:.:: \": 5% to 95%, non-condensing

* Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice.

* For information about the power supply, and more information about power
consumption, refer to the label attached to the product.

Open Source License Notice

• In the case of using open source software, Open Source Licenses are available on the
product setup menu. :;:::;!
~:;::;.

25
FCC Compliance Statement
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.

Interference
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a class B dig~a1 device, pursuant to Part
15 of the FCC Rules. These lim~s are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, nnot installed
and used in accordance with the instructions. may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However,
there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio to television reception, which can be determined by tuming the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circu~ different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consu~ the dealer or an experienced radiolTV technician for help.

Wireless Radio
For product available in the USNCanada market, only channel 1-11 can be operated. 8election of other channels
is not possible. This device is going to be operated in 5.15-5.25GHz frequency range, tt is restricted in indoor
environment only.
Important: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies wtth FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be instaHed and operated with minimum distance 8 inches (2Ocm)
between the radiator & your body.

Industry Canada Statement

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-Q03. Get appareil numerique de Ia classe Best
a
confoone Ia norma NMB-003 du Canada. Operation is subject to the following two condttions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interterence received. including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device and its antenna(s) must not be located or operation in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmttter.

Wireless Radio
For product available in the USNCanada market, only channel 1-11 can be operated. Selection of other channels
is not possible. The device could automatically discontinue transmission in case of absence of information to
transmtt, or operational failure. Note that this is not intended to prohiM transmission of control or signaling
information or the use of repetitive codes where required by the technology.
Important: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate the equipment.
IC Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with IC RSS-102 radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated wtth minimum distance 8 inches
(2Ocm) between the radiator & your body.
Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE
If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products, please contac
the SAMSUNG customer care center.

Comment contacter Samsung dans Ie monde

Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung,
veuillez contacter Ie Service Consommateurs Samsung.

Comuniquese con SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE

Si desea formular alguna pregunta 0 comentario en relaci6n con los productos de
Samsung, comunfquese con el centro de atenci6n al cliente de SAMSUNG.

"':"'"':':':':':'"':':':".:.:.>.,:.:.:.:.'.:.:-:.:-;.:.:.:.:.:.:-:':.: ' '...... . ' ' ' ' ' .

CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG www. Samsung Electronics Canada

(726-7864) samsung. Inc., Customer Service 55
com Standish Court Mississauga,
Ontario L5R 482 Canada

MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG www. C.P 11570 AV. Presidente

(726-7864) samsung. Masaryk No.111, Int. 701 Col.
com Chapultepec Morales, Delegad
Miguel Hidalgo Mexico D.F

U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG www. Samsung Electronics America

(726-7864) samsung. Inc. 105 Challenger Road
com Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-05

A Warning that batteries (battery pack or batteries installed) shall not be exposed tc
excessive heat such as sunshine, fire or the like.

CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type.

"excessive sound pressure from earphones and headphones can cause hearing los

111111111111111111111111111111
BN68-02921 A-OO
Ultra-Slim Wall Moun
Quick Setup Guide
CY-WMM9000C

imagine the possibilities

Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product.
To receive more complete service, please register
your product at
www:samsung,com/register
Model Serial No. _
English Please note that Samsung ~i$ notresponsible, will not be liable for any damage or loss
resulting from the use of counterfeit products and will not provide warranty service or any
technical support ofcounterfeit products.
Patents pending in Kore'a, U.S and other countries

Fran~ais Veuillez prendre note que Samsung n'est et ne pourra etre tenue responsable des dom-
(Canada French) mages ou des pertes resultant de I'utilisation de produits de contrefagon, et ne fournit
aucune garantie ou aide techniqu~ pour les produits de contrefagon.
Brevets en attente en Coree, aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays.

Fran~ais Veuillez noter que Samsung n'est pas et ne peut pas etre tenue responsable des dom-
mages ou pertes resultant de I'utilisation de produits de contrefagon, et ne fournit aucune
garantie ou aide technique pour les produits de contrefagon.
Brevets en attente en Coree, aux Etats-Unis et dans d'autres pays,

Espanol Tenga en cuenta que Samsung no se hace responsable por cualquier dana 0 perdida de-
rivados del usa de productos falsificados ni proporciona servicios de garantia y asistencia
tecnica para dichos productos.
Patentes pendientes en Corea, Estados Unidos y otros paises.

PycCKMiit KOMnaHl-1s;1 Samsung He OTB8'-laeT l-1 He 6YAeT HeCTl-1 oTBeTcTBeHHOCTl-1 3a mo6ble

nOBpe~eHl-151 l-1nl-1 YlJ.4ep6, B03Hl-1KWl-1e acne,QCTBl-1e IilcnOnb30BaHH51 HeOplilrl-1HanbHblx
aKceccyapoB, l-1 He 6y,QeT 06eCn8'-lHBaTb BTaKl-1X cnyYas;lx rapaHTl-1~Hoe 06cny>Kl-1SaHHe
Iilnl-1 TeXHlilyeCKYIO nO,D,Aep>Kt<y,
3aSJBKl-1 Ha naTeHTbl CAenaHbl SKopee,CWA l-1 APyrl-1X CTpaHax.

YKpa'iHCbKa 3ayBa>KTe, lJ.40 KOMnaHis:l Samsung He Hece Bi,QnoBi,QanbHoCTi 3a 6YAb-s:lKi nOWKO,Q>KeHHs:l

Yl-1 BTpaTl-1, s:lKi BIi1HIi1KnIi1 Bpe3ynbTaTi BIi1KOpIi1CTaHHs:l ni,Qpo6HIi1X npoAyKTiB, i He
3a6e3neYYBaTIi1Me rapaHTiVlHoro o6cnyroByBaHHs:l YIi1 6YAb-s:lKO'i TexHi4Ho'j ni,QTpli1MKIil
niAPo6HIilX npo,QyKTiB.
04iKye:Tbcs:l BIi1,Qaya naTeHTiB y Kope'i, CWA Ta iHWIilX Kpa'iHax.

~f.t,:IfI)t. ~ff~'~£~~N~mffir~m~~F~OO~~~ttW~*~~~'ili~~~~~F
~~fffoJi*~ijl*.~~&*1i:M' ~.
lEl£~lE ' ~lE;fDJtft!!lE*~jfulR$iFf~frJ

Ka3a~ Samsung KOMnaHIi1s:lCbl CblpnaH ~on,QaHblflbIHfaH aKceccyapnapAbl11 HaTIi1>KeciHeH naVl,Qa

60nfaH ew 6yniHyre HeMece 3a~blMfa >Kayanrbl eMec >KaHe >KayanKepwiniK 6epMeVl,Qi,
cOHblMeH ~aTap rapaHTIi1s:l 60VlblHwa CepBIi1C HeMece TeXHIi1Kanbl~ KeMeK KepceTinMeVl,Qi.
naTeHT c¥paHblMbl Kopes:lAa, AI\W >KaHe 6acKa ,Qa MeMneKenep,Qe >KaCanbIHfaH.
 Assembly to TV Assembly to Wall

: 2ea

A 1ea (spare)
,,~,ft<'/' : 2ea
::;, -",_::.,_'1-"~
(M5X65mm-Wood)

: 2ea
: 2ea : 4ea
c (M4X15mm)
D (M3X3.5mm)
E , : Sea B 1ea (spare)
: 2ea
(M5X60mm-Machine)

Assembly to TV

... -------- ........

//'//-' --------,
[A] . ,,
\.
\.

,,
I \.
~ \

,,,
\
\
\

,,
\
I
I
I I

[AI·····················....
 \I -J

\--"--"::.-.-,.- --~'::'---.-------------------
.. -,
••
~ "-'"
'"

[8] 1OEA

~E 8EA

~
i~

y y
 ,- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --,
I I
I I

c : ~ :
\ / .'.~~:::::::::::==;, __ J1~_~~_~._:_~~_~= _ j
,- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --,
I I
I I

,--------------- ---,
I
I
I
I
I
I

1~
I I I I
I I : I
I I , I
....... I
I I
I I
.::::::::::::=------": ~
~ .~
1·:
I I
I I I I
I I I I
I I I I
'- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------
:
I
:
I
~~
~
- - - --~

,---------------------------,

Assembly to Wall

UL Label is Located in this area

Dry-Wall, SheetRock, Gypsum-Board

Wall B
t!:> Warning [Engltsh] ~Avertissement [F~l t!:>Avertlssement [Fran~}
'Pleaseuseaqll3lifiedinstaliefloiostall1tleWaIMoontBra<:ket • Veui~ez demander aux instableurs d'mtaller Ie support mural • Demandezaux installaleursde metlre eo place la fOOllion pour montage mural.
• Check the strenglh of the wall before the installation. If ltle strength is insufficienl, make sure to reinforce ltle wail and lhen • Verif.ezlasoIidliedumuravant l'instalation S'iln'eslpasassezsolide. ifalJtlerenforceravantdeprocMeral'inslal'alion • Vemiez Ia resis1ance du mur avant l'instalation. S'il n'est pas sufflSammenl resistant, reoforcez~e avant d'y iIlstall&l' Ie
inslall lhe product onto lhe wall duproOO". produil
• Under no circumstances moo your finger into ltle groove created by separa~ng the sland at ltle bottom of the TV while • Neplacezjamais undCilg1 dans la rainurecreee par Ie mtraildu support au bas du t(!I!Mseurpendalltl'insWationdece • Lorsquevousfulezvotreteleviseuraumur,n'ioserezeoaucuncasvosdoig!sdanslarainurequi secree en separant Ie
installing the TV onto Ihe waW There is a danger of eledric shock derniersurlemur, Unchoc1'!let1riquepo:l'Jlaitseproduire piedal'amereduteleviseur.VousrisquezdevousI!leclrOCU1er,
• Make sure 10 rover the groove with the rover supplied with lhe TV before co"llleting the TV inslallalioo on lhewaII. • Assure2-vous de COUVrir la rainure au moyen du couvercle foomi avec le televiseur avallt de 1ermiroer rinstallation au mur. ·AsSlJJez-vousderecowrirlafainUleaveclecouverclefoumavanldetermillerlafixationduteleviseuraufT'lJr
• Samsung Electronics s/lajl not be r.eld liable for any darnage 10 the prodUCl doe to the prodUCl being installed inapproprlately ·SamsoogEleclJonicsdeclinelouteJeSllOnsabiWl1'!pourtoutdorrwnageauproduilresultanld'uneinstaUatiooinappropriee • Samsung Electronics ne pourra etre lenue responsable des dommages resultanl d'une installation in~propriee du produit
• After the instaRation,do noI hang onto the produet and 2'l0id severe impact 10 the product decedernier. ·Apresl'installalion.nevoussuspendezpasauprodiJltetnef'exposezpasaunimpadbruta!.
• When reinstalliog the prodUClin aootherlocation. use the same screws as those supplied with the producl. (You can buy ·Uneloisrnslallalionlerminee,nevoussuspeodezpasauproduiletevilezdeleSOlXllettreadeschocsimportanls. • Lorsque vous reilstallez Ie produit <\ un autre endroil, uti~sez lies vis ideofiques a celles /ournies avec Ie produ~ (Yous
the screws from yourprodoo provider.) ·PourreinstallerleproduilaunautreeJllllacemenl.utilisezlesvisd'oliginefoumies,(youspovvezacheteriesvisaupres potlWzen acheter chez votre revendeur)
de votre delal~ant,)
t!:> Important Safety Instructions (ULOnly) l!',. Consignesdesecuriteimportantes
I Samsung Electronics LED TV or PDP TV (58lnch) weighing max. 50 kg. I t!:> Remarques importantes sur la securite
'Llsezanenbvemenlcescons;gnes ·Conserve2cesconsignes.
• Lirecesconsignes ·Conservercesinstructions. • Teoez complede tous lesaverussemeols. • Sui~ez loutes les consigroes
• Readlheseinstructioos • Keep1tleseinstructioos.
·Teniroomptedetouslesavertissements • Respecterlouteslescoosignes. • N'utiisez jamais eel appareil a[ proximit • Nettoyez·1e uniquement avec un chiTron sec
• Heed all warnings • Follow an instructions
'Nepasutiliserceteli!!viseurpresdel'eau • Nettoyerleteleviseur2'lec un chiffon sec uniquement • N'obstruezaucunorificedevenlilation.instaiiezl'apparellconformementauxins1ruClionsdufabricanl
·Donolusethis~paratusnearwater. • Clean only with dry cloth.
• Suivre les inSlructioos pour installer Ie televiseuret ne pasobslruer les orificeS d'aeralion. 'NepasinstallerceteleviseurpnO!sd'unesourcedechaleurtelqu'unradiateur,unebouched'airchaud.une
'Donolblockanyventilationopenings, Inst311 in acrordance wilh the manufacturer'sinstructioos
'Nepasirlstallercetelel'iseurpresd'uroesourcedechaieurtelqu'unradiateur,unebouched'airdlaud,uneOJisiniereou cuisiniere ou tout autreappareif emetlant de la chaleur (y compris un amplificaleur)
·Oonolinstalroearanyllealsourcessuchasradiators.heatregislers, stoves, oro!her awaralus (including aJlllifl&fS) lhat tout autre appare~ emettant de la chaleur (y cornpris un ampif~teur) • Utibsezuniquemenllesaccessoiresreconvnandespar!efabricant
produce heat
• Uliliser uniquemenl des accessoires awrouves par fe iabricanl. • Confieztoolereparaliona un lechniclenqualif.e,Unereparationeslneeessairelorsque rappareila ele ef1dommage de que!Que
• Only use attadlrnentslacressories specified by the manufacturer.
• Confierlesreparationstiuntechnic:ienqualif.e.Leteleviseurdoitetrereparesilecordond'alimentationoulafdleSOOl maniere que ce soil. par e~emple slle cordon 00 la prise d'alimentalion est eodommage. si un Iiquide aete ren~erse ou si des
• Reier all servidng 10 qll3lified service persoonel. Servicilg is r&quired wtleo ltle apparatus has been damaged in any
eodonvnages.duliquideaeterenversesurcedernier,desobjetssontlombesarint8rieur,s'ilaeleexposealapkJieoua objelssonl1(ll11b1!sdansl'appareil,ous'iaeleexposealapluieooalllurnidile.s'ilnefClllClionnepasnormalemeritouestlombe.
way. such as power·supply con:l or plug isdamaged,liquid has been spilled or objects havefalleo inlo lhe apparatus,lhe une humidite excessive. s'il roe fonctionne pas correctementou s'~est tombe
apparatus has been exposed to rain or molslure,dl;lE!s noloperate normally. or has been dropped

~~.:il [f!~0l) &. Peringatan [Bahasa Indonesia] t!:> Achtung [Deutsch)

• ~~Ol. '.!lOll ~~I AIOIle ~@ 1li!jl ~;l:fOe?l1 2lstl~l,l,iIR

• Gunakan teknisi pemasang yang memenuhi syarat untuk memasang Braket Pemasan93n Oirlding • W&flden Sie sich fur die Montage der Wandhallerung an einen qualiflzierten loslallationsbetrieb.
• Periksa kekuatan dindirlg sebelum memasang Jil\a kekualannya liclak memadai, pasbkan untuk memperkuat dinding baru 'PriifenSiedieFestigke"derMauervOfderfnstalialion, Wennsienichtstarlcgenug/(lrdielnslalla1ionisl
• 'i!l21 ~£. ~'2J~ *011 Y£71 ~tlJ.:1 ~~ ~g ~SAI ~~~ !i'.YQ~-i- ~ !fl0i1

• TV
~;;IWiIR.

-?:!li~lot'<;;-AtiR
e.
~~21 ~~Ol 'li~'.!l~01 ~;;I ~otl
~Jt!j£ gal AOII ~l:/I ~;q IlIAilR
};il~21 ~~£7f ~2.l@ ~ TV
TV J.:tl~ ~1821

};il~Oil '11e 1'l£21 p£me 't!sAI rafi!. '.!l~01 ~jl '!t~ff

keroodianmemasangprodukdidindiflg
• Oalam keadaan apa plln jangan masukkan jali Anda ke celah yang terbenluk saal memisahkan dudukan di bagian bawah
TVketikamemasangTVdidinding.Dapalmenyebabkansengatanlislrik
• Pastikan untuk menutup celah lersebut deogan penutup yang disertakan dengan TV sebelum menyelesaikan pemasangan
TV didinding
mGssen Sie sie V&fS~rkeo. Befestigen Sie das Geriil erst dan3Ch daran.
• Fassen Sie beim AIlbringen des Femsehgerals an der Wand auf keinen Fan ill die Aussparung (Nut), die zum VOrschein
kornml, wenn Sie den FuB unten am Fernsehgerat abnehmen. Es besteht die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlages
• Athlen Sill darauf, dass Sie die Auss;>arung (NlJI) mil der im Lieferumfang des Femsellgerats enlha~enen AbOeckung
(NlJIblende) abdeckeo, bevor Sie die Arbenen zumAnblingen des Fernsehgerilts an der Wand beeoden
• SaJTlS\lflQElecI1onicstidakbertanggungjawabataskerusakanapapunpadaprodukyang disebabkanolehpemasangan • Samsung hallet nicht filr SChiideo am Geral, wenn es nicht korrekt installiert wurcle
• ~¥~ ~;;I~~~ '2.!~ ;ttl§£l me §0I1 C/ItHAte {l~OIIAl !!l1:lJ.:IJ.:1 '('Jewel
yangliclakbenar ·HangenSiesichnaclldemlnslallierennichlarldasGeral,undvermeidenSieschwereSchlagedarauf.
• i1;;1 ... OH~2.I7iLl ~~ a.~& '<;;-;l;lotAiIR
• J.:tll!~ ol.g.~fot 1mtt ~.5i!-OlIE ~@ WA.t~ ~'hI~ LIA!-e AI§~I,l,iIR • $etelahpemasangan,janganberganlungpa<laprodukdanhindaribenlurankeraspadaproduk. 'WeonSiedasGera1aneinemanderenSlandonneuinstallieren,verwendenSiediesell)enSchraubenwiedie
(-'fl-?d@21:};ilg-'fl-?dji) • Apabila memasang kembali produk di lokasi lain, gunakan sekrup yang sarna dengan yang disertakan bersama produk mitgelieferteo.(SiekOnnendieSchraubenbeilhremHiindlererwerben,)
(SekruptersebuldapatdlbelidipenyafurprodukAllda,)
~WichtigeSicherheitshlnwelse
~.2jS.R '2.!"~ AI~
~ Petunjuk Penting untuk Keselamatan 'LesenSiedieseAnweisungen • 6ewahren Sie diese Anweisungen auf.
• 01 AI~-i- ~ ~Ol ?,l,1IR. • 01 ;l;1~* ~ !i'.~8H £f.AiIR • Bacalahpetunjukini 'Si/r4lanpelunjukini ·8eachtenSiealleWarnhinweise. '6efolgenSieaIIeAllweisungen
·~i!.0l1 tt{l~£ltIAiIR • £E xl~~ ll./sAjIR. • Patuhi serroa peringalan 'I~uli semua petu~uk. • Stellen Sie dieses Geriit nichl in der Nahe von Wasser auf • Reinigen Sie es nur m~ eiroem trockenen Tuch
• ~7171 'liE ~0I1A1E 01 {j";;le AI%~tJ.:IIlIAil.9. • of~ t'££~ ~.£A1IR. • JangangunakanperafataniJ'ildidekatair. • Bersihkanhaoyadengankainkering • Blockieren Sie nichldie Beliiflungstilfnungen. Halten $ie sich bei der Montage an die AnweisungeodesHerslellers.
• A71~ 'J.I;l;1 ~i!. J.:jt~~.til21 ;l;1~otlll./2.1 -:l;!;;Ii5fAiIR. • Jangaohalangisemuacelahventilasi,Pasangsesuaidenganpe1unjukpabrikan • Slellen Sie das Geriit nicht ill der Natle von WiirmequeNen wie z. B. Hei.l:k6rpem, Rad~toreo, Olen und aildere Geralen
• 2.lelotIOI£1. ';:l"tg.g ~, \::!£, (~.!!..2.I ~Oll 'iI~ 'U-0tle '8{! !! 'iI~ 2;;1011 • Janganpasangdidekatsumberpanasapapunsepertiradiator,pemanasruangan,tungku,atauperalatan lain (termasuk (auchVers~rkern)auf,dieWarmeeJ"lelJgefl
~;;ltlJ.:lofAiIR. amplif.er) yang menghasillan panas • Verwenden Sie nur vern Herstel!er speziftzie~es ZubeMr.
• J.:il~~.ijI0lIA1 ;l;1~~ ¥~§ ¥~.L'.I ¥~££! AIg.!fAiIR • Gunakanhanyaperangkaltambahanlaksesoriyangditetapkanotel1pabrikan ·ObenassenSieReparalurarobertenstetsentsprechendausgebikletemKundendienstpersonalLassenSiebeijeglicher
• £E A1lll~E ~J.:tl:l ,l,1ll1.6 ~g]fOIIJlI 2/7IAjIR [l~ W~m E£ .££E jf2.j.:VI • Serahkansemuaperbaikankepadatenagaservisyangmemenuhisyaral. PerbaikandiperkJkan bilaperalatanmengalami BescMdigung eine Wartung durchfuhren: beispielswefse wenn des Stromkabel oder der Sleeker beschad;gt wurden.
nte£l7~L/ ~111. ~g ~.5i!-, gjl ~~ ~l!~ 'il0i!!':~ ~~, lllLt e710il {j";;17f kerusakan,misalnyakabelataustekerlistrikrusak,cairantumpahatauadayangbendajatuhkedalamperalatan, FlGssigkeit verschOnel wurde oder Objeltte in das Geral gefallen sind, Lassen Sie das Gerat aoch dann wa~en, wenn es
.%.§JB ~~. {,tjl7f J.:1IC/1~ ~§~IJ.:I 'i'Je ~.li!-, {j";;I. S1OiE£~ ~.5i!- !! Oilt! og"'-j~§ {,t;;17f peralatanterpaparhujanalaukefemllapan, tidalo;bekeriasecaranormal,ataujatuh RegeooderFeuchligkeilausgesetztwar,nichtrichtigfunktioniertoderfaliengelassenwurde.
e{l@ ~.sfOile A1lll~71 't.!R~Ljq

~ Advarsel [DanlkJ ~ Avertisment [Romlni] ~ Flgyelem [Magyar]

'Brugenkva@cerelinstallatorlilalmonterevregbeslaget
• Kontrollerv<eggensstyrlleindenmonteringen. Hvisslyrlleoikkeertifstr<ellkel;g,skalduforst<l!fkevreggenogderefter
monlereprodukletpavreggen
• Dumaunderingenomst<end;ghedersrenedlnflngeridenrille,derfinOesibundenaftv'el.nardettagesafsolden,mens
lV'etrnonterespaval!lgen, Dererfarefore~ktriskst0d
• Sergfor,alriMendillkkesmeddeldre1lsel,der~veresmedtv'et.indenmonteringenaftv'etpavreggenalsluttes
·SamsungElectronicskan"eholdesans~arligfornogenskade.deropstarpaproduklet.hvisdetikll.eerblevetmonteretkorrelct.
·Eflermonleringeo.maduikke~gedigiproduktel.ogduskalundgaat'lor1;gesl0dpaprodiJ:.1et
• NarproduklelSkafgeomonteresetandelsled, skaldubrugedesammeskruersomdem,derbievleverelmedproduktet
(DukankebeskruernefradinproduktudbYller).
~Vigtigsikkerhedsvejledning
•va ru9tlm ~ apelali la un instalalor calif~t pentru a instala wportul de montare pe perele.
• Velifica~ rezistent,a plIretelui iMinle de instalare. Oactl perelele nu este sufiCient de rezistenl, ranlorsa~·I, apoj iostalati
produsulpeperete
• Sub nicioforrna nu introduce~ degelulin caneiura crea1t1 prill scoalerea stativului din pa~ea inferioaffi a lelevizorului la
instalareaaceslulapeperete.Risca~~vaelectroculap
'Av&\igrijtlstlacoperipcaneiuracucapaculfumizatimpreun~culelevizorulinaintedeainstalatelevizorufpeperele.
• SamsungElectrooicsnuvafirnspunztltoarepenlruniciodeleriorareaproduS!JIuicauzattideinstalarea
necorespllnzatoarea acestuia
'Oupainstatare,nuvaagtl\3pdeprodus~ievi1ap~llsupuoelila!iOCUrimecanice
• La reinslalarea prlXlusuh.ri intl·una~ loc, utilizap acelea~i $uruburi CiI $l cele Iumitate OJ produsul. (Putelicumpiira
ilUruooriledelafurnizorulprodusului)
• Afali kOJ1ZoIfelszerelesehez ke~e kepzettszakembersegilSegel
• Afelszereles elOtt eleoOrizze a faj leherbirasat. Amennyiben a fat nem eleg eros, felle~eoiif erosilse meg a falal, es csak
azutanszerejefeiakeszulekel.
·SemmikeppennedugjabeleazujjatazallvanyesaTV·keszOlekaljaktizMkeletkezonyilasba.mik6zbenfeiszerelia
TV-keszUlekel a falra. Fennilll az aramiltes ~eszelye.
• Miulan fel$lere~ea TV-keszolekel alalra, lJIolsolepeskenl taka~a el allyilast a TV-kesziilekhez kapotttakar6lappal
• ASamsung Electronics nem vallal felelOssl!gel a keszOlekben keletkezett azon karokM. amelyek a termek nem megfelelO
felszereleseb6lszarmaznak.
·Afef$lerelesuianroekapaszllodjonbeleakeszulekbe.esiigyeljen.hogyake$liilHetneer;enagl'Obbiites
• He milsik heIyre szerei lei a keszoJel(et. ugyilf1azokal acsavillokat hasznalja, amelVekei akesziilek megvasilrtasa~or kapotl
(Aterrnekforgalmazo;al61vasilrolhalugyaool)'ancsavarokaL)

'laJsd&nnevejledning • Behold d&nroevejledning l!',.lnstructiuniimportantedesigufanta ~ Onemli Guvenlik Talimallan

• ViIlr opmillrksom pa a~e adliarsler • Felg alleanl'isninger • CilipacesteinslJ'uC1iuni • RespectaliacesteinslJUC\iuni ·Ot'lassaelazalabbiutasitasokat. ·Tansabeazalabbiutasitasokal.
• Brugikkedetleapparalinillmedenafvand. • Rengorkunmedenter.klud. • Tine~ seama de toate avertlsmentele • Respectali toate inslnJc1iunile 'Mindigafigyelmezlelesek$lerintjtlrjooel 'KOvesseaz6sszeslJlasilllst
• Bloker ikke nogen af ~entilationsabningeme, Inslaller i overensstemmelse med fabnkantens anvi$f1inger. • Nuutilizapprodusulinaprop'ereaapel 'Cura!a!idoarcuoctl~uscatt! 'NehasznaljaezlakesziilekeloizkOzeleben 'Csakszarazronggyalbsztitsa
'InstallerikkeinalmedenafvaITJl&'kPldersasomradiatorer,varmeapparater,ovroeellerandreapparater{inkfusive • Nubloca!inidoooriflCiudeventilare.InstalapprodusulconforminstruC\iunilorprodLdtorufui ·Nezllrjonelegyetlensze!OzOnyililslsem.IUOzembehelyezeslagyilrt6utasililsaiszerintvegezze
forsl<erkere), derprlXlucerer ~arme. • Nuinslalapprodusufinapropiereauneisursedectlldura,precum un radiator, uncalorifer,osobasauaKeaparate • Ne hasznalja a ke$llileketMlorras (peklauf fiitolest, Msugaa6,lilzhely) vagyegyeb 01yanke$liill!k(pler6sM)
• Brugkundettilbehor,dererangivelafprlXlucenten (inciusivamplificalGare) producAlGare decaldurt! ktlzeleben,amelyhOtbocslltki
• Overlad al seMCe ~I k~alificerel servicepersonale Service er pakrrevel nar apparatet er beskadiget pa en hvilken scm heist ·NuutilizapdecatdispozjtNeledeata~relaceesoriilespecificaledeproductltor. • Csak a gyart6 altai meghalllrozott ta~ozekokat ~$lllilija
made, sasomhvisslromiedningenellerslikketerble~elbeskadiget.hvisdererblevelSj)ildtviIlSkeellerobjelc.tererfaldelned ·ApelaplapersonaldeservicecalilicatpenlrurealizarealutulOJl)plIrapilordeseJ'lice.Qperapiledeservicesuntnecesare 'Aszervizeleslmindigkepzettszakemberrelvegeztesse, Mindenkeppenlordu~onszerelOhoz,haake$lUlel<.balrnllyen
paapparatet.hvisapparatelerblevetudsatforregnelierfugt,tMsdetikkefurgerernormanellerhvisdetertilevetlabl ctInd produwi a fost deterioral in orice mod, de eX&flllIu, dactl mula sau cablul de alimentare esle delerioral, a fost vtlrsat m6donmegrClf19ill6dik,peldaulmegseriilatapkabeivagyatApcsattakoz6.lolyadekvagyllJrgykeriilake$liilekbelsejllbe
lichidpeprodussauunobiectacazutinacesta,produsufafostexpuslaploaiesauumezeatli,nufunC\iOJIea~normal akesziilekreraesikazesO,vagyegyebnedvessegen,illelVehanemmiikOdikmegfefel6en.vagyleesik
sauawferitun$ocmecaniC

&. Waarschuwing [Nederhindsl L!', Avvertenu [italiano) ~Aviso [Portuguh)

·Laaldemuurl:leoesligingsbeugelinslalferendweengekwalificeerdeinslalfateur. ·Richiederel'interventodiuninsla!atorequa);r~toperlastanaaparele. • Recona a um proflSsional devidamenle quaiif~ para instalar 0 suporte de montagem de parede
• Coolro!eer de slerkte van de wand voor de instalalie. A1s de wand niet slerllgenoeg is,z()(gt ueJ'lwdatdewandwordt 'Verif~relasolidihldellapareteprimadiprocedereall'insta!azioneselaparetenonesuffiCil!ntemenlesoIida,rinfCKlarla ·Veriliquearesistenciadaparedeantesdeprocederainstala,.ao,SearesfslenciadapareOent!of()(wflCienle,reforcea
verstev;gdvwdatuhetproduclbevest;gl. primadiprocederealriOStaliazione paredeeemseguidainsialeoproduto
• SteekondergeenbedingllWvingerindegieufdieWQrlHgevormdbijdevoetvandetvterwlludetvaan de wand 'InnessuncasoinserireleditaneRascanalaturacrealaseparandoipiedistallosulfondodellelevisore TV durante • Naointroduzaodedonaranhuraresultantedasepara,.aodabasedotelevisor,duranteainstala,.aodotelevisorna
bevestigd. Er beslaat een ge~aar VOOI elektrisdle scllokken I'installazionedeltelevisoreaparete.Pericolodiscaricheelettriche. palede,Existeoriscodeclloqueelearico.
• ZmgeJ'lOOJ datu degleuf afdekt met de kap die bij de tv wordl geleverd ocordat u de be~estigingvande tv aan de wand • Coprirefascanalatulacon IacoperluraindolaZioneal1elevisoreprimadicompletarel'inslal!azionea parete ·CubraaranhuracomatampafomecidacomOlelevisoranlesdetermirl(lrainstala,.aodoteievisornaparede
oollooll. • Samsung Electronics non pu6essere ritenularesponsabileperevenlualidanriialprodl)\l()dovutiauna inslaliazionenon 'ASamsungEiectrooicsMoseresponsabilizaporquaisquerdenosnoprodlJlodevidoaumainstaI~oinadequada
• Samsung Eleetrooics is niet aansprakelijk ~w enige schade aan hel product als gevofg van &en onjuiste installatie idonea • Ap6s a instaf~o, noo se apoie no produ10 e e~ite dar paocadas no mesmo.
• GanietaanIletprlXlucthangenalshetisbevesligdenvermijddathelprodoclschokkenondergaal ·Doporinstallazione.nonappendersialprodotloedevilareimpalliviolenlicontrodiesso • AD minstalar 0 produto noutro local, ulilize os mesmos parafusos /J)rnecidos com 0 produlo (Pode comprar os para!usos
• Gebruik bij hel opnieuw inslalleren ~an hel product op een andere Iocaliedeze~de schroeveodie bij het product werden 'Incasodireinstaliazioneinunaposiziooediversa,ufllizzarelostessCltipodivitiacclusealprlXIotlo{E'possPbile atraves do fomecedor de produtos.)
geleverd(DesduoevenkuntubijdeleveranCil!rvanhetproductkopen.) acqulsta~edal rivenditoredel protlotto.)
&.lnstrUl;oesdeseguran~aimportantes
~WichtigeSicher1leitshinweise L!',lstruzioni importanti perla sicurezza
• Leia estas instru¢es. • Guarde estas inslru¢es.
• LeesdezeinslJUClies. • Bewaardezeinstructies. ·Leggerequesleistruziooi. 'Cooservarequesteistruzioni ·EstejaalentoatlXlososavisos. 'SigalodasasinstrU0es
• Neemaile waarsclllM'ingenfnacht 'VolgalieioStructies ·PrestareattenzioneatlJlleleavvertenze 'Seguiretutleleislruziooi 'Naoutilizeesteaparelhopertodeagua • Limpe apenas com umpanomacio
• Gebruik dn apparaal niel in de buurt van waler • Maalo; aneen sthoon met eeo droge doek 'Nonusarequestoapparecchiovicinoall'acqua 'Puiresoloconunpannoasclutto ·Naolapeasaberturasdevenlil~o,iIlstaledeacordocomasinstr~sdofabricanle.
• Blokkeerdeventilatie..(lpeningenniet.Inslalleervolgensde iIlstructiesvan defabrikant. 'Nonostruireleaperturedivenlilazioni,inslallareconfonnemenleallelstruzionidelprcdutlore. • Ntloinstateoaparehopertodefontesdecalortaiscornoradiadores, saidasdecalor, fog6esououtrosaparelhos
• Inslalleer niet in de buuJlvan warmlebronnenals radlaloren, roosters, fomuizenofalldereapparaten(zoals~ersterkers) • Non installam viCino a fonti di calom, come rad~lori. accumulatori, stule 0 artri apparecchi (amplificatori inclusi) che (irlctuirdCl amplifiCadores) que prlXluzam calor.
diewarmteproduceren generanocafore ·Utilizeapenasacess6riosespecificadospelofabricanle.
• Gebruik aileen hulpslukken en accessoires die zijnopgegeoendwde fabrikanl. 'Ulilizzaresoloconnessionilaceessorispecif~tidalprodullore ·Solicileasslst1'!nciajuntodopessoaldeassistenciaqualif~do.Aassistenciae necessaria quando 0 aparelho esta
• Laatallereparatiesoveraangekwalificeerdelechnici.Repalatieisnod;galshetapparaalisbeschad;gd,bijvoorbeekl 'Perinterventidiasslstenzaconsultarepersonalequalif~tolnlervenlidiassistenzasononecessariquandol'apparecchio (1anif~do,comoporexemploumcabodealimenta,.aooufichadaniftCada,quandoliquidofoiderramadonoaparelhoou
alshetnetsnoerofdestekkerisbeschadigd,alservloeistofopwordlgemorst,alserVOOf'W1lrpeninzijngevallen,alshet ha suMo danni, per esempio in caso di danneggiamento del cavo di a~mentazione, peroetrazione di ~quidi 0 corpl estranei obiectoscairamdentrotloaparelho.exposi~doaparelhoachuvaouahumidade,funcionamentoincorrectoouqueda
apparaat is blootgesleldaan regen ofvochl, niet normaal werktofals uhel hebllateo~alleo nelprodotto,esposizionedelprodottoapioggiaoumidilil,matli.H'lzionamentiocaduta. domesmo.

~Varovanie [O'~J L!',EcMepry [1(83a'l] t!:> Ostrzei:enie [Polski)

• Devorga O'malish Krooshteynini o'matish uthun mafakali mutaxassis xizmatidan foydalaning • ~blpranbl~ acna lI01Ha~ I,8J1Cblpt.l8CblH TeK y<Hlirleni ~bl3Mer KapceTy ldaMaHbl faHa ~Tyra THic. • Skorzystaj z uslug wykwalifikowanego teCl1nika wcelu instalacji wspomika naSCl&nnego
• O'malishdan avval devor muslahkaml;gini lekshiring Agar uning mustahkamligi yetarli bo'fsa, u nelda deverni yetarti laJ"lda • 0PHamaH T\'pi>lfl 1\i16blpraHblll 6epiniriH TeKcepin anbll\bl3, ~l5t.apra ~lIci3 6onca. OHbl acnaHbl mTepe anaTblHAaH ·PJ"ledPJ"lyst'IPfeniemdomonlaiusprawdi.czyScianajestwystarczaj<\cosolidna.JeSliSciananiejestdoslatecznie
mustahkamiaganingizgaishonchhosilqifillgvakeyinmahsulolnidevOfWlo'maling. I,8TallTbln, CQAaH KeHiH acnaHbl.,ooblprafa OpHaTblljbl3. solidna nalety upewniC ~.1e zostanie ona wzmocniona pJ"led monta.!:em produklu
'Harqanday~atdahambarmoqlaringiznilelevizorridfM)rgao'matishvaqlidatelevizorostidagitayanchdanaratishdanhosi ·TeneAlVl3PJlb1l;(16blpraraOpH3Ty6api>lCblHAa,T&neJ1loInaMblllaCTblHfh!)I((lfbll\llaOllblT\'prbIt1(IHarblTblnalll"aH,OanaitJ\a • Pod iadnyrn pozorem nie wsuwaj palc6w w szcze1in'i powsla!(\ na slIutelc odsun~a podstawy u dolu lelewizora
bo'luvchitirqishgatiqmang.Uyen:laelelctrlokiulishtlavfimaljud 6oIII"aH TeclllXe caycafbll\blJAbl eWI',aWaH C'{l\fl8Jjbl3. 3J1enp I\8Tepifle YWblpay l\8yni 6ap. podczasjegomontowanianaScianie.lsmiejeryzykopora1eniapri¥lem
'Te~vizomidevorgao'malishniyakunlashdanavvalt~qishnitelevizorbilanbirgaberilganqopqoqbilanyopganliglngizga 'T&l1&AMA3Mbl~blpraraOPHaTl1ac6'iPblH,OHblllaCTblHAafOlTacioiT&neJ1loInaPMeH6ipmlKeni3inreHr,ar,na1;WaMeH • Przed zamocowaniem telewizora na Scianie upewnij s~, te $lczelina zostala zaslepiona pokrywk<\ dola.czon<\ do
ishonchhosilqiling. lKa6blllbl3. telewizora
• Samsung Electronics mahsulotga nOlo'g'ri o'mat~lsh OQibalida yetkazilgan har qanday tarami o'z bo'yniga olmaydi • Samsung Electronics QIliMJlYPb/CopliaTbIl1lo1afaHJlbll\TilHOpi>lH aJUaH ar,aynblF;Tap VWiH lKayan~epwinDc leTepldeH,ai 'FirmaSamsungEI&l:tronicsnie~zieodpowiedzialnazajakiekCJlwiekuszkodzeniaproduktupowstaiewwynikujego
·O'matilgandankeyinmamufotgallechnimaosmangvaqattiqta'sirko'rsalmang. • OPHaTbln60nfaHCOl\,QIlildleC3l1Ma~ta/IM3IjbI3.3IlT~TYAaHca~6oJlblljbl3 nieYAaSciwegornontaiu
'Mahsulolnibosllqajoygaqaytadano'matlshdamahsulotbilanbirgaberilganaynano'shashruplargao'xshahshruplardan ·eHiMAi6aclo;alKepreOpHaTy'(WiH""pbll1l'blMeHr,aTaplKenli3iru&H6ypaHAaTlap,l:lblfaHa~OJ1A3HblHbl3 (6ypaHt\ilJlaMbl 'Pozakoriczeniumontaiunienaleiyobti<\iacaniuderzaeprodUktu
foYllaianing (Siz shruplarni o'zjngizning mahwlolni sotib olgan ta'minotchingizdan solib olishingiz mumkin.) (lIli"lllicafywbUlaHcaTblnaTIYblllwra6ona.tlbl.) • Po ponownym montaiu produktu w innym miejscu naleiy SkCKlystac z tych samych wtcr~t6w, kl6re dostarczono z
produktem.{Wl<r~ty mo.l:nazakupicoddostawcyproduktu.)
~ Havfsizlikka oid Muhim Ko'rsatmalar ~~yinci3,l:\iMTYpanbIMal1blJ,l:\bIH'tc~ynap
~ Wdnezasadybezpieczeristwa
'Ushbuko'rsatmalamicl"qing • Ko'rsalmalargaamalq!ing '6YlllfVCl\ilynaPJlblOF;bll\bl3 ·&tnHi'Cl\ilynaMblcaF;Tan~oMbll\bl3
'NaletytapoznaC~zponi1$lymizasadami ·NaleiyzachowaCniniej$lezasady.
• Barchaogohlanhrishlargaeliborbering • Barchako'rsalmalargar'oyaqiling. 'EclepTyneMill6apllblfblHMYI\IffiTOPblllll3l\bl3 'Hyc!;aYIl3Mb10pi>lHll3l\bl3
·NaletyllWaiaenawszelkieoslJ"le1enia ·NaleiypostfiPQWaezgodnrezwszystkirnlzasadaml
'UshbuapparaldansuvgayaqinjoYllafQydaianmang 'Faqatginaquruqlattabnant~alang • 6ynanll3parrblcyralK3i<p1l1lKepneI(OJlJ:l3lf6aHbl3. 'Tel""pra~wy6epemellfa3aTlal\bl3
• iirona ~m shamollatish teshiklarini berkitib qo'ymang, fshlab chiqaruvchioing ko'rsatmalariga muvoliq laJ"lda o'mating 'Nienale1ykoJ"lystaCzurz<\dzeniawpollli1uwlXly 'UJ"l<\dzenienale1yczySCiCsuch<\szmatk<\
• )l(en,a&T~iw caHblnaynaPJlbllleWl\iIl<cblcblH 6ireMelli3.li¥pi>lI"fblHblellllipywi Hi'ClIllynapblHacaM opIIaTblI\bl3.
'Nienale1yb/okowaczadnychotwor6wwentylacyjnychMonlatnaletypaeprowadzaczgodniezinstrukejamiproducenta
• Radiatorlar, issiqlik regist~ari, pl~kalal kabiissiqlik manbalarining yoki lssiqUk chiqaruvchi boshqa apparaUamiflg (jumladan • F'aAHaTop. r,bll,ll,blpfblwli¥pw1fbl,J1eWfle6acr,aA3lib13ywblI'apafblllannaparraPJlblIl~aCbllla(VHAinilTi30paHTI\bIWIaMbl
• Nle nale1y monlowac urz<\dzenia w poIlIiiu irOdei ciepla, takich jak kaloryfery, rejestratory ciepla, kucheoki ilp. (w Iym
kuthaytirgichlarlyaqinigao'matmang ~aJUaHJl,a)opH3maI\bl3
• Faqatgirl(lishlabchiqaruvchilomonidannazardatutilganqo'shimchaqurilmalarlyordamchiqurimalardanginafoYllalaning wzmacniacze).
• Tell al\llipywi P'l'~rr;lfaH )l((IMbl~apJlepeK'lKapa~apolbl f8lla l\OI1.OaHblHbl3
·NaletykorzyslacW'fla.czniezdostawekiakcesoriowokreslonychprzezproducenJa
• Barcha~izmallaruchunmalakafirnuta.<asslsgamurojaatqiliflg.Xizmalko'rsalishappalalgabirorlarzdashikaslyelganda, ·If,t.I3MeTlepceIYllC\'MblCTapi>lHlelyaxineniI\bl3lo1&lrepc&fylolllMallblfaHa1l:y3ereaCblpyralllic.lI;bIlMeTlepceTy
• W$lelkie naprawy nalety zlecat wykwalifikowanemu personelowi serwisowemu. PJ"lelcazan'e uJ"l(\dzenia do serwisu jesl
masalan,elektrtarmoqqaulashsimishikasllanganda,apparalusligasuyuqiklOUibketgandayokibirorbuyunlushib annapaTl\ilr,aHAaHA361p3ar,blMlenreHlKa1JlaHAa,MblcanblOllblll~pelCblMblHeMeceawaCbl6ynillCe,annapat1\3CVJ1b1~
konieczne.jeS~ zostalo ooowjakikotwiek sposObuszkodzooe- np, uszkodzony kabel zasila/ilCY lub wtyczka: \\'j'1ana na
ketganda.apparatYOlllg'irostidayokinamlikdaqo~anda, ya~shiishtamaganidayokitushuribyuborilganidatalabqilinadi 3aT Tarillin 113nca He ycriHe3llnapl;\'nan KeTce,annapaT:«aI\6bIPJlblllaCTblHM 113nbln He blJIfaJUamce,.QYPbIC lICVMbIC
icTet.l&ceHeMecel(Vllanr,ancal(illl:eT. urz<\dzeniecieczkJboblekly,kt6redoslaolys"l'doSrodkauJ"l<\dzenia;ua¥lzeniezoslalowystawiooenadzialaniede$lczu
Iublvilgoci,niepracujepoprawnielubzostaloupuszczone

t!:> Advertencia (Eapai'iol] It npeAynpeJlJ,AeHMe {PyCClOlM} t!:> Varovanie [Slovenfina]

'Pidaalosmontadoresqueiostalenelsoportedemontajemural ·nonpoCineCl1&LlManMCTOl!noyetaH06leyCT(lH(IeMTbHacrefllblElt:p(lHwTlMHbI • Pri inS\alilcii n~slennello driiaka vyu1ileslutbykvalilikovanehoinstalalera

• n&peAycTaHceKolInpoeepbTenp<l'!HOCTbCTeHbl,EcnHCT&I1aHe,[lOCTaT04t1OnpC4Hall,Yl(penHfeeeM Ton bK038TeM ·Predinstalaciouskootrolujlepevnosfsteny.Akjepevnosfnedoslatujlka,nezaOOdnrtespevnil'sleouaaznasledne
• Compruebe la solidez de fa pared antes de la instalaci6n, Si no es 10 sufrcientemenle salida, debe reforzarla
parainstalarelproduelO yCW+aBrlMBafITeHaHf)Ii\'CTlXlHC18O nainslalovafproduktnaslenu.
• Bajoningunacircunstanciaintrodw:calosdedosenlaranuracreadaeolrelaseparaci6ndelsoporteenlaparte 'HMnpHlalMxo6CTollTenbCTBaXHeecTaanHMTenan&LlBIl(lHaBl)',C03IlaHH)'IOnyreMOTDa/I&HHHCToi1meHIllICHE!M'I!lCTM 'laiiadnychokolnostinediloa/leprstdodnllky,ktorasavytvorilaoddelenimstojananaspodnejslraneTV,tatiatooTV
inferiordelteievisordurantelainslalaci6ndeesteenlapaJed,Hayriesgodedescargaelectrica. TeneeM3Cpa BO BpeldH ycraHoBlM leneeMJOpa Ha CleHe, CYlilecTeyeT ooaCHOCTbnopalKeHHH3flellPM'I&CllMM TO~OM inS\alujelenaslenu.ExistujetunebezpetenstvozasahuelektrickYmprUdom
'Cubra Ia ranuracon la tapa suministrada con el televisor antes de proceder a la inslalaci60 del leleviweo la • nepe,q 8bl1100I\&1;I\&M ycTaHOBOlTen&8M30pa H3 CT&H& 3(llpoiiTe laHaalyopMilaraeMOH ~Teneel«lPY lpblWlcH ·NezaOOdnilezakryl'drMkudod3llymkrylomsTV.alosk6r,akodokonliteinsJalAciuTVnastenu
pared 'KownaHMHSamsungElectron1CSHeH&ceTOTeeTCTlleHHocTM38l1lO61>enoepell\lleHMHycTpoMCTlla,npoH3OWeJlWMe 'SpolotnostSamsungEfeclronicsnepreberazodpovednosfzaakekolvekposkodeniuproduktuzd6vodunevhodnej
'SamsungEleclronicsnosehaceresponsableporningundaiXlcausadoalproductopor una instalaci6n IlCI1&,I:lCTBMe HenpaBHIlbtlOM YCTaHOBKH. inSlalaCil!produklu.
inadecuada • nocne YCTaHOBKH He OOMpaMTecbOO ycTpolIcTBO HHel1ClJl8epfaMTe ero CHllbHblM B03,QeMCTB~HM • PoinslatliciisanaproduklneveSajteapredchadzajtevysta~eoiuproduktusilnymnarazom
• Despuesdelainsla!aci6n,nosecuelguedelprodueto yevitequeestereclbaimpaetosfue~es 'BCl1rtaenepeyCTaHCIemyCTpOHCTllaBAPj'fOMMecTeMCI1OJ1b3ymeTe:lreBllHTbI,lOTOpblenpHflaJaflMCbKycTpOliCTey. • Pri preinstalovani produktu na ine mi&$to poll2.ite rovnak1l skrul1ly, ako su tie. ktore sa dodali s produktom (Skrulky m61ete
• Cuando vuet'la a instalar el producto en otro Iogar. ut~ice los mismo 10m~los que se suminiSlran con eI producto (Puede (6HHTbI WOllCHO qnMTb y nocTaBlll~((l YCTpoi'1cTBa.) zakupifoddodllvatefaproduktu,)
comprarloslomilfosensuproveedor,) &. D6le.f.ite bezpe~nostne pokyny
It BallCHbleYKll38HMA no 6eJOnaCHOCTM
t!:>lnstruccionesimportantesdeseguridad ·Pret.itajtesitielopokyny. ·Dodrtujtetietopokyny.
'. np<l'!THTeAaHHblellfICTpyK~MH " CoxpaHMTe 3TM IIHCTPYKll,MII. 'BerteohfadnavSelllyupozomenia ·DodrtujtevS&lkypokyny.
• Lea eslas inslrucciones • Conserveestasinstrucciones '. 06patllilHTe 6/iMM3HMe 113 lICe np&llynpeJit,lll!H~H " CfI&JlYiiTe eceld HIfC1llY~I\M~1d • Nepou1iva~e tolO zariaden'ev blizkosti vody. • Gistite len suchoohandriCkou
• Pleste alel"K:i6n a lodaslasadve~encias • Siga todas lasinslrucciooes. ',HeHCJIO!1b3j'11TeI\3HHOeYCTpoOCrBOB6nM~BOJlbl ',Io1CJ1O!1bJ)'l1TeAflH'lllCTOlTonblloc'{X)'IOTKallb ·Nebloku~ehadneV(llracieotvoryaillslaluMvsUladespokyrlmiodvYrobcu .
• Noutiliceesleaparatocercadelagua. • Limpielos61o con un par"toseco. ·.HellonYClaHTe3arpUJleHMHeeHTMn~~~HbllOTeepcTHHHBbll'\OJ1HlIflTeycTatlOEll)'8COOTeerCT8MMCMHCTP)'lOJllI'W.H ·Neinstali.fevblizkostiakYchkolvekzdrojovtepla,akonaprikladradialorov,prieduchovkurenia,sporilkovalebozaliadeoi
• No obstrU)'a fasaber1urasde ~enlilaciOn, Insta~deacuerdo a las instrucciones del fabricante. npoll38C\ll~TenH {vrataroe zosil~ovaoov), ktorevylVaraj(Jteplo
• Noloinstalecercatleningunafuentedecalor.comoradiad()(es,registradoresdecalor, homos u otros aparatos (incluidos '. He ycraHalll1f1BaHTe yr;rpoHCTeO B6nM3M l(l«Mx·nM60 MCT04H11l0B TefUla, TalHX ~(lI( paIlMaTopbl, 060rpeBaTenH, nnMTblll[1M • POIdivajtelen nilst2'lceiplisluSenstvo, kl()(euralv5'robca.
amplif~dores)quegenerencalor APY~ ycTPOMCTBa (B~~a~ ytWlIlTer1H), BbI,IIeflHlO\lIII& TeMO ·VSe\okservlszvertedorUkkvaifikovar.ehoservisnehopersonalu$ervissavytadujevledy,kedsazariadenieakymkotvek
'UliliceunicamenteconexionesoaceesoriOSespeclf~dosporelfabricante ·,Io1CJ1O!1bJYMTeTOl1blonpHcnoc:06'leHMllInpMH3AI1&.lKIIOCTM,)'I:aJaHHbIElnpoo3!MlAMTer1eM. sp6sobomposkodilo,akon~rikfadposkodeniekablasietovehonapajaniaalebozaslrCky,rozliatietelcutinyalebopiid
·Coofielasr&paracionesapersonaltecnicocualfficado.Elservicioesnecesariocuandoeiaparalosehayadaliadode '. Texo6cnylIotBaHHe AOiIIllItO npoM3eo,aHTbC~ XBafl~~M~MpoeaHHblMM CI1e1l~aJlMCTaU~ no 06cn)'llrnBaH~Kl objektovdozariadenla,vyslaveniezariadeniadaM'ualebovlhkosti,vprip<tdenezvytajnejprevadzkyalebopripIJde
algunaforma,cuandoelCilbleoelenchuledesuministroelectricoestendaliados.sehayaderramadGliquidosobreef Texo6cnylOlBaHHeHeOOxOAHMOnpllnlo60unoepell\ll&HHHycTPOOCrBa, Hanplll.lep, npllIlOBpeJKI1l!HI'IMwtrypanMTaHM~ zariadenia
aparatoohayancaicloo!ljelosensuinlerior,elaparatcsehayae~puesloalanuviaohumetlad, no funcionenormalmente M~ all[1~M, npM nonanaHMM lKHAlOCTM MIIM npenMeToe BHyrpb yCTpojicTBa, npM nonanaHHM ycTpoiicTBa JIQQ llQJlJ:\b MM
osehayacaido npHeroCWIbMOMYM8l1CHeMHM,c6oHxBpa60Tell[1~ JWletlMM
It Varoltus (SuomI] .&. Varovani It Uyan (TORj;e1
'PyydaammallitaitOistaaselltajaaasootamaanseinateline • 0rUk pro piipevn~i na zed by rOOl instalovat kvalifikovanj monW. ·LlitfeoDuvaraMonlajBrakelinikalifiyebirlesisat~yamonteeltirin.

• Tarkislaseinankantawusennenasenousta,JO$seinaeloleriittlivanvahva.vahvistaseinaennenlainoonasennusla • Pfed instalaci ovefte Uoustllu zdi. Pokud neoi zeddostateb1~ sllna. musileji pled instalaci vjrobku na zedvyztutit. • Mootajdan once duvann s3l}laml~1fl1 kontrol edin Yeteonce s<l!llam dellil ise, 6fTce duvan gOyiendirdiOlnizden emin oIun
• AlamissaantapauksessatyOMasormeasileleviSKHljalelineenvilliseenuraan,kunlelevisiota aseonetaansffilille,Tama ·Zat.!ldnYchokoinostinev!dfldejte~lIemiTstalaceteleviZorunazedsvojeprstydooNoruvzniklehooddelenimstojanuna
vesonraOrtinOduvara monteedin.
voiaiheultaa5ahkOiskoo. spodnistraneteleviz:oru.Hrozinebezpetiuruuelektrickrmproudem. • Nyi duvara takarllBn, Nnin altlndaki standi aylnllO,n'zda olu~n ollJ!ja hi¢ir zaman par~mlZ' sokmaym, Elektrik
'P91ttiuralelevisionmukanatul!eellasuojuksella,ennenkuinkiinnitatteleviSKHlseinaan • PfedinstalacilelevizorunazedzakryjtBolvorkry\1(oudodavanoustelevizorem orafllabllir.
'5amsung€JeetronicsmiSlaansenllisistalaijevaurioista,jolkajohtuvatvMfanlaisestaasennukse5la. ·SpoIeb1OSISamsl.W'ogEtectronicsneodpovidazajak~olipoSkozeoivjrobkuzpUsoben~nespravnouillstalaci
• TV'yi duvara takmayllamamlamooan once oluOu TV ile birtikte gelen kapakta kapattl~lmZdan emin olun
• Kun la~e on asenneltu, ala nojaa slihen alaka altisla sita iskuile. ·PodokonCeniinslalacesenavjrobeknezavesujteazabra!lte~"rmnarazumdovYrobku. • Samsung Electrones. U)'9unsuz bilfl'ntle monte ed4mesi yiiZUnden urunde olu~n h~ bir hasardan sorumlu Mulama.z
• KunaseonatlailettauuOOlleeojohonkintoiseenpaikllaan.kaytasenmukanatoim~ettujaalkuperaisia rull'leja. (Voilostaa • Pfi dalSl instalaci .,.yrobku na jine mislo poufi~e stejne SlOUby jako!y, kten\ byly dodim~ s vjrobkem. ($rouby mUtete • Monlajdan soma, urune aSllma~ln ve Un:ine sert darbeden k~lmn
naitaruuvt!jalalllmmattajalleeomyyjatta,} zakoupiluprodejcevjrobku.) ·Orlinil~kabiryere~enidenmonteederken.uriinlebifliktevefilenvidalannaynlsrmkullamn(Vldalan(Kiin
saOlaylclnIIDanalabilirsiniz,)
ltTirkeititurvaliisuusohjeita It Duleiitebezpecnostnipokyny
~ Onemli Giivenlik Talimatlarl
• Lue nama oI1eet • sailyta nama oIljeet. • PieCletesllytopokyny. • Uchovejtetylopokyny • Bu talimallan okuyun • Bu Ialima~an salda~m
'O!akai4duvaroiluksethuomiOOn 'Seuraakaikkiaohjeila • Vtlzml!te na vMornl vse<:hna varovanl • Dodrlu~e vSechn~pokyny. 'TUrnuyanlarakulak~rin ·Tiimlalimatl.antakipedln.
·Alakaytatatalaitettavedentahella 'PuhdiSlavainkuivalalinalta • Nepoufivejle zafizeniv blizkO$tivod~ • CiSleni provaoli~e POUle svchyrn hadfikem • Bu cillaZI suyun yaklOinda kulianma~ln • Ya/nlZca kuru bir belle lemilleyin
·Alatukimilaanilmanvaihtoaukkojajaasennavalmistajanolljeidenmukaisesti • Neblokujlevenblaeni otvory. inslalu~e zafizeni podle pokynuvjrobce • Havalandlrma deli~lerini kapatma~ln ve uretidnin talima~anyia uyumlu ~mdB Monte erlin.
• Ala asenna Ia~etta minkMn lammOnt:ihtoon. esim.lamp6patterin, IampOritiloo. uunin \ai muun vas\aavan, lampOa • Neinstah.4tezafizenivbliZkOSlizdrojutepla(napf,radiiltOlU.teplometu,kamennebodalsichzafizeniprodukt.licichteplo. • RadyaIOrler,ISlduzenleyiciler.sobalarvedigerlsIOreten (amplffikatordahil)cihazlafln~amnarnonteelmeyin
tuotlavanlajlteenl3heDe(vahvistimetmukaanlukien) I'teIn~zesilovaai) 'Yalfllzcaiileticitarafmdanbelirle-nenekparoralanlaksesuarlankullamn
• ~yta vain vamslajan maarittelemia lisalaitteita ja -varusteita ·PQ(Qivej\epouzepfislu~stviurtenevYrobcem.
• Tum servislef il;jn kaMliye servis personeine ba~vurun, Cillazlar, g~-deslek kabiosunun veya fi~inin hasar g6rmesi,
• Anna huo/lOloimet patevM huo~oIlenkilOsll)n tehtavaksl Huoltoa tarvilaansilloin,jos laileonjollakintavoinvaurioitunut, • SvMleveSkerouUdr1tlukvalifikovanymodOOrnIKUm.Pokudb)'lozafizenijakYmkolizpUsobempoSkozeoo(napl.poSkozeni uzenne su dOkiilme~ ya da Ozerine nesnelerin dO~mesi. YBOmura veya neme martlZ kalmas', normal bir ~ilde
esimerlliksijosseovirtajohtolaivirtaliitiotaonvaurioftunut.jossenpaa~eonkaalunutnesteM. jos sen sisaan on Uppunut MpajecihokabelunebozaslTCky,rozlitikapalinyneboupustllnipiediOOlunazafizeol,vyslaveoIzailzeoideSlinebo ~all~amasl ya da dO~Ortiimesl gibi herhangi bir fledenden dolayr hasara u~radlglnda servis talep edilir
jotakin,josseonallisiunutsateellelaikosteudelle,josseonpudonnutlaijosseeitoimioormaalisIi vlhkosti,nespr;ivnflfunkmoslneboupuslllnizalizeni).jetfebavyutitservisnlslu1tJu

~ Upozorenje [Srpski)
~ Advarsel (NOBk] ~Ispejimas (LletuvIl(kaIba)
·lnstalacijuZidnognosacatreb:;lobldaobavikvaliflkovaniillStalater.
• Brukenkvaif'Sertinslallatortilainstallereveggfestebfakettoo. • Prasykite, kad slenini Iaikikli montuolll kvaNfikootas montUolojas
·Preinstaladjeproveritet\lrstinuzida.Akozidnijedovoljool:vrst.ptvopostaviteojatanjanaZid,azaliminstalrajte
• Sjekkstyrkenllveg9flnlorduinslalleref.HvisdenikkBefsterllnok,mfIduforsterkeveggeoogderellerfesteproduktet • Pries montuodami pabkrinkile slenos tvirlu~. Jel siena nepakankamai tvirta. sutvirtinkrte j'l, ir tik \ada montuok~e produkt'l,
proizvodnazid
pflden prleSleOOS
• Nipodkojimuslovimanemojteda stavljateprsteupt'O(ezkojijeoastaokaoposledicaodvajanjapostoljasadoojeslrane • Du rna aldri p1assere fingeren i spore! som opJIstar i skillet ved slativel nedersl pa TV·en mens du installerer TV-en pi! • Monluodamlelevizorillpriesienosjokiubudunel;iSll.itepi~lolgriovel~susidariusltarptelevizoriausirstovo.Kylaeleklros
televizOfalokomnjegoveinstalacijenazid. Postojiopasnostodstrujr.ogooara
veggen.DetertarelorolektriskSlol. i!l\rovospavojus.
'ObaveznopokrijleprOfezpoklopcemkojiseisporutojesatelevil:oromprenego!tozavr!iteinstalacjunazid.
• Kompaoija Samsung Electronics ne mo.fe se smatrali odgovornom za ostE!tenja proiZvoda koja su naslala kao posledica
a
• 50rg tor dekke til sporet med dekselet som tolgef med TV-en lor du ful~orer TV·inslallasjonen pA veggen • Prie~ baigdami montuoti televizori\l prie Sienos u2:denkrte griove~ kartu 50 televizoriumi prislatytu dangteliu
• Samsung Eleclronics skal ikkeholdes ans~arlig Irx sl<.aOOr pi! proouktet $010 skyl6es at produktel erinstallert patel mate. • Sam50ng Electronics' nebus atsakinga u~jokiil.~alil.produktui. par:!ary1i1.neleisingai pritvirtinus produklil.
njfl90~neDOgovarajlJ¢einslalaclje
• Etterinslallasjoneomflduikkellengepaproduktetogunngastotmotproduktet. • Pritvirtin~niekO nekabinkiteant produkto irjo nejudinkite.
• Nakoninstala,*nemojtedaseoslanjatenaproizvOdiizl>egavajtej3tevdaranjeproizvoda
• Narduinstallererproduktelpflelannetsted.brukerdudesammeskruenesomlulglemedproduktel.(Dukankjope • Kai rnonluojate produktil. kiloje vieloje. nauook~e su produklu prislalylus varllus. (Ga~te pirkli varZtus is savo produkl0
• PrilikominstalOOjeproizvodanadrugojlokacijikoristileistezavrtnjekaoonekojiseisporubJjusaprolzvodom(Zavrtnje skruenehosproduktlaverandoren,) bekejo.)
mo.feledakupileodprodavcaproizvOda.)
It Vlktigesikkerhetsinstruksjoner It Svarbiossaugosinstrukcijos
~ Va!nabezbednosnauputstva
• LesdisseinslnlKsjonene. • Tavarepadisseinslruksjonene. • Perskartyk~e ~ias instrukcijas. • Laikykites siltinslrukdj4.
• PrOCilaite ova uputsNa. • Satll'la~eova upulstva.
'Vaeroprnrer1lsornpaailBaltvarsler • Folgalleinstruksjoner. • Allueipkile demesj i visus isp(!jimus • Vadovaliil~s visomis instrukdjomis
• Po~tujte sva upozoreoja • Pratile sva uputsNa
·Ikkebrukdelteapparalelinaerhetenavvann • Reogjorkunmedenl11rrklut • NenauOokile Sio aparato s.alia vandens. • Valyk~ebk sausa Sluosle.
• NemoftedakoristiteaparatubliZinlVOlle. ,CistteiSkljutivusuvomkfpom
• Ikkeblokkerventilasjonsilpningene.Installerisamsvarmedprodusentensinstrulls;oner ·Neblokuol<.itevenlliavirnoangl{.montuokilepagalgamnt"Ojoinstrukcijas
• Nemo~edablokirateolvOfezaventiadju, Instalirajteuskloousauputslvimaproiz'lodata.
• Ikke instaDer i naemeten av varmekilder $Om radialoref, varmeovner. komfyrer eler andre apparaler (inktudan 1000terilere) • NemontuokileSaI~SiIumossattinill,pavyzd!iui,rOOiator""sildytlJVl{.viryklill~kitllsiluIII<1skleid!ianCillaparatll(iskaitanl
• NemojtedainstalirateublizinlizvoratoploIekaoslDsuradijatori.grejalice, petiidrugiaparati{podrazumevapqatavaee)
~ sliprintuvus)
kojiproizvodeIDplotu somploduserervarme.
• BarebrukekstraulSlyrllilbehorsomerspesifisertavprodusenlen • N3iJdol<;~e till garnrno;o nurodytus ~aisuslpriedus
• KoristMesarnopribor/dodatkeajajeupolfebaplepDrueenaodstraneproizvOOata
• Kre~kitk i kvalifikuolos technlnes prie~i(jros speciaJislus atlikti visus techllirH!s prie~iilros dar~s. Reikia atikU aparato
• Servisiranjebiiskljoovotrebalodaobavljakvalifikovanoosoble.5eMsiranjejeneophodnousluCajudajeaparaloStE!ten 'laallserviceulforesavkvaliflsertservicepersonell, Servicekrevesnarapparalelhalblittskadelpilenelleranneomate.
technin~ prie~iiil<\. jei jis buvo pa!eistas, pavyzdbui, sugadinlas;o maitinimo laidas ama kistukas, islietas skyslis alba i
na bilo koji natin. npr, ako je oSteeen kabl iii prikijutak za napajanje. ako je u aparal prosuta teenosl i~ ako su u njega somwomledningeneilerslikkontakten.delharbliltSllRv<eskepaapparalelollefsluppelgjenstanOerpaapparalet,
apparatelharblillutsattlorregnellefluklighetdetluogerefil.kesomnormaltellerharblittmistetibakken. aparal'l,jkritoobjek!l{. aparalas aplijo alba iii palekodregmes, ~s neveikialinkamai arba buvo numeslas
upali predmeti, akoje aparat bioizloieo kiSi iliviazi, ako ne n.di ispravno ili akojeispu~ten

It Hoiatus [Ee.til .:t, Upozorenje [Hrv.tskl]

It A1U\h:lU ['\MU]
'PalunkasutageseinakronsleinipaigaldarniSekskvalilitseeritudpaigaklajal • Monliranjenosatazapostavljanjenazidprepustitekvali!iciranomrnonlateru
• ·hJ,.~til~1""~6\"Vt!l~111liLilu;:',,~6\,,yl.ln1rn!:i~"~j.(i:i"
• Enne seadme paigaldamist konlfollige seiM tllgevusl. Kui tugevus ei ole piisav, siis tllgevdage kindlasti esma~ seina ja • Prije montranja plovjerile cvrSloCU zida, Ako l:vrsioCa nije zadov~avajuCa. obavezno pojatajle lid prije montiranja
• ~n"'flilllFl1111U.fJ"U.1"'IIil"HU"~iluVt'l~"~6\,, rI1Hti"!IFl111lU.fJ,,u,.,,'lilL'AtI"WLI
paigaldageseejareltoodeseinale urBdaja
'hJ"Fl~iI'hsFl111lIhl""'tI""Hi:i"nilu 'lln{ju~""91ii"Ht!lilJ'ifU';l\inlhJHU~
• Mitte mingil juhul iirge sisestage leleri senale pajgaldamsel oma sorme teleri all olevasse avausse, lOis tekkis seaR aluse • Pr~ikom montiranja televizora na zid rri u kom slueaju ne glJfajtB plSle u utor nastao odvajanjem podno1ja na dnu
• -HllJl'lLl~flla"tu~il"~1.I\91'llnn11U!ln'llli,,91inuRl"tlLI,,'I't\1i'iRu tU'lJfU~Vt"91ti,,'I't\"i'iRininlluHu"illn~
eemaldamiseIVastaseljuhulvOitesaadaeief::bilOOgi. televizoraPostojiopasnostodstrujnogudara.
\~AtllA ill'll'H:iu~nU'lln'l'livhfl .. ~
• Enneteleriseinalekinnilamistkatkeavauskiodlasttelerigakaasasolnudkaaoega. • Prjedovr!enjamontiranjatolevizoranazid.utrxobaveznoplekrijtepoklopcemisporutenimuztelevizor
• 'Itl1Al:lA.j-il"~"nRl1~ntl~l:lA1'I,,j]tilll1l1't\rl'IPlu niluVt"'~fil\{lunl1"Fl6\,,1't\,.f1Ru~inlluHU"'lUlilhall
• SamsungEleclrooicseivastutaiikskl'iikmilisetootekahjustumiseeest.mistulenebtooteebaOigestpaigaldamisest • TvnkaSamsurtgElectronicsnijeodgovomanizakakvoostecenjeproizvOdazbognepravilnogmonbranja
\,I1rn
'ParastpaigaldamislargerippllgetoolekiiljesningvaRigell'isiseidkokkupl'irileidtootega. • Nakon montate uredaja na zid. nemo~e se naslanjati na proizvod i izbjegavajte snaino udaranje.
• 5amsu09 E,lectronics 'litj]"nu'1I{jA~ilFll1lJ~f!ltl ..n lJtA' Vt~I\AtiullllHt!lFlIlN'" ZUlt1""lJl'llnn11"9l6\"
• Tooleteisea5Okolltapai93ldamisekskasutagekruvisid.misontootegakaasasolnlllegaidenlsed. (Kruvisid saateosta • Priikommontifanjaproizvodanadrugomjestokoristile islevijkepopulonihkojisuisporute11isprolZVodom (Vijke moiele
Ht!l~IIN'f'I'lll~\llJl~l'llJ
omatootemiiiija~.} nabavitikoddobavljataproizvoda)
• '>Iti"'llnnl1"A6\" -HllJ1'>1UH:I~I\{u'"U<l~\l:lnltllJ,,"11n'S~u't\nH:lFlJ'ifU.r.U.1'"
~Olulisedohutusjuhised It Vafnesigumosneupute • tt'1"U1H:I~J\(ll.r.ttl"Fl~,,'l'>llJtUA1U'>l'.J,,~U 'Il.l1Flt1lM1'1l{lFlI"llVt!itilwfLIIJlIUHt!lAJ'ifU';"
• Lugegeneedjuhiseidlabl. • Holdkeneedjuhisedalles • ProCilajte ove upule. • Sacuva~eove upule. (l.\fUl'l11l11nilill'ln1~\lRl~'lln~tlluHt!lAJ\fU';")
'P60raketiihelepanukOlkidelehoiatustele • JargigekOikijuhiseid • Obralite pozomost na sva upozorenja • Slijedite sve upute
.:t, AluunhA1UR1111t1lulAl'iul1i111t'if\l
• Argekasutagesedaseaootveel3heduses • Puhastageainuttkuvalapiga • Nemojte korislitiovaj uredaj blizu VOlle • za Ciseenje kofist~e sarno suhulkaninu
• inufiluu~ultil ..'ltltl • 1tl191~I\lJfiluu~\ill\o\inli'l)
• Argekalkeiihtegiveotilatslooniava,paigaldagevaslavaltlootjajuhistele • Neprekriva~evenlilaciiskeotvore.rnontirajtesukladooUpulamaploiz'lodata.
• tlaii~~llJfil~A~U~~\lll~ • l.lllii"~llJ~lUU~Ulfl"'>IlJ~
• Argepaigaldageuhegisoojusallika,niirtekSradiaatOfite,ahjudevOimuudesoojusterilavateseadmele(sealhulgas • Nepostavlate uredajubiziniizvoratopiinekaostosuradiiatOfi,spremnicitopline,~tednjacl iidrugiuredaji(ukljutujuCii
• L1t11t'll~Afil"j]il{ltn<lllu'lil • vllFl111ll'l~"191FlllJH1U.\l"L't\1{jU
v6imendile)liihedusse pojatala)kojlproizvodetoplinu
• L1~l£1Fl~L1""~Ult1illnll'l "91i"AllJfilUU~U,ltlil~~Ht!lA~VTltU
• KasutageainuRlarvikuidjalisaseadmeid.misontootjapoo"ettenahlud • Krxisme sarno dodalne elemenleldodatnu opremu koju je naveo proiz'lodac.
• L1t11A~6\"tnilu\lR"~11lJ1L1U I.~U \llJ.l'ih 'Il""1~1I1tlFl111lf..U ~Al '>Ifilytln,.rn~u
'laskekOikhooIdusedsooritadakvalilitseeritudletlnindajatepoo" Hooldustonvajateostada,kuiseadetonmingilviisil • ServisiranjeprepustitekvalifidraoomservisoomosobljU.ServisiranjejepotreboopriMokakvomoSteeenju uredaja, kao
('l"llJl\"~~'~"tltllt1lf!ltl") Vt\lll'lilll\91Fl111l1ilU
vigastatOO,nMeksonvigaslalool'OOlujuhelvOipislikut,seadmepinnaleonsattunudvedelikkevOiselleleonkukkunud sID su ostetenje kabela napajanja ~i u1ikata, prolijevanje lekutine i~ pad predmela na uredaj, izIoienost uredaja klSi ~i
• tilytln'SrnSlilWH/ytln1iu.u~'hs9.~HllFlril\lUSlIYn{ju
objekte.seadeonsattunudvihmav{liniiskusekiilte,eitoiminormaalsellvOlonmahakukkunud. vlazi,n~splavanrooilipaduredaja
• 1tl1Flt~\lFl<l~n1iJlt111!~1191j]~11lJi~l:lu~tl11,,~n1'tl i... "jjnl11111.,,~n1'tllbLlYT.l.n'S~'lA~U91)
llJ~!ltI\llt1 ~t1U l'l1t1'll'lvll'>l!L1tl~nllFll1lJ~lftl'>lltl Il'lJLI"~\l"1\lnti'l '>If.. ll~Flf;l\l ..u'll'lyl.ln'S(\I
yl.ln,.rncn\.llwull!L1Fl111l1lu 'liJlojl~lUA11ltln" \lfilM~ll

.&. noneplAMeHHft (YlpaIHCbQ) [EM'lvlfl:a]

·nonpociTb4wiBuiB3iBC1(H;(Illf1eHH~3aKpinHTMHaCTiHHHilKpoHWTeMH • Avaetal£ Ot tVCN tl&~Eu~tvO ltXVIKO Irlv tYKalljOTao~ TOU Ol~lIiy~OlO<; lono€ltlf)tlf)(; OlOV loixo • ltlJnOJlJaa~le KaanH¢l"uMpaH le~tl~K, 3.a A3 ~H<:Tan~pale CleHtlaTa ~OHJOna
• nepenTHMHKBCTaHOBHTHKpoHWTeilH,nepeBipTeMiLll1icTbCliHH.flKlI\OcTiHaMe,QOCl31HbOMiLll1a.YKpiniTbii,aTW\i • E.\.tY~lt I~V OVTOX~ IOU loixou nprv ono Tf)V Ton06tT~OI) AvOtv dval op~uo o:rv&UIKOo;, <WOVTiolt va MOXOOtlt lOY • npoeepele c"naTa Ha "J.aI!bJ(,I1HBOCTTa npeJl~ MOIllHpaltelO. AKO "JAI!blI(fIltBocna tie e IlOClalb~Ha, on~TaMle ce
BCTaHOeiTbB"pi6HaCliMi TolXO KOI, Ol~ ouvtxoa, 10n09t1~01! 10 1rp<j'6v01OV loiXo Ila nQ,QCHn"le Cletl31a H nocne Hl'lClan~paMle nPDAYKla Ha Cletlala.
• nUl ~ac BCTaM06/IE!MMH TeneBoopa Ma cliMy Ja *Q,llH"X 06cTaB"H He BCTpow1~~le nanb~i BnaJ, ~lI\M yTBOPK>ClbC~ nicJl~ • KoTti I~V 10nG9tll)O~ I~< If\AtOPOO~< OlOV loixo. ~~v 13d<!l! a! KOliio n!piTIlWO~ 10 MXrul.O 00< al~v !YKon~ nou • npt'l H~~aKB~ 06clO~lenCTea lie noc13B~ille npl:>Cla C" BuenHaT"Hala, K0lI10 ce 06pa3yBa npH OTllen~He Ha
BiJI'CJlIl3HH~niJIcTaall\BHHJYTene8iJopaICHycp"J"xypa)l(eH~e11e«'lpll'lM"MClPYMO!>l OIWlOuPytira, 010 O'fljltiO bnou ~ [lao~ tvWvtl(l' ~t TO K01W jltpol; II)(; II)Atopool)(;. YnOPXtl ~rroUVO\" l)AmponAf]~io~ ClOt1Ka-raOTIlOll~HareneBH30pa.JlOKa-roflOClaB~leleneB\\~aHaCTeMalalJlMaooaCHOC1011OKOBYllap.
• nepw Mi>l< 3aBepw"T" BClaItOIl1TeHH~ TeneeiJopa Ha CTiMi. 060e'~J~oeo 3.aKpMMle fla3 KpMWXOlO. ~~a 1l0000atTbC~ LKI • 4lpovrlOlt VO KOAVljlUt I~V tYKon~ ~t 10 ~dAu~\IO nou (Il.1VOOtutlll)V Tl)~t6poOl), npoloo oJ.oMf)pWotlt 1l)V lOnolltll)Ol) • Yeepele ceo ~e Cle noKpwm llenll31HHaTa C KanaK<!, npe,QOCTaset! CTeneB"30pa, npej:l~ Il3 JaBl:>pWHle
1ene8IJOpa. II)<; lr)/lt6pa0~<010V loiXo. "HCTMMpaltelOHaCTetia.
• KOMnaHi~ Samsung Eleclronics He Hece ai,qnoai,qanbHOCTiJa 6yllb'~Ke OOWfD,ll)l(eHHH B"pOOy, lIIO CTMOCSl~epeJ MOfO • H ualptia Samsuog Electronics 6tv ~tpv KOjlio tu8wl) yKllU'f.,6vVlIlIt< 010 npoiOv I.OVW(lKOldAAl)Al)~ 10n06tll)OrK IOU 'SamsungEleetronicsHeeOlr080peHJaH\\~aKB"nOBpe,Il"HanpQ,Qyna,npooJnHJalll"OTHenpaBWlHOnOCTaBRHe.
Heel,a,OOBi,liMeBCTaHoeIleHHH • Moo II)~ 10n06tll\Ol).III)V Kpt~talt ano TO npljov KOI vo Olf~tUytlt lk; IO'Xupt~ KpoUOtl~ 010 npOibv • Cne.Q nOCTaB.llHeTO He ce ye~cBallle 113 nPDAYKTa llllmreaille C"nMll ~A3P\\ no 1'IefO.
• niCJ1~aCl~OlllleMM~BMpo6yHe8#QlilbHaMbOlolylao6epirailleMoroewCMnbH"XYll3piB • KalO Hlv movalon06tll\Ol) IOU npoJ6vfoo; O! KonOKlIiM~ 8to~, va XP~OI~OlrOitilt iOI!~ l3iOC~ lit aUlt~ nou ouvoOC(loov 10 • KoralO npeMeCTBale npoA)'Kla Ma IlIIYTO MRClO.llJnOJlJBa~le Cl:>UlMle BMHToee KaTo le3H. nPBJIOClaeetl~ CHero
• Y e"~aaKY nepellClaHOllf1eMH~ BHp06y BiHUIOMy Micui BHKOp"CTOB)'iiTe r8"HT", aHMorNtti 110 T"X, U\O flll,ll3llar1"Cb flO npoi'bv (MnoptiT! va avo¢Otlt n~ 13l&~ ano IO~ nwAr)l~ IOU np0i6V100;) (Ml))I(eIl33aKynHTeeMHroeereOlllOCTa8'l"KaHanptlllYKTa.)
BHp06y.(rB"MTHloi0lKll3npMJlOO1"ynOCT3'lMbH"1t38Mpo6y)
&. IIlIJaVTIKt~ o6llVit~ V,a lilY aaql6:Atla &. Ball(HH HHCTpyKllHH 3a 6e30nacHocT
.&. BallUTMlli iHCTpyK41i3TeXHiKM 6eJneKM • nptl'lE!lElle leJl1 HHcrpYKll~\\ • 33naJeTe leJ" lIHCTPYKllMH
'~llOolcOuTi<Ik;OOI)yit< ·KpoT~Ol!(lUlt<Tl<O&wit<.
·npo'-lMTaillelliiHClpyKllll. • 36epeJlCilbiHClPYKWIHa"'aM6yTHc • Mput un6!+'f) 6At< II~ npo(l60nOIl\O!l~. • AwAou8r)tm 6M~ 11< oo~vit~ • BJet.tele 1101\ BH"iIlaH"e 1lCM~~" npe,qynpe)l/,/letlHH. • Cnen,aa~Te BC""K\\ MHClPYKU~M.
• 3aepTaMle yeary Ha ad nonepeA*eHH~ • .lIOTP"",yiiTea.ydX iIlcrPYKlliil. • M~ XPI)OI~onOltilt aUI~ I~ OUOI(W~ KovrU 1]( vtp6. • Na 1(080pi(ut ~6vo lit tva Olt'{VO navi 'He\lJOOmBa~lel(l3\lana(laTypaB6nH3OCTllOeo,aa ·nO'!"C1BaMlecaMoCbCcyxan.pna
'HeB"Kop~ToByiilenpHCTpiMno6nMJYllO,till '41\C1MleopHCTpiiln"wecyxOIOralNipllOlO • Mf) wo<m TO ovOiVII010 t~OtplOllo(i. Ton06ucflt OUII<pW\KIII! 11< oo~yit< IOU KOlaOIU:UaOl!\ 'HeJaKp"BaiiTeHHKaKBlteeH1MJIa~HHHOTIlOp\l;HH<:lMl\paI11eBCb01BEllCTeHeCHHClp)'KUl\ItTeHanpDH3BOll"TenH
• HeMH<:lanMpaMTe BIl1ItJOCT 110 HJTO'lHH4Il 113 Tonn"K3 KaTO pa,llHaToplt 10MlIHHH perynaropM. tIIlHIlII)'Ill nneill:>p~
• He Ja61!GroByiiTe aetHM~lliMHi OToop"; BMKoHyMTe BClaHOBJleHH~ Bi,liOOBi,!l,i;O flO iHCTPYK~iM ellp06HHxa • M~v lon08tTtilt KOvro Ot nf)vi~ etp~lf)l(l~, onWl; KoAopl,tp. O!p66tp~o, .,ooPI'OlJ~ ~ oMt< OUOKwt<
'HeBCTaH0llf1!OilTen~Tpil1n06n"3~lI)Kepenlenna,HaOpH(fl3Ao6irpiBil'iiB,ll3l'illKiBTenna,ne<+eM~"iHWHxnpt1CTpoIB (ou~lrtjllAoIll3avo~tvwv !vI<fXlJHi!V) nou napUyovv €ltp~Oll)l(I. (B(flIO'lHletlHOjIOInaaTenlt).K0H10npoll3BeJK,1l8110M"K3
(BI([)IO'IaIO'l" niJICMn!O!la'li), ~Ki rllMepylOTb TeMO • No XP'10,~onOitilt 1I0VO 10 npooopl~~ralt~opl~IXlTO nou l(09opi(ovTol anO IOV i<.OTOOW.KlO1l\. • lo!JnOIl3aaHTe caMO npltCnoco6neM"R 3.a Jal(pene.aHela~cecoapt'l, onpelleneHI1 OT npoM.'lBO,l\Hlen~
• BMKOP"CToByiiTe n"we npMaAA~, BKaJaMe BMpOOHHKOM. • Ava9t(llt OM< Ik; tpyoo-it~ otlll3l~ Ot (IO'KtU~tVO npooWTrlKO OtPPI~. AnolTdT(l1 otpl\l~ ov f) a\JaKw~ unoord VljllO • 3a llaI~an.B aHA cepSMJ ce 06pl:>l.lIaMTe Kl:>M KB8nH¢lHllMpaH cepallJeH nepcollan CepBIIJHHTe ycI1~flI ca Me06xOIlHMlI,
,ypa31flOlpOOHBo6cnyrOBysalltti3aepTaMIBCllAomanj¢liKoBatlorocneljianiCTa.06cnyroeysa_IIflO6.l:i!lHe.K(lflIlnpHCTplil6yM ~t onOlOVO~nOl! lp6no, onWl; opBoPlltvo KOAWOIO ~ npi(o ptU\Xlloo;, m<iKT~ uYPDV ~ avrlKt,~tvwV 010 tOWUplKO IlK _oraloanaparypala e6wla HapaHHBaHa no H~Kalfb8I1il'iHH, KaTO HOOp"",ep WHypa Ja enelfl'ptf-l&Cf:OJaxpaHB8Me IIflM
6yllb·~KII'" 'IH!t01ol I1OWfOA)KeHO, HanpHKIl311 nowl~eHO la6enb )I("aneHH~ ~ WTel(ep, Ha npocrpil1 nponHTo piJ1MlfI' ~M enae o-U(lKW~~, iK8t(l~ 11)<; OUOKturK O( 13POX~ ~ uypaoio, (]V Otv MIlOUpyd KOVOVIKO ~ (]V ntOtl KliTw l.lIencenacanoepe,o,IlMM,pa3n~Taele<tMOClMJIlto6eIfl'Mcan~MHBl:>pXyanapaTypala,anapaTypalae6I1flaHJI1aratla
lllI\i\cbnpe.l:lMeT.tlaI1jlHCTpiMnolpanMnHt:panriAOUly'lll8QJ1Ora,npMClpiMMenpatllQtH3J1e;l<IIlM'IIIHOIol'lllBnaa Hall~MHanara.HElpa60lllHoplola1lHO."n"e~naHJnycKat13

.:t:. Bridiniijums (Latvifliu] .:t,Opozorilo [Siovenielnaj ~ Varning [Svenska) "'Wi!> ['1>X]

• Sienas kron~teina pi8$tiprinManu lIZliCiel kvaufi~lam spedfllislam • Slensl<.inosilecnajn.astenonamestiusposobljenmonter, ·Endastkvaliliceradepersonerfarinslallefavaggstatrvet • i.?l*$:~AA$:~V.IDittH~.
'PirmstlZstadisanas~rbaudielsienasizturibu,Jasieoanavpietiekamiizluriga, • Prednamestitvijopreveritetrdnoststene.Cestenanioovoij stabilna.jo najprejokrepite in ·Kontroilefaattviiggenarbiirandeoogf6leinstaltatKHl,Orndeniirffirsvagskaduselili • tt:t;:a;tiiilf.#tm:iII~~II. ~oml'tIt.J9.liIi:r-",
nostiprinieltountaduzsladieliekiirtuuzsienas Sflle nalo namest~e oosllec attf&sl~rkaOOnp;\ lampligts!lltinnandumonterarproduktenpilvaggen SU'lti:l.fi!Jolilltjlj.it4&5f,:t;:«.t-1;;;.
'Piesliprinottfljevizorupiesienas,nekadazi~anel~ielpirkstusgr~,kasizveidola • Paz~e. da v utrx, kl med namestitvijo lelevizo~a na steoo nastane pri odstranitvi slojaJa od 'DufilrinteunoornagraomstiirldigheterfOrainfingrarnaidesparsomiirgjOfdal&att • ;m1l-1"":t;:«f~1.I.t~, ~u. ...mm:$It.I1i~*Mfi'i:l!!lII.
atdalols1aUvutelevizoraapakM,Pastavele~lriskasstrhastriecierlarisks spodnjegadelalelevizOfja, nevstaviteprsta.Obstaja ne~amO$telelo:.triCoegaSolta separeraslativetpaTV:nsundersidanflledanTV;ninstalieraspav1iggenDelfinnsrisk -ifl1l~-1'l • • rnfl!~.
tJJ1CH-fiiltJ;}fFjR::f'6JiIH·fiiillAl!!lH!pq.
'PirmsbeidzaltelevizorauzstMisanuuzsienas,ooteiktinosedzielgropiartelevizora ·Zagolovile.daulorpredOOkootanjemnamestilvetelevizorjanastenopokrijetes fors16lar. • SU~rl'ffffl:-1~~H'HI~iiTlml!!lllil..t, ~1lJlj:7\:fi'i:;mllH.I!.;:gilJa..t
komplektflieklautovaku pokrovom,oobavljenemoble~vizorju. • Sf.! till all tacka over spilren flied skyOdel som medfoljer TV:n, innan viiggmonteringen av 1t.I~,~.
• Samsung Electronics neuz~emas nel<:ao:!u albilcli~ par iel\artas bojajumiem, kas raduSies
nepareizasuzstadisanasreluMta
• 5arnsung Electronicsne odgova~a za poSkodbe izoolka. do kalefihje priSlozarooi TV:nslutfOrs. • '=:1..tltl!lI&::rZ~«jftlitt-JfffiJjJJ'iI'~rl' M:".
neprimernenamestiNe. ·samsl.W'ogElectronicskanintehallasansvarigf&slIadorpilproduktensomOfsakatsavalt ·:t;:a;ta, wmff*&~..t~ill.~~~&~~~~~Qa.
• Pee uzstMi~anas neattalstieties pret iekMu un pasargajiet ieMrtu no triecieniem • Ponameslilviizdelka.na~nidovolenoobeSatidrugihslvari.lzdel\atudineizpostavljajIe produktenharinstalleratspaettlelaktigtsart • ff-1tft!!t!L.~i'i:t;:!iil.r.r~, jfmWa:~M~lt.Jt'hHB~lt.ItI!,f..
'Atkartoliuzstadoliekartucilavieta, izmantojiettadaspa$assl<.riNes. kadasriekJautas rnotnimudarcem. 'Enerinstallahonenfaringenhiiogaiproduk!en,undviki~nstorapilfrestningarp;\ (u~~~iI&m~~.g.~~. )
iekMaskomplekla.(SkriivesiespejamsiegMaliesooiericesizplalMja) • Pri namesblvi izdelka na drugo rne5lojetrebauporabili vijake, kisoenakiprilo~enirn ob produkten
nakupu. (Vjake lahkO kup~e pri Irgovtu,) • Om produktan monteras om pa en annan plats ska samma skrll'lar anvindas sam de som ",aIU'Jl<NOIl
~SvarfgasdroslbasinstrukciJas
medl6ljdeprodukten, (DukankOpasl<.ruvamatrflnproduklle~erantoren) ·i'.BIU'i3~llf8,l/. ·;.{¥flfil~i1I:ll,II.
'Izlasietsisinstrukcijas • Saglabajiatsis instrukcijas ~Pomembnavarnostnanavodila
·jIM:@:~JiflV1!i. ·llill'i'fJi.lHl!:Il,II.
• Navod~a preberite • Navodila shranite.
It ViktigaSakerhetsanvlsningar
• t;lemiet ~ra visus bridinajumus • Izpikliet visas instrukcjas • .l1mffiti>l<A«fffflIlUill. • l'!li!mf£'iT>i!.fT;R'iI.
'Upoiltevajlevsaopozorila 'UposlevajtevsanaVOllila • Uis 00 hiir inslnlktionema. • $parade hariostrukhonerna ·.l1i'JJ.«a.fffoJi!JiLCJ. It"'~ililt.lrll:8,l/ilfT:t;:« •
• Nelietojiel Soaparaluru udens luvumfl. • Tirietbkai <If sausudrani~u
• NeoosproslojietventiacijasaNefes.uzslliojelsaska~aarra1otajainstrukdjam
• Napraveneuporabljajtevbli!inivode. • tistitelahkosamos suhokrpo ·F6laiavamingar. ·Foijallainstruklioner • !'i'JJljff.ilg:,AA.lt.lfff",J:~i!f (~~J:.!IH, ~(JjH. *tJltt@~M!:*H
• Pazite, da ne boslezakrili odpnin za prezratevanje, Napravonamest~e v skladuz navodii ·Anv!indinteapparalennaravatten. ·RengOreridaslmedtorrlrasa. (£pq((.jl{ft:H.I!:II) :fi~.
• Neuzsladiel si"uma avotu tuvurna, p~am, pie rooiatoriem, slldll3jiem, krflsnim vai
proizvajalca • Blockera inle nagra veotilationSOppningar. Inslallera i enlighBl med lil!verkarens inslru~lioner. • ililffm~iliilitlUE:lt.JlImlm1*.
dtasaparat{iras(ieskaitotpastiprinatajus}, kasizstarosiltumu.
• NapravenenamesUtevbli!iootoplotnlhvirov, npr. rad~tOfjev,odprtinzaogrevanje.pea ·lnstaHeraOOnintertaraenvarmekillla.l.ex element. spis ellef annan apparat (t.ex • !llm~Jifldn-If'F!lEb~t!Q!JJliRA.7i:~. ~flllif.llH-foJHU.ll;'f.
"etojiettikair3tollijanOfadTlIispiericesvaipangiekartas
alidrugihnaprav,kiproizvajajotOjJloto(vkljucnozojacev-alniki} fbrstarllare)somgeoererarvarme ~1Ii!f~nMiliAtA.II,
'UztiCietapkopikval~tiemtehniskAsapkopespakailloiUmusniedz~jiem,Apkope
irnepieciesama.jaaparatUrarbojata,piemeram,jairbojatsbarOOanasvadsvai
• Uporabljajle sarno oplemo za namesti1evlooda1llO opremo. ki jo navede proizvajalec 'Anvaridendasttiibeh6rsorniirspecifJceradeavliiilfflrkaren ~fI~~n~~,~$~Aa~ . • Rffm~n~~It.J~~~,
'Zavsapoplal'ilaseobrnitenausposobljenoservisnoosebje,Popravilojepotrebno,te • Ovel1at all slags seMce till behOrig servicepersonal. Service kravs om apparaten har ~5tIE~If'F'!&~lIit. ~ail.l"T!lUt.
kontaktdaksa.jaieUrlIiirielijisSl\idrumsvaiiekritiskadspliekSfllets,jaaparat[irairbljUsl
jenapravanakak~enkoNnaCinpoSkodovana,PrimersopoSll.odbenapaja!rlegakablaali skadalsp;\nagotsiltt,t.ex,altstrOmsladdeoeller-kontaktenharskadats.vatskahar
paklautalielusvaimitrumaiedaroibai.JaJanedarbojasoormalivaiirtikuslnomestaze.re.
vlicnice, teje bila napravapolila s tekoono ali so na napravo pael~ kak~ni koli pledmeli. spiills pi! enheten. fl'iremal har laH~ oed pAden. oon har utsalts ler regn elier lukt, inte
ceje bila naprava izposlavljenade~ju ali viagi, ne daluje pravilnoai paje paella pollel1. fungerarsomOenskaBllerhartappats

;nOlTHlt
·1:·ilh-{)-li"r(tJ·i<'-V<A.Ul·I,,;~I\!UJi.~. .J..:.W..~IJ.ot...4jil""Ji-...,.p.yJ.o~ ;..;....!.4J!. ~..oli;...I ....~ •....s ........ ..s..;jI}-"",,,,,--,""-:;-,J.l""""'-iI.J!WoJ. 1·j7;,\'1I1;'l"'m'11UVIn;'lTlI'(I'j7n,1'1·')ll':lOmt'j7T1Il),vrmv '1v··
• 'id"dj):ml"i~litt'(J'l«-'illt. lI;t!4-!J;l l it.,HH\·j.:. ir'i*·e·'JtIJlI[~lJ~j*~ ~J.iJ.;WI<;"',jo£t,~~u:..JI..:.;lSl:l). ..,.p.jillJ,.i.J.:,t...JI"'~,;,,£t.. }~..s.iJ":.;...Jo....~U':"I.i.:i...IJ.I.~JY;Srj>,j.~jlJ,.i\~~I",,~~I. j7m'1v' .17")01l j7m ')'l'(l'j7'" ON .j7m j7'!l01l1'j7'" Ol'(jll').'1V ....)j7n '1!l'1'
I..'-ijlf:ld'i{;(',\i,. .-../L~I .,;,,¢ ........ }""<J,--'I~J_~,""'.J.~I) .1~m ... nH 1''111 t·jlTI '1 j)1l 1mbl InIH
• (F:\lf'\i.~/fVi<~j114~ I".lt·]. kitMR,tr.IH';~:lIfTmjIIIA'I!~l"lIk(~~'ojJt.:~ ji...IJ~,.JIJ.oWl..;...id-14 .... ::JI"""~I""'''''-,.)alI.J.<''''';'<iI':'''':;~It""'''1. J...y,y,.,,"''--'u,.)o,t ........ Ul''- ..>'...s:<j;":' ..>'1~J,..u.:.t;I..,.IoiI ..... f"'..:.-:;. J'lTl!l,lll "'H~In) 1~1l\:'.l y·ln ... 11J'l '1H nlllnH'" J'lN 0·]) '11'101 "'1j71l 01\:'.1), •
,,}~u'l /f~I£ft:J1"IW'l'j'. j!i'~11 Utl!!\i.(f.}f{£~~. O;:J.;*<...:.-I ...... ...,:JI~I.:".)o.i.~.J.:,I"Jl.)<..J ..... jltll..,.p.y.~.J-"jiIJI .,},'.... ,..,i..J!..s,.:.)o.i..~J.)j,.:..,.'4-;I.JY.~,t.)ij..>''-h.,:,;..:.I .... n])o nll"j7 .1'j7;'\ '111 ;'\'T'II'1U,l mj7T1'" nil), ""T'II'1U'" Tl'J'lnTl), 'Tllllfl.l
• !JIjf~'f*nl!l!lriIlLriflRiry.JP".l:i:*I"IIl'I~i I:, .'1\r; 11!',cl&:l\i.l!l!/fl{E!:; U't~:Ii J.:,W1.)c.<40Y.J.<.~'1\J.oi.J .....jAtlle"<Ji...-J\.~"""~I~';"£t.. "":'0I-'b..s"':":'Ji41~~')"'''''--'..J!u-"jj,l;''''''''';~j\J;i .... '':',:;..l...· TlI'1fl\:'.lnn.l
1/i.
• Hill r:li'~-1;''l·jlob.:ry.JfT/'iJ''''',\I11YlJ+, S"msunj( EI~'clr(}nics ~1;fJ!Jl.
.JI--~,;I\~~..:.......;...:.t",i0'~,)-oSamsungElectronics;S""',».>·
,..,,,.....,, ,J...--.,....u.u ........ ~ ..>'J...-- ... _i.;,J.~ <J1J!Samsung Electronics'
~n­ '1\:'.1 ...1i7Jl...... J'lfl'1\:'.1;)·)!l'1 ...'f'II'1U'1'l11)'1li'1i'10)1li'10Ily·ln;'\J'lNJ'lIo)'1\:'.1··
l'j7i'1'1I1;'\'r'II'1Ui'1
• 'i<1I<'~1&:1.i. i"I!lJ~~I~Y.~jJIi,1i+:"".lI,. .~""":'~<iI,:""",~,~·r<iI~ .... '1,..,.p.yl1.:...,. .'O':'»I,.;-.; .....u.:.J,:..- "1,7J'li'1 ),jllI 1)'1/l'1 1l11l1\:'.1 o'j1n'1 Tl"lnH), nN\:'.I11 i'11'N Samsung Electronics·
• 'ltii-'j{.,"·,\,',;rOli:liWfl)7) 'f.i:nu'l. i,'if*JIl'j,.'·,\M~lii\(.jt1HHj\l.i)((Jlltr. •\..... ~).~Ie" ........-lI..oltl~)¥I.-..=-' ...... I,JS-~~I..,...s.yi.>\o..I,.... ;,¢...,J.;.:.,.IJ....-. ... .,..,.:,<.;--"""CJ>,j.,hjl,...,.:,;,;Jjj,IJ....-.<.;,.,......jI....-; • ,1'117'1
(.!:£liIUM"''''\''J('H;I,\i.~HJ:~tJl,,)~~H. ) (.~I~Y'00 .....!-.I1 <.;..s.:yiS..oli;...I..,;...~J-jl',.:.s.,.~<JNJ,......>'.J.<-"I~J....-..~LL.. .1)'11l,1 '111 1),) yn'r n'rll!l"'fl IIlfl·...'1I(J·. l)'lfl" '111 11I\:'.I·i'1'1 I'H ,")j1ni'1i'11nN'1'
(..:.;;s:",I,~p-J....-.~"'\)} l~lA il"! ....I,:;.,.) ,.»1 •.0.:. o.:.l} J,.-.....\.>"'" 011 1j7!l10\:'.l O'll), 01'l'NJ \!!lln\:'.l"''1 \:'.I' .1nH Otj1fl)' 1),+fli'1 '1\:'.1 i'1lj7Jli'1i'111l1), •
(.1)'lfli'1 17!lOflO·1l),.lTlN\:'.II)1'rITl·»).lYIl1i'1
...... ..,......l..:.l............ ~
",lI;JOfl'J'I<~iI!OIl ~~'i1':'1.cJ..&. .....}, J.:, \--, lA J-l1~......, "'" • .>til,.... l~ lA J-.l1~......, UtI. J'lI),ll/JnJ'lIn'U),TlIH11i'1 ~
• i\!.IiJ.'i3:~.hI1.H!J. • /~WH.iJ:i)fi)/.tIIJ. ":'1j.;.~'J1 .::.,.Joo:i..1 • ..:.J,;':'~'JI.:;" l..,il • .:yiS"""'\~lAJ-lI~......,..-. ,.:.s ....ylAjJ..;.I..- .... .1'IIN1.i'1i'1 rlN II)'J'r'!l,7i'1' TlIN1.;)i'1 nN Nlj7'
·il::0:rfrh~;'f. ·.ij1I!i.\m((i5tI~J. .:.J,;':'~,!I"'\Sef\. ":'l~I<>lS..)l~I. .:yiS ..:."..:;.s..:.;.~}~4.l.io· .~.:).j{, ..J..,J..?+'y..>' .~r,)1I}. TlIN11i'1i'1'r)'1oNn.l),'1I1!l· Tln"IN,l '1)'1),'10'\:'.1'
• i,'i2!JnA;.l!.!itJll},;:i!./:/lt. • /xftJlj t-lJii!!.li"i,·iio'i. J.Oi<.i4";W:...J.i,~\~~. ..WI<Joo ..... ~J.t.+lII:;..~'i. ..:yiS ............ j....<i... J-ll--'......,~.)i,~j~I~J1.I,.<i ...... j'--'jl~. .,),'1), i'1\!!)" rl''rUIl nlrv), IJ'lIN,1j11' O'f)Tl),lj1),i'1Tl'\(/)fl),\!!f)n\!!i'1'1I'N'
• ir!PJ!t,1);HI"Jiilll-<!.ll. jj·WW.!f\ilJ:.lI~1jrt1i)/.H))i!!.ff'J<:'&. <...l.-..l1<s....,:J\~li,;,jlo-!Jl~,;.;,-i, .... ,..n~u-'O""';';"'I ........... 'i. Jot..:)N"'\t-4~4,.j4\.,;J
..... v...."").i,.:.~jI..;.) ..... &-o;,J.~~:f>..>'. .ll~·i'1 TlIN1.i'1'1 OHrl,,)' j'17rli'1'r \:'.I' ,lnllNi'1 'nrl!l nN olon'r 1'1'1 •
• i,~Y1n:IlH~\:m, In~~, 'k1i ' !&Jl:/J1l.{:-,"·U1\lit(nWf:i. (C!.fM.I]ltO ::';:~~\ ..:.'.>o.o!1 ,i .a...J1 ,l;;.:.;.w\ .)1+\ ,I o.....:.Jl ')6+'i1 Jo.o '}~I ..>'t...... ~ ¥,;.; ~Ji" 'i • ~ ........ .>.:.i.,..ljl,l\.oJ...s("' • .:.:&~~ '101 O'lIlTl .DIn 'lllH ,O'lIUN'Tllln Oi'1\!!'1) Oln rln'j11l rl)'117)' 1'j1rli'1'r I'N •
illH1tJ!["Ji::'&{;;,'·,\I,. .(..:.\fioIl.illi '-'!).J'~.>ly~I.s \ .:..:.4·~~·.»j.....J....ji..s.Jj£. •.>I.it...I~.,;w.I<.J-,jI~. OInO·j7·!lfl.l(O·l,lmJ'll),l'r)O·lnHO·l·V)f)
• Hflt:ffllJ$lliliil1iffl:.i::f(jIllJltl!£l'!. .~I<s....,:JIj.iu-'W'O-;..,.;.,..jI~I,l I..:o)'I..:.I.>o.o!I~I~I . <.;.~<.;..s.:...lrj'1"";...j.:.l--*'""'.~J...-..."..-v-I,.>-,,JS. ... I~..:.\--"'"""..-. 11~',1 ,,'-'111 il"~\!! 0'11'),1'(/0'1I'11i'1 o'j7'rn,l iJl \!!f)rl\:'.li'1~ \:'.I' •
• r;;;.III{';l\'I(f.Jffl:;)A.bllJtlJHJiJ[!1H):fll*. l},\:If,IBf.'l!.(Jf"H~)4,1I-J, ~1111!~t.t --'--"""<.;.Pllw...~I)Io-!J\~.uJ.t.)..l\~I"'I~J,...lI.~.:.. ..,.;. <J,)..J!~'""""'_IJ.J!I*"''\i.t..:-''..s.,.;\.ojJ;"ijl·~..,.:.jh_i ...... )..J'' \!Il'l rln·\:'.Ii'1 ·1)'1 1f)O'f)i'1 Tlll'\!!i'1 nlln "')!l ,HIi'1\:'.1 ~IO '1)fl TIll'\!! n'1),j7'1 •
~~!Ii)d~ltt::. l},\:/lt~l1.1jtli LTHlij.-t., f4MNA}f.1!':I.!iHli(HtJ'I'!&itI~(f.J ,i"',i·t,..:.lt,.,,\Jll--,L.,\"""'..>PJI~,i"'llJl.>l
.... J.su.t:;Jo.o,lJj...'<i4 ·.:ilJ.J')..:.,......--'4J.JIJ.< ........... ..>'.~,.>iI •.o.:..\$.:......"y,.~14, ...~.u.~ 1!l\:'.l1 OH .Oll!l '1f)\:'.Ini'1 nj1~oH '1),) OH 'rol'l'1 ,'i'1\!!'r) 111). O~!ll 1·\:'.I)1li'1 1\:'.11'1)
JP!'t'l', ,tj'LIF·.Y; I.nc!\\(ll;i'ttl,i, HJI.Vi!tlttll •.l ..J....... Ji~I-.>;~~r-'<-,I'-! ....)I,\y...Jl ....... -"'" ..:....I.>.:...,...y. 4,.>iS.,.:. fl<jok. ~,J..i ON .rlln'r'lIN O\:'.l~'r 'l\:'.lm l'\!!)Ili'1 OH ,1'\:'.I)f)i'11ITl '1H o'~!ln 1'1~l IN '1m
'1!l1'l'I!1)f)i'101f.1oIi'1111(J)'rIlI!lIl·Hl'l!1)fl,1
[~] [English] [Fran~is] [Fran~ais] [Espariol]
,t, 'B' .!f-~£1 ~j:I~ ¥J51I .2j1;!j ~lJI1E 12mm Ol{t. Lll.!f-0I148mm ,t, For installing the part 'B', an outer wall as thick as 12mm or more, ,t, Pourinstallerla partie'B', i1faulquelemurexlemesOOd'uneepaisseur ,t, Pourinstallerlapartie'B',vousdevezdispaserd'unmurexlerieurd'une LtParainstalarlapieza"B",senecesitaunaparedexteriordeun
ol{t£ltH.!ol'M.£?~LjCf. which has an intemal free space as long as 48mm or more, is minimalede12mmetl'espacelibreintemed'uneepaisseurminimalede epaisseur minimale de 12 mm, qui 000 presenter un espace libre inteme grosor de 12 mm 0 mas, con un espacio interior libre de 48 mm
Lt 71~1;!j0l1 W~ ~.£?E ~~LjCf StudOlI2~~ ~~OIIE 'A' required. 48mm. d'unelongueurminimalede48mm. omas
.!f-~Af§5fAiIR Lt Installation into a wall stud is not required. When fixing ittoa Lt IIn'estpasneeessairedel'installersurunpoteaumural.Utilisez Ltlln'estpasneeessaired'effectuerl'installationsurunpoteau ,t, Noesnecesariorealizarlainstalaci6nenunmontantedelapared
o (.:2E/O.O) .2j1;!j0l1 ~m 13mm£l ~ ~g ~ "B" .!f-~ stud,usethepart·A·. lapartie"A"sivousinstallezl'ecransurunpoteaumural. mural. En cas de fixation du un pateau, utilisezlapartie'A" Cuandosedebafijarenunmontante,ublicelapieza'A·.
'l0lIW51I?A1IR o Make a hole as large as 13mm in diameter and then insert the o Percezuntroud'undiametrede13mm,puisinserezlapartie"B" • Percez un trou de 13mmdediametre, puis inserez-y la o Haga un orificio de 13 mm de diametro e inserte la pieza 'B'
o (.::IE/O.O) e,gOI ~ 7fAI£t51 W~2 ~ 1;!j0l1 ~77fAI part"B"totheholeasshownintheimagesOandO. danslelrou,conforrnementauxiliustralionsOetO partie "B" comme iIIustre sur les images 0 et e comosemuestraenlasilustracionesOyf).
~~AI~ -* 'ag ~ x1l7i5fAilR • Alignthegripsinorder,push@lillitreachestheendof o Alignezlespiecesderetenuedansl'ordre,enfoncez@ o A1ignezlespoigneesdansl'ordre,poussez@jusqu'al'exlremitedumur, o Alineelasasas,empuje@hastaalcanzarelfondodela
o (.::IE/O) ~ .§ L{A~ ol~51I1;!j~2~ .!f-~oll;!ji!} ~~51 thewall,andthenremovetherestasshown in the images jusqu'acequ'ilatteignelafindumur;ensuite,retirezlereste puis6tezlerestecommeilluslredanslesimagesOetO. paredyquiteelrestocomosemuestraenlasilustraciones
~~ £j.'r.~ j;jl~ 5fAilR OandO. confonmementauxiliustrationsOetO. o Fixezlapartieapproprieeaumurjusqu'acequ'elletienne OyO.
o Fasten the wall-fixing partlill it holds on fast to the wall using • Vissezfenmementla pa'1iesefixantaumura I'aide des vis fenmement au mur a I'aide des vis foumies comme i1lustre o Aprieteconfuerzalapiezadefijaci6ndelaparedconloslomillos
the supplied screws as shown in the image O. fourniesconfonmemental'illustration0. dans l'image O. suministrados, como se muestra en la ilustraci6n 0

[Deutsch] [Nederlands] [Tjjrk~e] [Portugues] [Slovenscina]

,t, Fur den Einbau von Teil'B' ist eine Aullenwand mij mindestens 12 mm
WandstiirXe und einem Freiraum nach innen von min. 48 mm erforderlich.
Lt DielnstaliationaneinemWandtrageristnichtnotwendig.Bei
Befestigung an einem Trager ist Teil'A" zu verwenden.
o Bringen Sie eine Bohrung von 13 mm Durchmesser an und
selzen Sie dann Teil "B' wie in den Abbildungen 0 und 0
gezeigt in die Bohrung ein.
o RichtenSiedieGreiferderReihenfolgenachaus.driickenSie@,
bisdasEndederWanderreichtist,undentfernenSiedannden
Rest,wieindenAbbildungenOundOgezeigt
o Befestigen Sie das Teil zum FixierenanderWand,bises
sicheranderWandbefestigtisl.VerwendenSiehierfOrdie
mitgeliefertenSchrauben(sieheAbbildungO.
Lt Voorinstaliatievanonderdeel'B'iseenbuitenwandmeteen
minimale dikte van 12 mm en een inteme ruimte van minimaal
48mmlangvereisl.
Lt Instaliatieineenzogenaamde"walistud"isnietvereisl.Wanneeru
gebruikmaaktvaneen"walistud",gebruikluonderdeel'A'
• Booreen gat met een diameter van 13mmensteek
onderdeel'B'inhetgat,zoalsweergegeveninafbeeldingen
Genf).
o Duwdegrepenopdejuistemanierinhetgattotdat@
heteindvandewandraaktenverwijderderest,zoals
weergegeveninafbeeldingen6enO.
• Zetdewandbeugelvastmetdebijgeleverdeschroevenzodat
dezestevigaandewandisbevestigd,zoalsweergegeven
in afbeeldingO.
Lt "B" par~slnln kurulmasl i..in, 48 mm ya da daha fazla dahili
bo~alanasahip, 12 mmveyadahafazlakallnilktabirdl~duvar
gereklidir.
Lt Duvar somunuyla kurulum gerektinmez. Somuna sabitlerlken "A"
par~slJllkullanln
• 13mm~plOdabirdelika<;:IOveardIOdan'B'paryasIOI
resim(1)ve(2)'degosterildigi!?ekildedeligeyerle!?tirin.
• Resim (3)ve (4)'tegosterildigi!?ekildetlrnaklan
hizalaylO,(a)'ylduvannsonunagelenekadaritinve
kalan bolOmO <;:Ikann.
• Verilenvidalankulianarakduvarsabitlemepar~slOl
resim (5)'tegosterildigi!?ekildeslklcayapl!?ana dek
sabitleyin.
Lt Para instalara parte'B', e necessaria uma parede exterior com
a espessura de 12 mmou mais, quetenha um espa'<O livre
internode48mmoumais.
Lt Naoe necessaria a instalayao na estrutura de apoio da parede
Parafixarnumaestrutura, utilize a parte "A".
• Fa~ um orificio com 13 mm de diametro e introduza a parte
'B' no mesmo, conforme ilustrado nas imagens 0 e
o Alinheossupartes,empurre@naparede,ateaofim,e
remova 0 resto conforme ilustrado nas imagens 0 e O.
o ConforrneilustradonaimagemO,utilizeosparafusosfornecidos
para aparafusara partequevaifixarna parede, ate esta ficar
bemfirrne
Lt Za namestitev dela 'B" mora biti zunanja stena debela 12 mm ali
vei':in imetiznotraj prostprostor, dolg 48 mm ali vei':
Lt Zanamestitevnipotrebnouparabitistenskegapodpornika. Za
namestitevnapodpornikuporabitedel·A·.
o Naredite luknjo s premerom 13 mm in vanjo vstavite del "B',
kotjeprikazanonaslikahOin6.
e. • Vvrstnemreduporavnajtedrialainpotisnite@dokonca
stene. Nato odstranile preostalo, kotjeprikazano na slikah
OinO
o Spriloienimivijakilrdnopritrditedelzapritrditevnasteno,kot
jeprikazanonaslikiO

[Svenska] [Dansk] [Norsk] [Suomi]

Lt For installation av del "B", kravs en yttervagg som ar 12 mm ljock eller mer, med
ett mellanrum pa minst 48 mm.
Lt Instaliationmedpluggarkravsinte.Vidfixeringmedpluggskaduanvandadel
"A".
o Gor ett hal med en diameter pa 13 mm och for sedan in del"B" i halet sa som
visaspabildernaOochO
o Riktaingreppenochfor@tillsdennarvaggensslutochavlagsnaresterande
sasomvisaspabildernaOochO
o Fast vaggmontaget tills det sitter ordentligtfast i vaggen medde medfoIjande
skruvarnasasomvisaspabildenO.
Lt For at montere del'B' kraeves en ydervaeg med en tykkelse pa 12 mm eller mere, Lt Fora instalieredel'B"krevesenytterveggsom ertykkereenn 12mmsomhar Lt Osan "B' asentamiseen vaaditaan ulkoseina, jonka paksuus on vahintaan 12 mm
sam har et internt frit rum med en laengde pa 48 mm eller mere. intemledigplasspaminst48mm. jajonka sisalla on tilaa vahintaan 48 mm.
Lt Deterikke n0dvendigt at montere pa en stopevaeg. Narderfastsaettestilen Lt IInstallasjon ienveggstolpeerikken0dvendig. Nardufesterden ienstolpe, Lt Asennustaeitarvitsetehda pystytukeen. Kun kiinnitatlaitteen pystytukeen, kayta
stolpe,skaldubrugedel"A' brukerdu del "A". osaa'A'
o Lavet hul pa 13 mm i diameter og indsaet del "B' i hullet som vist pa billede 0 • Lag et hull som er 13 mm i diameter og sett deretter del "B' inn i hullet som vist o Teehalkaisijaltaan13mmkokoinenreikajaasetasiihenosa"B"kuvienGja
ogf). pabildeOogf). f)osoittamallatavalla.
oJustergrebenekorrektvedattrykke@indtildennarendenafvaeggenog • Set1handtakeneirekkef0Ige,dytt@tildennarendenavveggenogfjern o Kohdistakahvatoikein,painaosaa@seinanperalleastijapoistasenjalkeen
derefterfjernerestensomvistpabiliedeOog0 deretterrestensomvistpabildeOogO. muutosatkuvien Oja o
osoittamalla tavalla
o Brug de medf01gende skruertil at fastg0re de dele, derskalsaettespa vaeggen, .Festveggfestedelentildensit1ergodtfastpaveggenvedhjelpavde o Kiristaseinakiinnitysosa siten, et1aseontiukasti kiinniseinassa. Kayta laitteen
tildesiddergodtfastsomvistpabiliedeO medf0lgendeskruenesomvistpabilde0. mukanatuleviaruuvejakuvan0osoittamallatavalla.

[Magyar] [Hrvatski] [Romiina] [Polski]

Lt A "B' resz felszerelesehez minimum 12 mm vastag kOlso falvastagsag szukseges,
amelyrendelkeziklegalabb48mmhosszuszabadbelsoteriilettel.
Lt AkeszOleketnemcsakfatartolecrelehetfelszerelni.FatartolecheztOrteno
rOgzitesesetenhasznaljaaz.A·jelOalkatreszt.
o Furjon egy 13 mm atmerojO Iyukat, majd helyezze bele a .B· jelO alkatreszt a
lyukba,ahogyanazO.esaf}.kepenlathato
o Allitsasorbaacsavarokat,majdnyomjabeaz@jelualkatresztafalvegeig,azlanpedig
lavolitsaelalartol,ahogyaO.esaO.kepenlathato
o Csavarozza a falhoza rogzitoalkatreszta mellekeltcsavarokkal,amigerosen
nemtartaz5kepszerinl.
Lt Montala dijela 'B" zahtijeva vanjski zid debljine najmanje 12 mm, s najmanje 48
mmslobodnogprostorasunutrasnjestranezida.
Lt Nije nuino montiranje na okomiti zidni nosai':. Koristite dio 'A' za prii':vrscivanje
naokomitizidninosai':.
• Nai':inite rupu promjera do 13 mm, a zatim umetnite dio 'B" kako je to prikazano
naslikamaOif}.
o Poredajtedriai':epremaredoslijedu,gurnite(a)doknedosegnekrajzida,a
zatimuklonitepreostalekakojeprikazanonaslikamaOiO
o Pomocuisporui':enihvijakaui':vrstitenosai':nazidkaostojetoprikazanona
sliciO.
Lt Pentru instalarea piesei'B', este necesar un perete exterior cu grosimeadecel
pu\in 12 mm, cu un spa\iu interior Iiber de cel pu\in 48 mm lungime
Lt Nueste necesara instalareaintr..un suportdeperete. Lafixareaintr-un suport,
utiliza\ipiesa"A"
• Realiza!i un orificiu cu diametrul de 13 mm, apoi introduce\i piesa "B' in orificiu,
a~a cum se arata in imaginile 0 ~i f}
o Alinia\idispozitiveledeprindereinordine,impinge\i@panacandajungelacapalul
peretelui, apoi indeparta\i restul a~a cum se arata in imaginile 0 ~i 0
• Prinde\i piesadefixare pe perete p1lnacand esteata~ataferm peperete
utilizilnd ~uruburile furnizate, a~a cum se arata in imaginea 0
Lt Abyzainstalowacczf;lsc"B", konieczna jest i;ciana zewnf;ltrzna ogrubosci
minimum 12 mm, z wolnq przestrzeniq dlugosci minimum 48 mm.
Lt Instalacjaprzypomocykolkowniejestkonieczna. Podczasmontatyprzypomocy
koikownaletyutycCzf;lSci.A·
o Wykonajotworosrednicy13mmiwl6Zczf;lsc.B"jakpokazanonarysunkach
Oif)
o Ustaw uchwyty w porzqdku, wcisnij @ do chwili, at osiqgnie koniec sciany,
nastf;lpnieusur'iresztf;l,jakpokazanonarysunkachOiO
o Dokladnie dokrf;lc CZf;lSC mocujqcq za pomocq dolqczonych srub, jak pokazano
narysunkuO.

[EAAIlVIKci] [6bnrapCKM] [Slovencina] [PYCCKMii]

Lt ria T~V TonoeEr~O~ TOU E~OPT~~OTl)<; "B", onolTEiTOI tvoe; E~WTEPIK6<; TOiXc<; mixou<; 12
mm ~ mploooTEpa, ~E EOWTEplKO ulEU8EpO xwpa 48 mm ~ nEploooTEpO
Lt IiEV onondTOI TOnoetTflO~ DE Kop<pi TOixou. flo T~ OlEptwo~ DE KOP<Pi,
XP~DI~onol~OlE TO E~cipTfl~O "A"
o Avoi~TE ~IO on~ ~E olci~ETPO tw<; 13 mm KOI, Ol~ ouVtXEIO, Ton08ET~OlE TO
E~cipT~~O 'B" Olflv on~ onw<; <pOiVETOI OlI<; EIKOVE<; 0 KOI O.
o Eueuypa~~iOlE TI<; Aol3ioEC; ~E Tfl DElpO, w8~OlE TO @ ~tXPI va <pTcioEI OlO
TtAc<; TOU TOixou KOI, Ol~ OUVtXEIO, O<pOlptOlE TO un6Aomo 6nwc; <poiVETOI OlI<;
EIKOVEC;OKOIO.
o AOIpoAimE TO T~~~O nou mEpEwvETOI mov Toixo ~tXPI va m08EpanOl~8Ei Kalla mov TOixo.
XP~OI~onoltiJVTae; Tie; napEXO~EVEe; l3ioEe; onwc; <poiVETOI m~v EIKova O.
[yKpa'iHcbKa]
Lt J],nR BCTaHOBIleHHR'laCTHHH'B' He06xj,QHa 30BHiwHR cTiHa TOBU1HHOIO 12MM'lH
6inbwe i3 BHyrpiwHiM BinbHHM npoCTopoM 48 MM 'lH 6inbwe
Lt BCTaHoBIleHHRyKapKacHeeo6oB'R3KOBHM. Ypa3i BCTaHOBIleHHR y KapKac
BHKOPHCToBY~Te'laCTHHy"A"
o 3po6iTb OTBip AiaMeTpoM 13 MM, a TOAi SCTaSTe 4acTHHy 'B' S oTsip, RK
nOKa3aHoHaManIOHKaxOif}.
• BHpisHRiilTe slo1pi6, HaTlo1cHiTb @, AOKIo1 He AOCRrHe KiH~R CTiHlo1, a TOAi
3HiMiTb pewTy, RK nOKa3aHO Ha ManlOHKax 0 i O.
• HaAiiilHO 3a¢iKcyiilTe KpinneHHR AllR MOHTysaHH51 Ha CTiHi 3a AonoMorolO
rSHHTis, RKi AOAaIOTbC51, RK nOKa3aHO Ha ManlOHKY 0.
Lt 3a HHCT3J1HpaHe Ha 4aCT B ce H3HCKsa BbHWHa creHa Ae6ena noHe 12 MM, KORTO
HMa BbTpeWHO cB060AHO npocTpaHcTBo nOHe 48 MM
Lt He ce H3HCKsa MOHTHpaHe BCTeHHa peweTKa. KoraTO OMHTHpaTe BbPXY
peweTKa,H3nomBa~Te'laCTA
o HanpaseTe OTBOp 13 MM BAHaMeTbp HnOCTaseTe 4aCT B SoTBopa, KaKTO e
nOKa3aHoHaH306palKeHHeOHf).
o nOApeAeTe 4enIOCTHTe nOA peA, HaTHCHere (a), AOKaTo AocTHrHe KpaR Ha
CTeHaTa, HnocneH3BaAereocTaH3J10TO, KaKTOenOKa3aHoHaH306palKeHHe
OeO.
o 3aTerHereqJHKpHpaU1aTa KbMCTeHaTa4aCTcnpeAoCTaBeHHTe BHHToBe,KaKTO
enoKa3aHoHaqJHrypaO.
[Ka3a~
Lt 'B" 6enweriH opHaTy YWiH CblPTI\bl1\36blpra 12MM He oAaH Aa I\3J1bllj 6onyra,
OHbllj iWKi 60c KeljicTiri 48MM HeMece oAaH Aa Ken 60ITyra THic
Lt ~a6blpra qJHKcaTOpbl ap~blnbl opHaTYAbllj ~alKeTi lKO~. <llHKcaTOp ap~blITbl 6eKiTy
yWiH 'A' 6enweriH ~onAaHblljbl3
o AHaMeTpi 13MM TeciK lKacaljbl3 Aa, COAaH Ke~iH "B' 6enweriH TeciKKe,
cypenepAe 0 lKaHe 0 KepceTinreHAe~ 0pHaTblljbl3
o ~blc~blwTapAbl penelji3 Aa, onapAbl 1\36blpraHbllj weriHe lKeTKeHWe HTepilji3,
cOAaHKe~iHl\3J1raHblHcypeTTepAeOlKaHeOKepceTinreHAe~anblljbl3
• ~a6blprara 6eKiTineTiH 6enweKTi, cypene KepceTinreHAe~ 0 6ipre lKeTKi3inreH
6¥paHAanapAbllj KeMeriMeH ~aTa~Tbln 6¥paljbl3
Lt Pri instalaciidielu.B·savyiadujevonkajsiastenashrubkou aspon 12mm,ktora
obsahujevnutornevornemiestosverkosfou48mmaleboviac
Lt Instalaciananastenneklincesanevyzaduje.Priupevnovaniklincompouiite
diel,A".
o Urobte dieru s priemerom 13 mm a potom zasunte diet .B· do olvoru tak, ako je
zobrazenenaobrazkochOaf).
• Spravnezarovnajteuchyly,zatiai':te@,kymsanedostanekukoncustenya
potomodpojteostatnetak,akojezobrazenenaobrazkochOaO
o Pomocoudodanychskrutiekupevnitedieluchytenianastenu,kymnebude
pevnedriafnastenetak,akojezobrazenenaobrazkuO.
[Srpski]
Lt Za instalaciju dela .B· potreban je spoljni zid deblji od 12 mm koji ima unutrasnji
slobodanprostorduiine48mmilivise
Lt Instalacijanastubnijeneophodna.Zafiksiranjenastubkoristitedeo.A·.
o Napravite olvor prei':nika 13 mm, a zatim umetnite dec .B" u njega kao sto je
prikazanonaslikamaOif)
• Poravnajtedriai':e,gurnite@doknedodedokrajazida,azatimuklonite
ostatakkaostojeprikazanonaslikama6iO.
• Prii':vrstitedeozafiksiranjenazidpomocupriloienihzavrtanjadoknebude
sigurnopostavljen,kaostojeprikazanonasliciO
Lt J],nR yCTaHoBKHAeTanH "B' TOITU1HHa HapYlKHo~cTeHblAolTlKHaCOCTaBIl>lTb 12
MM HnH 60nee, a BHyrpeHHecB060AHoe npocTpaHcTsoAonlKHococTaBIlRTb48
MM HnH60nee.
Lt YCTaHoBKa B CTO~KY He Tpe6yeTcR npH 3aKpenneHHH Ha cTO~Ke Hcnonb3Y~Te
AeT3J1b·A·.
• CAeITa~Te oTsepcTHe AHaMeTpaM 13 MM, a 3aTeM BCTaBbTe AeT3J1b 'B"
BOTBepcTHe, KaKnoKa3aHoHapHcYHKaxOH O.
o BblpaBHR~TenaTpOHbl,H3AaBHTeHaAeTanb®,~T06bloHaKocHynacbCTeHbl,a
3aTeMnepeMecTHTeocTanbHbleAeTanH,KaKnoKa3aHoHapHcYHKaxOHO
ol1cnonb3YRnpHlTaraeMbleBHHTbl,3aKpenHTenpHKpenn>leMYIOKcTeHeAeTanb,
4T06bloHa6blnanpo'lHonpHlKaTaKCTeHe, KaKnoKa3aHoHapHcyHKe O.
[Bahasa Indonesia]
Lt Komponen '6" diperlukan untuk memasang ke dinding luar setebal12mm atau
lebih,denganruangkosongdidalamyasetebal48mmataulebih
Lt Pemasangankerangkadindingtidakdiperlukan.Apabilamengencangkanke
rangka,gunakan komponen "A"
o Buat lubang dengan diameter 13mm kemudian masukkan komponen "B' ke
dalamlubangsepertiditunjukkanpadagambarOdanO
o Luruskangripyangbersesuaian,tekan@sampaimenembusdinding,
kemudian lepaskansisanyasepertiditunjukkan pada gambar 0 dan 0
o Kencangkan komponen penyangga sampai menempel kuat di dinding dengan
menggunakansekrupyangdisertakansepertiditunjukkanpadagambarO

[O'zbek] [Latviesu] [Lietuvil{kalba] [Eesti]

,t, "B'qismnio'rnatishuchun48mm.yokiundankattaroqichkibo·shliqqismibo'lgan12
mm yokiundanqalinroqbo'igantashqidevorningbo'lishitalabqilinadi
Lt Devor shtiftiga o'rnatish talab qilinmaydi. Uni shtiftga biriktirishda 'A' qismdan
foydalaning
o Diametri 13mm. kattalikda bo'igan teshik yasang va keyin 'B' qismni 0 va f)
rasmlardako'rsatilganidekteshikkakiriting
o Qisqichlamitartibbo'yichatenglashtiring,@niudevomingoxirigayetibborgunicha
sUringvaqolganiniOvaOrasmlardako'rsatilganideksug'uriboling.
0 Devorgabiriktiriluvchiqisminiudevorgamustahkamtarzdabirikkunichaberilgan
shuruplar yordamida 0 rasmda ko'rsatilganidek tarzda mahkamlang.
Lt Lai uzstadTtu detalu 'B', arejas sienas biezumam ir jabot vismaz 12 mm un biezakai,
unbrivajaivietaiITdzpretejaisienai irjabOtvismaz48 mmvaivairak
Lt UzstadTsanasienasspraisITnavnepieciesama.Janostiprinatarsienasspraisli,
izmantojietdetaJu·A".
• Izurbiet caurumu ar 13 mm diametru un tad ievietojiet taja detaJu 'B", ka
noradTtsattelosOunf).
o PareizaseclbanoITdzinietskavas,iespiediet@,ITdzdetalaatduraspretsienu
untadizQemietatiikusodetalu,kanoradTtsattelos6unO.
o Nostiprinietsienasfiksacijasdalu, ITdztastingriturassavavietasiena,
izmantojotkomplektacijaieklautasskrOves,kanoradTtsattela0.
Lt Kad sumontuotumete B dali, isorine siena turi bUli ne maiiau 12 mm storio, 0
vidinesiaisvosvietosturibOti48mmarbadaugiau
L!', Nereikalaujama montuoti prie sienos karXaso. Kai montuojate prie sienos karlkaso,
naudokitesAdalimi.
• Isgr!;)ikite 13 mm skersmens skyl!;) ir ikiskite ijq B dali kaip parodyta 0
irf)paveikslelyje.
.Islygiuokitespaustukus,stumkite@,kolbuspasiektassienosgalas,
tada nuimkite atramq kaip parodyta 0 ir 0 paveikslelyje.
• VarZtais,kaipparodytaOpaveikslelyje,prilvirtinkitepriesienos
montuojamqdali,kadjilaikytl{si.
Lt B-osa paigaldamiseks on vajalik vahemalt 12 mm paksune sein, millel on
vahemalt48 mmvaba ruumi
Lt Seadmepaigaldamineseinakarkassikulgeeiolevajalik.Kuikinnitateseadme
karkassikOlge, kasutageA-osa
o Puurige13mmiabim66dugaaukningseejareisisestageB-osaauku,nagu
naidatudpiltidelOjaf),
o Seadistageklambrid,lUkakedetaili@kuniseeulatubseinastlabiningseejarel
eemaldageOlejaanudosa, nagunaidatudpiltidelOja O.
• Kinnitageseinakinnitus nii,etseekinnitubkaasasolevatekruvideabilkindlalt
seinale,nagunaidatudpildiI0.

[Cestina] [''''til [1iiIf*Ifl::lt] [~,,*tp3tl

Lt K montaii casti B je treba vnejsi zed tiusta alespon 12 mm a olvory vzdalene ,1, il''\.I~1Jn'~~il~~~l'U "B" titil~Sl~u~'\.IU'il~,~Uil(J12 lHJ. ,1, ~:$i;~:;:# "B" • ?~jllltt-l~J.i1'~-!;/J\T 12rrm, jlllJ;\;J:£IB]1'm~T 48rrm. ,1, ~3i.'~~111' BJ '5H~J!1J!FH~+m- 12mm' a:'lrAJUJffl~rnHt'f~m­
alespon48mm 'iil(Jjj~u~i,~m(Jlu'l~uil(Jni, 48 1J1J, ,1, 1C~~Ajllli*.lLtt. ~mJt~;:E~IJ.lLttll1, 1iffi~# "Au. 48mm
Lt Montainahai':kynazdineninutna.Pfimontaiikhai':kupauiijtecastA. ,1, m~~il~~II1J~u~ 'l~titil~lilA~"n~~ Li'Jilfjilll1JAnl~U~ lil~,U "A" • t.'i-1'1i:&::*J 13rrm tt-lR, ~~~:;:# "B" ftllARJ;\;J, izlllll 0 ~Q ,1, ~iW9:!&:Eln~ttP'J' ~!l'JJtIJ'iJ:<Em:ttt, J~~Jij~('f AJ
o Vytvofte olvor 0 prumeru alespon 13 mm a pate vlone cast B do olvoru, viz • L'l'~11i1jjLilu~'6uiJn;l1~ 13 1J1J. LLil~l~~,U "B" lU!il'1J~LLilil~lumYi IIlf)PlT7f<. o t5-1'@:f~/,] 13mm a<Hl' ~Fo:fi1~f1l' "B" 1ifIMLpg, izoOO 0 fD
obrazkyOaf) o LLil~f) • ~*~:~HF, ~ @ m.3~:Jl!lMJ1Hll, ~~lXIl*Jt#<$~, izlllll 0 ~Q OOf}Pfrif-'
o Zarovnejteupinaci casti, zatiai':tecast(a)aikezdiapakostatniodstrante, viz • "~li1~.!l1Jilillu6i'LL'\.IU~~L'\.I1J'~il1J ~u @ li1i;lil~u~ 'l,n{lull'~'U~L'\.Il!lilil III OPlT7f<. • )lJ?r~~f'f ' :fi1 @ J1t't~!I'@;$ , ~!l"ill~Ilff;U*$7t ' iloOO 0 to
obrazkyOaO ilnil11J9ILLilil~lum'l'j 0 LLil~ 0 • ffi~mlltltt-l~nm~.ht~;:E:1f#:iF:iF±t!!~;:E-7:EjIllM...t, izlllll 0 PlT7f<. OOOpJTil,'
o Pevne utahnetecastmontaznisadykezdipamocidodanychsroubu, viz 0brazekO. • iJu~'U~fjilll1J~u~li1LLuu 'i61(Jlililn1~Slli1il11J~LLilil~lum'l'j 0 • fflM!llI,ti¥J!R'#.n:fi1~J'tlm:<E~f1l'2f:*jt!lL'iJ:<E{tJo'.J~ I:: ' tzorII 0 pJT7j'; •

[Italiano] [n'lW] ~.J~]

Lt Installarelaparte"B'suunapareteeslernadispessorepariosuperiorea12mmcon
unaintercapedinedialmen048mm
Lt None richiesta I'installazione suviteprigioniera.lncasodifissaggioa un
montante,utilizzarelaparte'A'
o Praticare un foro di 13mmdidiametroquindiinserirelaparte"B'nelforocome
mostrato nelle immagini 0 e 6.
DInJ. 'I!II< ,0I7yni n"n 12 71!1 'J.IYJ. 'JI,/'n"j7I!1"J ,"B" j77n nl< 1'j7n0l7 ',J,1,
.0I7YrlI n"n 48 71!1 'n'JD 77n
I!Innl!lOl ,OI"j77 Inll< YJ.j77 n,nJ. 01< .0I11j7 lln7 j77nOl nl< 1'j7n0l7 1"'/ 1'1< ,1,
,"A·j77nJ.
~'/ml!l'DJ 'B' j17n nl< Dln7 ODOI pn ,n1<71 n'n 13 71!1 'lllj7J. ,Ill n'j1 •
.f)-,OO""I<J.
'4h1,;"".L.....~"y....;,.J&IJ\t'"12~ ...... ).~.h:,~'.J"-'...,....","B".j,JI~,1, ..,hb"L..;.,;4<S ~l; y..,.4-12 w..~"'''''''.JG..)>."4 ,"B" w....!~"Iy.,1,
.J&1-,1t'"48J~"".Jli .W-.I ~)'J ,,), ~ l; y..,.4- 48 "I)I.;->..,.)G..
."A".j,JI~";":;"'I,:u.t...llI""~I'J~"" ..h:,WI:u.t..' .... ~ •.J-'y.'o~-"'J ,1, w....!)I,'.,.:...,..~)>."..>i'4"J.J...s,...LLo..w...,,;~)'J )>."..>i'''-'.Jy.~,1,
0~.J"...JI""C"'"JA-",L.S'-.>.:iilI""·B·.j>.lIJ;...>I;"t'"13)oi.,~.L:.;l-!,",. .~"li:....I·A"
OJ o y.JL.-:.Y<S."..;.I.J...... ..,I.J·B·w....!V";- J"p,t.;...,1 y..,.4-13 .;hi..,."..;.'.J.......
.1.?-\'I'JI)l-!'"';.,.h:,WI-.J!-.J!J....:i.,.h@~I-',""""ylI.,'-!yl.ll\.I.?-\'I"i~'"'
• .1J.iSJ}J,,~oJIJ.:.;~eJ

o Allineare Ie impugnature, spingere @ fincM raggiunge la fine del muro, quindi ,n'OI nl< ,001 pn ,n1<71 ,"j101 0I'/j17 'Y @ nl< 'llll' ,OIT'nl<OI nl'" nl< 'I!I" • .OJO~.J"...JI""C"'"JA-",L.S~I I.J""" V";- J .,I,.JL:,; ->-y.)>." ~I ",...s".LLo. \:; I.J @'~~.J """,,y '" I.J \A •.;/o •
rimuovere il resto come mostrato nelle immagini 0 e 0 .0-16 o"I'I<J.mnl!l 'DJ -"'L.Sw..rJIY-'"L.....lI~I,,;,.:;,..4.h:,l>JI..,t.:.L.:i~.,.h.J.:,WI .... ..,...,.sjill • .?-~'"'. ·~c.JG..,,,:.,'b.:,L:.;O-'Oy.-'L.-:.Y<S.;.JJ....,
o Serrare la parte peril montaggioamuroutilizzando Ie viti fornite come O')IJ.OI n1Y~nl<J."j77J.ll'OI j7T1nn 0I'0I'I!I'Y"j77,n'/JOI j77nOlnl< j71n • .0·.J"...JI .... C"'"JA ,":' "b.:,L::,:, 0 Y.~ y<S ,":' .J;.-G.;\A ~)I ,.>U;..,I 4 1.J)>." ';-'.J ~w....! •
mostratonell'immagine0 .OIl'I<J.~'/mJO'D,,'/nOi ..llt..,.,rw)>.".;J.J,-h.o.JJ...., ~I \:; ~,-h.o

Concrete, Solid Brick, Wood

Wall A 65mm(2.5") o f)

9::U
~L
 Securing the TV to the Wall

Caution: Pulling, pushing, or climbing on the 1V may cause the 1V to fall. In particular, ensure your children
do not hang over or destabilize the 1V; doing so may cause the 1V to tip over, causing serious injuries or
death. Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer. For added stability, install the
anti-fall device for safety purposes, as follows.

Accessories

1V-Holder Screw (M4Xl12)

To prevent the TV from falling

1. Remove the screw attached to the back of your 1V, then connect the 1V-Holder to the 1V with the screw.
~ Make sure to only use the supplied screw.
~ When you install the wall-mount, refer to the "Securing the TV to the wall" in the TV manual for installation type.

1----------'
I CQ::~ I 0

~CJI
2. Firmly fasten the screw to the wall or cabinet where the 1V is to be installed. Tie the 1V-Holder attached to the 1V and the
screw fastened on the wall or cabinet so that the 1V is fixed.
~ Only the screw needed to attach the holder to the TV is supplied. The screw to attach the Holder to the wall or
cabinet must be purchased separately. We recommend purchasing a size M4xL20 wood screw.
~ Install the TV close to the wall so that it does not fall.
~ When attaching the TV to the wall, tie the cord level with the ground or slanted downwards for safety purposes.
~ Check the cord occasionally to make sure it is secure.
~ Before moving the TV, separate the connected cord first.

3. Verify all connections are properly secured. Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue or failure. If you have any
doubt about the security of your connections, contact a professional installer.
 Fijaci6n del televisor a fa pared

Precauci6n: Tirar del televisor, empujarlo 0 colgarse de el puede provocar su carda. En especial,
procure que los ninos no se cuelguen del televisor ni 10 desestabilicen; este podrfa caerse sobre ellos y
causarles lesiones graves 0 incluso la muerte. Siga las precauciones de seguridad del folleto de seguridad
incluido con el producto. Para mejorar la estabilidad instale un dispositivo antivuelco, como se explica a
continuaci6n.

Accesorios

Soporte del televisor Tornillo (M4XL 12)

Para impedir que caiga el televisor

1. Desenrosque el tornillo de la parte posterior del televisor y asegure el soporte TV con el tornillo.
~ Use s610 el tornillo suministrado.
~ Cuando instale el montaje mural, consulte "Fijaci6n del televisor a la pared" en el manual del televisor para conocer el
tipo de instalaci6n.

~~----

2. Apriete firmemente el tornillo a la pared 0 al armario donde se va a instalar el televisor. Asegure el soporte al televisor y al
tornillo de la pared 0 el mueble.
~ S610 se suministra el tornillo necesario para fijar el soporte al televisor. EI tornillo para montar el soporte a la pared 0
a un mueble se debe adquirir por separado. Recomendamos adquirir un tornillo para madera de tamano M4 x L20.
~ Instale el televisor cerca de la pared para que no caiga.
~ Cuando instale el televisor en la pared, asegure el cable nivelado respecto al suelo 0 inclinado hacia adelante por
motivos de seguridad.
~ Compruebe de vez en cuando que el cable este firme.
~ Cuando desee mover el televisor, debe quitar, primero, el cable de conexi6n.

3. Compruebe que todas las conexiones esten bien aseguradas. Compruebelas peri6dicamente para detectar cualquier
signa de fatiga 0 de fallo. Si tiene dudas sobre la seguridad de la instalaci6n, p6ngase en contacto con un instalador
profesional.
 Stabilisation du televiseur par rapport au mur

Mise en garde: Le fait de tirer, de pousser ou de monter sur Ie televiseur peut en provoquer la chute.
Assurez-vous que les enfants ne se pendent pas au-dessus du televiseur ou qu'ils ne Ie destabilisent pas;
Ie televiseur pourrait basculer et causer des blessures graves ou la mort. Suivez toutes les mesures de
securite indiquees dans la brochure. Pour plus de stabilite, installez Ie dispositif anti-chute par mesure de
securite en suivant les etapes donnees ci-dessous.

Accessoires

Pour empecher que Ie tl~h~viseur ne tombe

1. Devissez une vis a I'arriere du televiseur; ensuite, a I'aide de cetle vis, fixez Ie support au televiseur.
~ Veillez a utiliser uniquement les vis fournies.
~ Lorsque vous installez I'ensemble d'installation murale, consultez la rubrique "Fixation du televiseur au mur" pour
connaTtre Ie type d'installation.

e--~----

2. Vissez a fond les vis sur Ie mur ou I'armoire ou Ie televiseur doit etre installe. Pour immobiliser Ie televiseur, fixez Ie cordon
relie au televiseur aux vis vissees dans Ie mur ou sur I'armoire.
~ Les vis fournies servent uniquement a fixer Ie support au televiseur. Vous devez acheter separement la vis pour
fixer Ie support au mur ou au meuble. II est recommande d'acheter des vis a bois M4xL20.
~ Installez Ie televiseur a proximite du mur de maniere qu'il ne se renverse pas.
~ Lorsque vous attachez Ie televiseur au mur, fixez Ie cordon de maniere qu'il soit parallele au sol ou incline vers Ie
bas pour des raisons de securite.
~ Verifiez Ie cordon aI'occasion pour vous assurer qu'il est bien fixe.
~ Avant de deplacer Ie televiseur, detachez d'abord Ie cordon.

3. Verifiez I'etat des connexions. Vous devez les verifier periodiquement afin de detecter tout signe de fatigue. En cas de
doute au sujet des points d'ancrage, communiquez avec un installateur professionnel.
1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111
BN68-02178D-OO
: .A. ~{;i .3.2.IA~ (Toe) £1~P~iI3ol Ail~Ail£~ ~ ~'2! A~~oH~AiIR. :'
: ~~Oi ~ 01210i1~ (}j[[i~ £~2tQ{32.1 Ail~Ail.!r. A~~o~AI WO~~AiIR. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
:, A Use only the clean water to clean it. :,
.. Don't use any chemical cleaner to clean this kind of
: English Samsung crystal (ToC) product. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
, A N'utilisez que de I'eau pour nettoyer la surface externe du Samsung Crystal (Matieres '
: . . organiques totales). :
I N'utilisez jamais de produits de nettoyage ou de produits chimiques autres que de I'eau. ,
: Franyais N'utilisez que de I'eau comme produit de nettoyage. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
:. A Utilizzare solo acqua per la pulizia della superficie esterna di Samsung Crystal (Toc). :,
.. Non utilizzare mai soluzioni 0 sostanze chimiche per la pulizia; utilizzare solo acqua.
: Italiano Come sostanza pulente, utilizzare solo acqua. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
:, A Utilize apenas agua como soluc;ao de limpeza para limpar a superfrcie exterior do :,
.. Samsung Crystal (Toc). Utilize sempre agua e nunca outras soluc;oes de limpeza nem
: Portugues quimicos. Utilize apenas agua como soluc;ao de limpeza. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
: A Alls:f \.H1CTKlt1 BHeWHe~ nOBepXHOCTlt1 Samsung Crystal (Toc) lt1CnOllb3Y~Te B Kal.feCTBe :
: .. l.flt1CTs:f~erO paCTBopa TOllbKO BOp,y. :
: v He nOllb3Y~Tecb l.flt1CTs:f~lt1Mlt1 cpep,CTBaMlt1 lt1 pacTBOpaMlt1, KpoMe BOAbl. :
,PYCCKHH II1cnollb3Y~Te Alls:f l.flt1CTKlt1 TOllbKO BOp,y. ,
:, A
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~

,
Verwenden Sie als Reinigungsmittel bitte nur reines Wasser, wenn Sie die AuBenflachen
von Samsung Kristall (Toc) reinigen.
:
,'
, Verwenden Sie auBer Wasser keine anderen Reinigungsmittel und Chemikalien. ,
: Deutsch Verwenden Sie nur Wasser als Reinigungsmittel. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
:, A Utilice unicamente agua para limpiar la superficie del Samsung Crystal (Toc). :,
.. No utilice productos qurmicos ni soluciones de limpieza aparte del agua.
: Espanol Limpie unicamente con agua. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
, A Do czyszczenia zewn~trznych powierzchni urzqdzenia Samsung Crystal (Toc) nalezy I

: .. uzywac wyfqcznie wody. :

, Nie wolno uzywac zadnych innych srodk6w czyszczqcych lub chemikali6w. ,
: Polski Jedynym odpowiednim srodkiem czyszCZqcym jest woda. :
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~
:, A Temizlemek ic;in yalnlzca temiz su kullanln. :,
, .. Bu c;e~it bir Samsung kristal (ToC) OrOnOnO temizlerken herhangi bir kimyasal temizleyici ,
, TOrkye kullanmayln. I
~-------------------------------------------------------------------~ ,
Rfi~1fm7.1<1~A5w)~;~1_&*5w)~ Samsung Crysta I (Toc) a~?I\~mJ 0 I
I
w~~m*~*~~~m~~~~~o I

R fi~1f m7.1< 1~ A 5w)~;~ 1_& 0

I
I

1 1111111111I1111111111111
BN68-02186A-02
 SAMSUNG ULTRA SLIM WALL MOUNT
LIMITED WARRANTY TO ORIGINAL PURCHASER

Warranty: 3 Years [English]

• If the product is not working properly due to a performance defect that appears under normal circumstances within the warranty period,
please visit the retailer where you purchased it.

Garantie: 3 ans
[Fran~is]
• Si I'appareil ne fonctionne pas correctement et presente une baisse de performances dans des conditions normales au cours de la periode
a
de garantie, adressez-vous votre revendeur.

Garantia: 3 anos [Poltugues]

• Se 0 produto nao estiver funcionando apropriadamente devido a um defeito de execu~o que venha a aparecer em circunstancias normais
durante 0 perfodo de garantia, procure a loja onde voce adquiriu 0 produto.

Garantia: 3 anos [Espanol]

• Si el producto no funciona correctamente debido a un defecto de rendimiento que aparece en circunstancias normales dentro
del periodo de garantfa, p6ngase en contacto con su distribuidor local.
 SAMSUNG TOUCH REMOTE

For Touch Remote, ship in service will be provided during the warranty period. Contact Call Center
Samsung for shipping address and service ticket number. Samsung shall repair or replace, and
return to the purchaser.
This limited warranty begins on the original date of purchase and covers manufacturing defects in
materials and workmanship encountered in normal, and except to the extent otherwise expressly
provided for in this statemen.t, noncommercial use of this product, and shall not apply to the
following, including, but not limited to: damage which occurs in shipment; delivery and installation;
applications and uses for which this product was not intended; altered product or serial numbers;
cosmetic damage or exterior finish; accidents, abuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning or other acts
of nature; use of products, equipment, systems, utilities, services, parts, supplies, accessories,
applications, installations, repairs, external wiring or connectors not supplied or authorized by
SAMSUNG which damage this product or result in service problems; incorrect electrical line voltage,
fluctuations and surges; customer adjustments and failure to follow operating instructions, clean-
ing, maintenance and environmental instructions that are covered and prescribed in the instruction
book; reception problems and distortion related to noise, echo, interference or other signal
transmission and delivery problems;
SAMSUNG does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the product.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED AND DESCRIBED ABOVE,
AND NO WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL
APPLY AFTER THE EXPRESS WARRANTY PERIODS STATED ABOVE, AND NO OTHER EXPRESS
WARRANTY OR GUARANTY GIVEN BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO
THIS PRODUCT SHALL BE BINDING ON SAMSUNG.
SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, FAILURE TO REALIZE
SAVINGS OR OTHER BENEFITS, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, REGARDLESS OF
THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN AD-
VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST
SAMSUNG BE GREATER IN AMOUNT THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT SOLD BY
SAMSUNG AND CAUSING THE ALLEGED DAMAGE.
WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, PURCHASER ASSUMES ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR
LOSS, DAMAGE OR INJURY TO PURCHASER AND PURCHASER'S PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND
THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT
SOLD BY SAMSUNG NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE OF SAMSUNG.
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PUR-
CHASER OF THIS PRODUcr, IS NONTRANSFERABLE AND STATES YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.

Region Country Contact Center ft Web Site

North America CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.comjca

_ME~[C~=~ ~~1~O~SA~~~NG_~2~-~~~XJ~~w·~rnSung.c__om ---I

________ U.S. A__ _ . .

1-~??_~:~_~:~~~_~?~~~?~~~L __ J_~~~~=_~_~_=_~_~~ _~~~ _
 SAMSUNG TOUCH REMOTE
•
Con las Touch Remote se proporciona un servicio de recogida durante el periodo de la garantia.
Contactar al Centro de Servicio Samsung para obtener la direccion de envio y el numero de servi-
cio correspondiente. Samsung reparara 0 reemplazara el producto y 10 devolvera al comprador.
Esta garantia limitada cubre defectos de fabricacion en materiales y mana de obra derivados de
un uso normal V, excepto en el caso de que este expresamente previsto en esta declaracion, no
comercial del producto, y no se aplicara en los casas siguientes, que incluven, pero sin limitarse a
ellos: danos durante el transporte; entrega e instalacion; aplicaciones y usos para los cuales este
producto no esta disenado; producto 0 numero de serie alterados; danos de superficie 0 de acaba-
dos exteriores; accidentes, abuso, negligencia, incendio, agua, raves y otros actos de la naturaleza;
uso de productos, equipo, sistemas, utilidades, servicios, piezas, repuestos, accesorios, aplicaciones,
instalaciones, reparaciones, cableados 0 conectores externos no suministrados 0 no autorizados por
SAMSUNG que darien el producto y den como resultado problemas de servicio; voltaje de la linea
electrica incorrecto, f1uctuaciones y sobrecargas; ajustes del c1iente Verrores al seguir las instruccio-
nes de funcionamiento, limpieza, mantenimiento e instrucciones medioambientales que se explican
V prescriben en el manual de instrucciones; problemas de recepcion y de distorsion relacionados con
el ruido, el eco, las interferencias u otras transmisiones de la senal y problemas de entrega
SAMSUNG no garantiza un funcionamiento ininterrumpido y sin errores del producto,
NO HAY ~)TRAS GARANTIAS EXPRESAS QUE LAS YA ENUMERADAS Y DESCRITAS Y NINGUNA , IL N'EXISTE AUCUNE AUTRE GARANTIE EXPLICITE AUTRE QUE CELLES ENUMEREES ET DECRITES
GARANTIA TANTO EXPRESA COMO IMPLIClTA, INCLUIDAS, PERO SIN LlMlTARSE A, LAS GARANTIAS
IMPLIcITAS DE COMERCIABILIDAD 0 DE lOONElOAD PARA UN PROPOSITO DETERMINADO, SE
APLICARA DESPUES DE LOS PERIODOS DE GARANTIA EXPRESAMENTE ESTABLECIDOS ANTERIOR-
MENTE Y NINGUNA GARANTIA NO EXPRESA PROPORCIONADA POR CUALQUIER PERSONA, FIRMA 0
CORPORACION CON RESPECTO A ESTE PRODUCTO SERA VINCULANTE PARA SAMSUNG.
SAMSUNG NO SE HACE RESPONSABLE POR LA PERDIDA DE INGRESOS 0 BENEFICIOS, FALLO EN
LA CONSECUCION DE AHORROS U OTROS BENEFICIOS, NI CUALQUIER OTRO DANO ESPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL 0 CONSECUENTE CAUSADO POR EL usn, MAL USO 0 INCAPACIDAD DE USO DE ESTE
PRODUCTO, INDEPENDIENTEMENTE DE LA TEORIA LEGAL EN QUE SE BASE LA RECLAMACION, NI
SIQUIERA EN EL CASO DE QUE SAMSUNG HAYA SIDO ADVERTIDO DE LA POSIBILIDAD DE TALES
DANOS. NINGUNA RECLAMACION DE NINGUN TIPO CONTRA SAMSUNG SERA SUPERIOR AL PRECIO
DE COMPRA DEL PRODUCTO VENDIDO POR SAMSUNG Y CAUSANTE DEL DANO ALEGADO.
SIN LIMITACION DE LO ANTERIOR, EL COMPRADOR ASUME TODOS LOS RIESGOS Y RESPONSABI-
LIDADES POR PERDIDAS, DANOS 0 LESIONES AL COMPRADOR 0 PROPIEDADES DEL COMPRADOR
o A OTROS Y A SUS PROPIEDADES, DERIVADOS DEL usn, MAL usa 0 INCAPACIDAD DEL usa
DE ESTE PRODUCTO VENDIDO POR SAMSUNG QUE NO SE HAYAN CAUSADO DIRECTAMENTE POR
NEGLIGENCIA DE SAMSUNG.
ESTA GARANTIA LIMITADA NO SE PUEDE AMPLIAR A NINGUNA OTRA PERSONA QUE NO SEA EL
COMPRADOR ORIGINAL DE ESTE PRODUCTO, NO ES TRANFERIBLE Y SE LIMlTA EXCLUSIVAMENTE
A LA REPARACION.
. . ..
~
Region
¥-----~-- ----- .
Country Contact Center fl
-_.
'T
! ..
Web Site
. --_.. _------~~
North America CANADA 1-SOO-SAMSUNG(726-7S64) www.samsung.com/ca
MEXICO o1-SOO-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com
U.S.A 1-SOO-SAMSUNG(726-7864 ) www.samsung.com
SAMSUNG TOUCH REMOTE
Pour les Touch Remote, un service de livraison est fourni durant la periode de garantie. Composez
Ie numero ci-dessous pour obtenir I'adresse de livraison et Ie numero du ticket de maintenance.
SAMSUNG va reparer ou remplacer et puis retourner a I'acheteur.
Cette garantie limitee couvre les defauts du materiel et les defauts de fabrication pouvant etre
a
constates dans les conditions normales d'une utilisation non commercia Ie de ce produit, moins
qu'il n'en soit expressement stipule autrement dans ce document, et ne s'applique pas dans les
cas suivants, notamment, mais sans s'y limiter: les dommages subis au cours de I'expedition ; de
la Iivraison et de I'installation ; les applications et utilisations non conformes aux objectifs initiaux
du produit ; les numeros de produit et de serie alteres ; les dommages d'ordre esthetique ou
concernant raspect exterieur ; les accidents, abus, negligences, Ie feu, I'eau, la foudre ou autres
phenomenes naturels ; I'utilisation de produits, equipements, svstemes, services, pieces detachees,
fournitures, accessoires, applications, installations, reparation, cables ou connecteurs externes
non fournis ou autorises par SAMSUNG qUi endommagent Ie produit ou entrainent des problemes
de service; une mauvaise tension du secteur entrainant fiuctuations et surtensions ; les reglages
effectues par Ie client et Ie non respect des consignes d'utilisation et des instructions concernant Ie
nettoyage, la maintenance et I'environnement qui Figurent dans Ie manuel d'utilisation ;
SAMSUNG ne garantit pas que Ie produit fonctionnera sans interruption et sans erreur.
CI-DESSUS ET AUCUNE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, NOTAMMENT, MAIS SANS S'Y LIMITER, TOUTE
GARANTIE IMPLICITE DE VALEUR MARCHANDE OU D'ADEQUATION A SERVIR UN BUT PARTICULIER.
AUCUNE GARANTIE QU'ELLE SOIT EXPLICITE OU IMPLICITE NE S'APPLIQUE APRES LA PERIODE DE
GARANTIE EXPLICITE STIPULEE CI-DESSUS ET AUCUNE AUTRE GARANTIE EXPLICITE ATTRIBUEE A
CE PRODUIT PAR UNE PERSONNE, UNE ENTREPRISE OU UNE CORPORATION NE SAURAIT ENGAGER
LA RESPONSABILITE DE SAMSUNG.
SAMSUNG NE SAURAIT ETRE TENU RESPONSABLE D'EVENTUELLES PERTES DE REVENUS OU DE
PROFITS, DE L'ECHEC A REALISER DES BENEFICES OU AUTRES PROFITS, OU DE TOUT AUTRE
DOMMAGE PARTICULIER, ACCESSOIRE OU INDIRECT CAUSES PAR L'UTILISATION, LA MAUVAISE
UTILISATION OU L'INCAPACITE A UTILISER CE PRODUIT, INDEPENDAMMENT DU CADRE LEGAL SUR
LEQUEL SE BASE LA RECLAMATION ET MEME SI SAMSUNG A ETE AVERT! DE LA POSSIBILITE DE CES
DOMMAGES. LE MONTANT DU DEDOMMAGEMENT DEMANDE A SAMSUNG NE DOIT EN OUTRE EN
AUCUN CAS DEPASSER LE MONTANT DU PRIX D'ACHAT DU PRODUIT VENDU PAR SAMSUNG.
SANS SE LIMITER AUX FAITS PRECITES, L'ACHETEUR ASSUME TOUS LES RISQUES ET LA RESPON-
SABILITE EN CAS DE PROBLEMES NON DIRECTEMENT CAUSES PAR LA NEGLIGENCE DE SAMSUNG,
ENTRAINANT DES PERTES, DES DOMMAGES OU DES BLESSURES AFFECTANT L'ACHETEUR, SES
BIENS OU DES TIERS ET LEURS BIENS ET LIES A L'UTILISATION, LA MAUVAISE UTILISATION OU A
L'INCAPACITE D'UTILISER CE PRODUIT VENDU PAR SAMSUNG.
cmE GARANTIE LIMITEE NE PEUT S'ETENDRE A PERSONNE D'AUTRE QU'A L'ACHETELK INITIAL DE
CE PRODUIT, N'EST PAS TRANSFERABLE ET STIPULE EXCLUSIVEMENT VOS DROITS.
Region Country Contact Center fl Web Site
North America CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com/ca
MEXICO Ol-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864 ) www.samsung.com
USA 1-800-SAMSUNG(726-7864) www.samsung.com
I I III I
BN68-02967A-DO
Warranty Information

Limited Warranty
Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. (hereafter referred to as "SECA"), warrants that this product is free from defect in material
and workmanship. SECA further warrants that if this product fails to operate properly within the specified warranty period and
the failure is due to improper workmanship or defective material, SECA will repair or replace the product at its option.
All warranty repairs must be performed by a SECA-authorized service center. The name and address of the location nearest
you can be obtained by calling, toll free:
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
or On-line at www.samsung.com/ca

Terms

Categories Labor and Parts Size Service

37" and Larger Carry-In or In-Home

LCD TV (Digital) One (I) Year
32" and Smaller Carry-In

Plasma (Digital)
DLP Projection TV One (I) Year All Carry-In or In-Home
CRT Projection TV

On Carry-In models, transportation to and from the service center is the customer's responsibility.
Samsung Electronics Canada reserves the right to dispatch In-Home Service subject to availability or provide other service
type options.

Exclusions
This warranty covers only failures due to defects in materials or workmanship and does not cover normal wear or
cosmeticdamage. This warranty is extended only to the original purchase and the customer's original dated sales receipt is the
onlyacceptable proof of purchase. It must be presented to the authorized service center at the time the service is required.

This warranty does not cover damages which are caused by:
- fire, accident, lightening, flood and/or other acts of God;
- faulty installation, set-up adjustments, improper antenna, inadequate signal reception problems, power line surge,
maladjustment of consumer controls, improper maintenance;
- failure which result from misuse, abuse, neglect, mishandling, misapplication, alteration.

This warranty does not cover:

- modification or commercial use, such as hotel, office, restaurant, or other business or rental use of the product;
- the service by anyone other than authorized service center.

This warranty will automatically be voided for any unit found with a missing or altered serial number.
This warranty is valid only on products purchased and used in Canada, unless otherwise stated.

For more information, contact:

Samsung Customer Care
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc., Customer Service
55 Standish Court Mississauga, Ontario L5R 482
Canada
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/ca
1II11111 "11111111111111111I111111111111111
BN68-02021 A-O I
Garantie

Garantie Limitee
Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. (nomme ci-apre SECA) garantit ce produit contre tout defaut de materiel et de fabrication.
SECA garantit egalement que lors du defaut de fonctionnement correct de ce produit durant la peri ode de garantie speci-fiee,
si ce manque de fonctionnement est Ie resultat d'une erreur de fabrication ou d'un defaut de materiel, SECA se reservera Ie
droit de reparer ou de remplacer Ie produit defectueux. Toutes les reparations sous garantie doivent etre effec-tuees par un
Centre de service agree SECA.
Vous pouvez obtenir Ie nom et I'adresse du Centre de service Ie plus pres de chez vous en composant sans frais Ie:
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
ou en consultant notre site Web au www.samsung.com/ca

Conditions
Main-d'oeuvre et
Categorie Taille Service
Pieces
Service au comptoir ou
37" pouces et plus
LCD Televiseur Service a domicile
Un (I) an
(numerique)
32" pouces et moins Service au comptoir

Plasma (Digital)
Service au comptoir ou
DLP Teleprojecteur Un(l)an Tous
Service a domicile
CRT Teleprojecteur
Pour tous les produits portatifs, Ie transport au et apartir du Centre de service agree demeure la esponsabilite du client.
Samsung Electronics Canada se reserve Ie droit d'offrir Ie Service adomicile dans la limite des disponibilites ou de d'offrir
d'autres types de service.

Exclusions
Cette garantie couvre uniquement les defauts de fonctionnement survenus acause d'un defaut de materiel ou de fabricationet ne
couvre pas I'usure normale ou les dommages esthetiques. Cette garantie est valable seulement pour Ie produit originalet Ie reyU de
vente original date constitue la seule preuve d'achat acceptee. Le client doit presenter Ie reyU au Centre deservice agree au moment
ou Ie client fait une demande de reparation sous garantie.

La garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causes par:

- un incendie, un accident, des eclairs, une inondation etlou tout cas de force majeure;
- une mauvaise installation ou reglage, une antenne inappropriee, des problemes de reception attribuables ades signaux faibles,
des surintensites du ciible d'alimentation, un mauvais reglage des fonctions definissables par I'utilisateur, un mau-vais entretien;
- toute defaillance survenue a la suite d'un mauvais usage, d'abus, d'un manque d'attention, d'un mauvais emploi ou d'une
modification.

En outre cette garantie ne couvre pas:

- les changements, un usage commercial tel que dans un hotel, un bureau, un restaurant ou tout autre etablissement d'af-faires ou
un emploi a des fins locatives;
- les reparations effectuees par tout autre que Ie Centre de service agree Samsung.

Cette garantie sera automatiquement annulee pour tout appareil qui aurait un numero de serie manquant oumodifie.
Cette garantie s'applique uniquement aux produits achetes et utilises au Canada saufindication contraire.

Pour des renseignements supplementaires, veuillez contacter:

Le service a la clientele Samsung
Samsung Electronique Canada Inc., Service ala Clientele
55 Standish Court
Mississauga, Ontario L5R 482
Canada
I-800-SAMSUNG (7267864)
www.samsung.com/ca
SAMSUNG COLOR TELEVISION &PROJECTION TELEVISION &PROJECTOR
LIMITED WARRANTY TO ORIGINAL PURCHASER
This SAMSUNG brand product, as supplied and distributed by SAMSUNG and delivered new, in the original carton to the original consumer
purchaser, is warranted by SAMSUNG against manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship for a limited warranty
period of: (90 Days Parts and Labor for Commercial Use)
Categories Parts Labor Size Service
37" and Lager Carry-In or In Home
LCD TV I Year I Year
32" and Smaller Carry-In
Projection Television
Plasma Display I Year I Year All Carry-In or In Home
DLP Projection TV
I Year 25" and Smaller Carry-In or In Home
Color Television I Year
(Excluding Picture Tube *) Under 26 " Carry-In
2 Year
Projector 2 Year All Carry-In or In Home
(Excluding Lamp **)
LED Pocket Projector I Year I Year All Carry-In
* 2 Years PIcture Tube (CRT) on Analog Color TV
** 180 Days after Purchasing and 600 Hours of Use Lamp on Projector

This limited warranty begins on the original date of purchase, and is valid only on products purchased and used in the United States. To receive
warranty service, the purchaser must contact SAMSUNG for problem determination and service procedures. Warranty service can only be performed
by a SAMSUNG authorized service center. The original dated bill of sale must be presented upon request as proof of purchase to SAMSUNG or
SAMSUNG's authorized service center.
SAMSUNG will repair or replace this product, at our option and at no charge as stipulated herein, with new or reconditioned parts or products if found
to be defective during the limited warranty period specified above. All replaced parts and products become the property of SAMSUNG and must be
returned to SAMSUNG. Replacement parts and products assume the remaining original warranty, or ninety (90) days, whichever is longer.
Certain products are eligible for In-home service at Samsung's discretion. To receive in-home service, the product must be unobstructed and accessible
to service personnel. If during in-home service repair can not be completed, it may be necessary to remove, repair and return the product. If in-home
service is unavailable, SAMSUNG may elect, at our option, to providefor transportation of our choice to and from a SAMSUNG authorized service
center. Otherwise, and for 25" and smaller television (for LCD TV, 32" and smaller), transportation to and from the SAMSUNG authorized service
center is the responsibility of the purchaser.
This limited warranty covers manufacturing defects in materials and workmanship encountered in normal, and except to the extent otherwise
expressly provided for in this statement, noncommercial use of this product, and shall not apply to the following, including, but not limited to:
damage which occurs in shipment; delivery and installation; applications and uses for which this product was not intended; altered product or serial
numbers; cosmetic damage or exterior finish; accidents, abuse, neglect, fire, water, lightning or other acts of nature; use of products, equipment,
systems, utilities, services, parts, supplies, accessories, applications, installations, repairs, external wiring or connectors not supplied or authorized by
SAMSUNG which damage this product or result in service problems; incorrect electrical line voltage, fluctuations and surges; customer adjustments
and failure to follow operating instructions, cleaning, maintenance and environmental instructions that are covered and prescribed in the instruction
book; reception problems and distortion related to noise, echo, interference or other signal transmission and delivery problems; picture tube (CRT)
brightness related to normal aging, or burned-in images. SAMSUNG does not warrant uninterrupted or error-free operation of the product.
THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES OTHER THAN THOSE LISTED AND DESCRIBED ABOVE, AND NO WARRANTIES WHETHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL APPLY AFTER THE EXPRESS WARRANTY PERIODS STATED ABOVE, AND NO OTHER EXPRESS
WARRANTY OR GUARANTY GIVEN BY ANY PERSON, FIRM OR CORPORATION WITH RESPECT TO THIS PRODUCT SHALL BE
BINDING ON SAMSUNG. SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, FAILURE TO REALIZE SAVINGS
OR OTHER BENEFITS, OR ANY OTHER SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE, MISUSE
OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT, REGARDLESS OF THE LEGAL THEORY ON WHICH THE CLAIM IS BASED, AND EVEN
IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOR SHALL RECOVERY OF ANY KIND AGAINST
SAMSUNG BE GREATER IN AMOUNT THAN THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT SOLD BY SAMSUNG AND CAUSING
THE ALLEGED DAMAGE. WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING, PURCHASER ASSUMES ALL RISK AND LIABILITY FOR LOSS,
DAMAGE OR INJURY TO PURCHASER AND PURCHASER'S PROPERTY AND TO OTHERS AND THEIR PROPERTY ARISING OUT OF
THE USE, MISUSE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT SOLD BY SAMSUNG NOT CAUSED DIRECTLY BY THE NEGLIGENCE
OF SAMSUNG. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS
PRODUCT, IS NONTRANSFERABLE AND STATES YOUR EXCLUSIVE REMEDY.
Some states do not allow limitations on how long an implied warranty lasts, or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, so
the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights which vary
from state to state.
To obtain warranty service, please contact SAMSUNG at:
Samsung Electronics America, Inc.
105 Challenger Road
Ridgefield Park, NJ 07660-0511
1-800-SAMSUNG (7267864) - www.samsung.com
1-800-749-0260: Only Projector
IMPORTANT WARRANTY INFORMATION REGARDING TELEVISION FORMAT VIEWING
Standard screen format televisions (4:3, the aspect ratio ofthe screen width to height) are primarily designed to view standard format full-
motion video. The images displayed on them should primarily be in the standard 4:3 ratio format and constantly moving. Displaying stationary
graphics and images on screen, such as the dark top and bottom letterbox bars (wide screen pictures), should be limited to no more than 15% of the
total television viewing per week.

Wide screen format televisions (16:9, the aspect ratio of the screen width to height) are primarily designed to view wide screen format full-
motion video. The images displayed on them should primarily be in the wide screen 16:9 ratio format, or expanded to fill the screen if your model
offers this feature, and constantly moving. Displaying stationary graphics and images on screen, such as the dark side-bars on non-expanded standard
format television video and programming, should be limited to no more than 15% of the total television viewing per week.

Additionally, viewing other stationary images and text such as stock market reports, video game displays, station logos, web sites or computer
graphics and patterns, should be limited as described above for all televisions. Displaying any stationary images that exceed the above guidelines
can cause uneven aging of picture tubes (CRTs) or Plasma Display Panels that leave subtle, but permanent burned-in ghost images in the television
picture. To avoid this, vary the programming and images, and primarily display full screen moving images, not stationary patterns or dark bars. On
television models that offer picture sizing features, use these controls to view the different formats as a full screen picture.

Be careful in the selection and duration of television formats used for viewing. Uneven CRT or Plasma Display Panels aging as a result of
format selection and use, as well as other burned-in images, is not covered by your Samsung limited warranty.

1111111111111111111111111111111111111111111